Detailing 120 Enu

Tekla Structures
Detailing Manual
Product version 12.0 March 2006

Copyright 2006 Tekla Corporation
Copyright 1992-2006 Tekla Corporation and its licensors. All rights reserved. This Software Manual has been developed for use with the referenced Software. Use of the Software, and use of this Software Manual are governed by a License Agreement. Among other provisions, the License Agreement sets certain warranties for the Software and this Manual, disclaims other warranties, limits recoverable damages, defines permitted uses of the Software, and determines whether you are an authorized user of the Software. Please refer to the License Agreement for important obligations and applicable limitations and restrictions on your rights. In addition, this Software Manual is protected by copyright law and by international treaties. Unauthorized reproduction, display, modification, or distribution of this Manual, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the full extent permitted by law. Tekla, Tekla Structures, Xcity, Xengineer, Xpipe, Xpower, Xsteel, and Xstreet are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Tekla Corporation in the European Union, the United States, and/or other countries. Other product and company names mentioned in this Manual are or may be trademarks of their respective owners. By referring to a third-party product or brand, Tekla does not intend to suggest an affiliation with or endorsement by such third party and disclaims any such affiliation or endorsement, except where otherwise expressly stated. Portions of this software: 2D DCM 1989-2004 D-Cubed Limited. All rights reserved. EPM toolkit 1995-2004 EPM Technology a.s., Oslo, Norway. All rights reserved. XML parser 1999 The Apache Software Foundation. All rights reserved. DWGdirect, DGNdirect and OpenDWG Toolkit/Viewkit libraries 1998-2005 Open Design Alliance. All rights reserved. Analysis Engine included in Tekla Structures uses a program copyrighted by and is the property of Research Engineers International . All rights reserved. Elements of the software described in this Manual may be the subject of pending patent applications in the European Union and/or other countries.
Contents
Preface......................................................................................................... 1
Getting Started ............................................................................................ 5

1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 1.5 1.6 1.7 1.8 Basics .................................................................................................... 5 Component catalog................................................................................ 15 Using components................................................................................. 22 Defining parts and plates........................................................................ 26 Defining bolts and welds ........................................................................ 30 AutoConnection..................................................................................... 39 AutoDefaults ......................................................................................... 42 Using Excel in connection design............................................................ 44
Steel Connection Properties .................................................................. 49

2.1 2.2 2.3 2.4 2.5 2.6 Notch ................................................................................................... 49 Haunch................................................................................................. 56 Stiffeners .............................................................................................. 58 Beam cut .............................................................................................. 62 Doubler plate ........................................................................................ 65 Angle box ............................................................................................. 67
TEKLA STRUCTURES - DETAILING MANUAL Contents
Concrete Detailing .................................................................................... 71

3.1 3.2 3.3 3.4 3.5 3.6 3.7 3.8 3.9 3.10 3.11 3.12 3.13 3.14 3.15 3.16 Corbel connection (14) ........................................................................... 71 Seating connections............................................................................... 75 Seating with dowel (75) .......................................................................... 75 Two-sided seating with dowel (76)........................................................... 80 Seating with dowel to flange (77)............................................................. 84 Two-sided seating with dowel to flange (78) ............................................. 86 Concrete stairs (7) ................................................................................. 88 Stairwells and elevator shafts (90) ........................................................... 90 Slabs .................................................................................................... 94 Slab generation with polygon plate (61) ................................................... 94 Slab generation with points (62) .............................................................. 96 Modeling of floor bay (66) ....................................................................... 97 Modeling of slab area (88) .................................................................... 105 Automatic seam recognition (30) ........................................................... 108 Array of objects (29)............................................................................. 110 Hole generation (32) ............................................................................ 111
ii
Reinforcement ......................................................................................... 115

4.1 4.2 4.3 4.4 4.5 4.6 4.7 4.8 4.9 4.10 4.11 4.12 4.13 4.14 4.15 4.16 4.17 4.18 4.19 4.20 4.21 Getting started with reinforcement......................................................... 116 Basic reinforcement properties ............................................................. 117 Working with reinforcement .................................................................. 123 Reinforcement for foundations .............................................................. 132 Strip footing (75).................................................................................. 132 Pile cap reinforcement (76)................................................................... 134 Pad footing (77)................................................................................... 139 Starter bars......................................................................................... 141 Beam, column, and slab reinforcement.................................................. 144 Beam reinforcement (63)...................................................................... 144 Double tee reinforcement (64) .............................................................. 147 Beam end reinforcement (79) ............................................................... 150 Corbel reinforcement (81)..................................................................... 153 Round column reinforcement (82) ......................................................... 156 Rectangular column reinforcement (83) ................................................. 160 Hole reinforcement for slabs and walls (84)............................................ 164 Hole creation and reinforcement (85)..................................................... 166 Slab bars (18) ..................................................................................... 170 Single bars, bar groups, and meshes .................................................... 172 Reinforcement mesh array in area (89).................................................. 174 Lifting anchor (80)................................................................................ 177
iii
Built-up Components ............................................................................. 185

5.1 5.2 5.3 5.4 5.5 5.6 5.7 5.8 5.9 5.10 5.11 5.12 5.13 5.14 5.15 5.16 5.17 Beams ................................................................................................ 185 Box girder (S13) .................................................................................. 186 Cross profile (S32) ............................................................................... 188 Cross plate profile (S33) ....................................................................... 189 Tapered beam (S98) ............................................................................ 190 Tapered beam 2 (S45) ......................................................................... 192 Columns ............................................................................................. 196 Tapered column (S99).......................................................................... 196 Tapered column 2 (S44) ....................................................................... 199 Frames ............................................................................................... 201 Tapered frame comonor (S53) .............................................................. 201 Connections and details ....................................................................... 204 Tapered beam to column (197) ............................................................. 204 Tapered column to beam (199) ............................................................. 206 Tapered beam to beam (200)................................................................ 207 Tapered column base plate (1068) ........................................................ 209 Tapered component properties ............................................................. 210
Bracing Components ............................................................................. 217

6.1 6.2 6.3 6.4 6.5 6.6 6.7 6.8 6.9 6.10 Glossary of parts.................................................................................. 218 Simple gusset plate connections ........................................................... 220 Corner bracing connections .................................................................. 245 Windbracing connections...................................................................... 271 Bracing connection elements ................................................................ 276 Defining gusset plate properties ............................................................ 285 Defining brace connection properties ..................................................... 291 Defining minor plate properties.............................................................. 296 Defining bolt and hole properties ........................................................... 301 Defining other properties ...................................................................... 302
iv
Tower Components ................................................................................ 305

7.1 7.2 7.3 7.4 7.5 7.6 7.7 7.8 7.9 Tower elements................................................................................... 306 Brace to tower leg connections ............................................................. 313 Brace to brace connections .................................................................. 320 Editing tools ........................................................................................ 327 Defining general properties................................................................... 332 Defining tower leg properties ................................................................ 334 Defining tower bracing properties.......................................................... 340 Defining bolt properties ........................................................................ 344 Defining connection material................................................................. 350
Automated Reinforcement Layout ...................................................... 353

8.1 8.2 8.3 8.4 8.5 8.6 8.7 8.8 8.9 8.10 8.11 8.12 8.13 8.14 Automated reinforcement layout tools.................................................... 353 Double-tee beam (51) .......................................................................... 355 Inverted-tee beam (52)......................................................................... 363 Ledge beam (53) ................................................................................. 378 Rectangular beam (54) ........................................................................ 393 Ledge spandrel (55)............................................................................. 406 Rectangular spandrel (56) .................................................................... 418 Columns (57) ...................................................................................... 429 Topping (58) ....................................................................................... 440 Wash (59)........................................................................................... 443 Hollowcore beam (60).......................................................................... 446 Post-tensioning (61)............................................................................. 450 Edge and corner reinforcement (62) ...................................................... 453 U Bar of concrete slab (63)................................................................... 454
CS Components ...................................................................................... 459

9.1 9.2 9.3 9.4 9.5 9.6 9.7 9.8 9.9 9.10 9.11 9.12 9.13 9.14 Component reference list...................................................................... 460 3D cut (10) .......................................................................................... 461 Anchor (10) ......................................................................................... 462 Wall teeth (12) ..................................................................................... 470 Column-beam (14) ............................................................................... 478 Opening in wall (40) ............................................................................. 480 Parts at beam (82) ............................................................................... 486 Rebar in beam (90) .............................................................................. 491 Concrete console (110) ........................................................................ 509 Concrete console (111) ........................................................................ 519 Concrete beam-beam (112) .................................................................. 525 Inbedded detail (1008) ......................................................................... 534 Precast foundation block (1028) ............................................................ 538 Border rebar (93) ................................................................................. 542
10 Custom Components ............................................................................. 549

10.1 10.2 10.3 10.4 10.5 10.6 10.7 10.8 Defining custom components ................................................................ 550 Editing custom components .................................................................. 559 Defining variables ................................................................................ 564 Functions to use in formulas ................................................................. 574 Defining custom component properties .................................................. 584 Managing and using custom components .............................................. 596 Battering connection (13)...................................................................... 609 Custom components reference ............................................................. 610
Appendix B : Connection Map ........................................................... 611 Index ......................................................................................................... 655
vi
Preface
Introduction
This is the Tekla Structures Detailing Manual, a comprehensive guide to Tekla Structures modeling, analysis, and design software. The following paragraphs explain how this guide is organized, suggest different paths for different types of user, describe the other guides provided in the package, and tell you how to report any problems you have with the software or guides.
Audience
This guide is aimed at structural engineers, detailers and designers who model, analyze, and design concrete and steel structures. We assume that you are familiar with the processes of structural engineering.
Additional help resources

The following resources also provide information about Tekla Structures:
Web site
http://www.tekla.com
E-mail
Contact your local helpdesk via e-mail: Area office China Finland France Germany E-mail address TeklaStructures.Support.CHI@Tekla.com TeklaStructures.Support.FI@Tekla.com TeklaStructures.Support.FR@Tekla.com TeklaStructures.Support.GER@Tekla.com
TEKLA STRUCTURES - DETAILING MANUAL Preface
Area office Japan Malaysia Middle East Sweden UK US
E-mail address TeklaStructures.Support.JPN@Tekla.com TeklaStructures.Support.MY@Tekla.com TeklaStructures.Support.ME@Tekla.com TeklaStructures.Support.SWE@Tekla.com TeklaStructures.Support.UK@Tekla.com TeklaStructures.Support.US@Tekla.com
If you believe you have discovered a problem with this software, please report it to your Tekla Structures Reseller using the maintenance request form provided at Help > Tekla on the Web > Maintenance request.... Please send any comments or suggestions about Tekla Structures documentation to BetC_Documentation@tekla.com.
Conventions used in this guide

Typefaces
We use different typefaces for different items in this guide. In most cases the meaning is obvious from the context. If you are not sure what a certain typeface represents, you can check it here. Any text that you see in the user interface appears in bold. Items such as window and dialog box titles, field and button names, combo box options, and list box items are displayed in this typeface. New terms are in italic bold when they appear in the current context for the first time. All the text you enter yourself appears in "quotation marks". We use italics for emphasis. Extracts of Tekla Structuress program code, HTML, or other material that you would normally edit in a text editor, appears in monospaced Courier font. Program names, such as functions, environment variables, and parameters, appear in Courier bold. Filenames and folder paths appear in Arial.

Noteboxes
We use several types of noteboxes, marked by different icons. Their functions are shown below: A tip might introduce a shortcut, or suggest alternative ways of doing things. A tip never contains information that is absolutely necessary.
A note draws attention to details that you might easily overlook. It can also point you to other information in this guide that you might find useful.
You should always read very important notes and warnings, like this one. They will help you avoid making serious mistakes, or wasting your time.
This symbol indicates advanced or highly technical information that is usually of interest only to advanced or technicallyoriented readers. You are never required to understand this kind of information.
Related guides
Tekla Structures includes a comprehensive help system in a series of online books. You will also receive a printed installation guide with your setup CD. Modeling Manual How to create a physical model. Analysis Manual How to create loads and run structural analysis. Detailing Manual How to create reinforcement, connections, and details. Drawing Manual How to create and edit drawings. System Manual Covers advanced features and how to maintain the Tekla Structures environment. TplEd Users Guide How to create and edit report and drawing templates. SymEd Users Guide How to use the SymEd graphical interface to manipulate symbols. Installation Guide Printed booklet explaining how to install Tekla Structures.
Organization
This guide is divided into the following chapters and appendices:
Chapter 1: Getting Started

Explains basics of Tekla Structures connections.
Chapter 2: Steel Connection Properties

Explains common properties of Tekla Structures steel connections.
Chapter 3: Concrete Detailing

Explains how to create concrete connections, details, and parts.
Chapter 4: Reinforcement
Explains how to create reinforcement components and single reinforcing bars.
Chapter 5: Built-up Components

Explains the built-up components that create different built-up beams, columns, and frames.
Chapter 6: Bracing Components

Explains how to create and use bracing connections and details.
Chapter 7: Tower Components

Explains how to create and use tower components.
Chapter 8: Automated Reinforcement Layout

Explains how to create reinforcement using the automated tools available in Tekla Structures
Chapter 10: Custom Components

Explains how to define your own connections and details.
Appendix B: Connection Map

Contains illustrations of Tekla Structures connections, grouped according to framing and connection type.
Getting Started
Introduction
Once you have created a frame of parts in your Tekla Structures model, you will need to connect those parts to complete the model. Tekla Structures contains a wide range of components that you can use to automate the process of creating a model. This chapter explains the basics about components - what they are and how to create them using Tekla Structures. We will begin with the basic concepts, followed by a general description of components properties. Finally, we will show you how to use components in practice.
Contents
This chapter is divided into the following topics: Basics (p. 5) Component catalog (p. 15) Using components (p. 22) Defining parts and plates (p. 26) Defining bolts and welds (p. 30) AutoConnection (p. 39) AutoDefaults (p. 42) Using Excel in connection design (p. 44)
1.1 Basics
Introduction
Components are tools that you can use to automatically create the parts, welds, and bolts required to connect parts. They are linked to main parts, so, when you modify a main part, the associated component also changes.
TEKLA STRUCTURES - DETAILING MANUAL Getting Started
Benefits
The main benefits of working with components are: 1. You can save the properties of a component using an easily-identifiable name and keep it for future use. For example, you could save the properties of a W12x65 column base plate connection as W12x65.j*, and use it for several projects. When you modify the size of a profile, Tekla Structures automatically modifies the relevant components. When you use Copy or Mirror, Tekla Structures automatically includes all the associated components.
2. 3.
Component concepts
Components are tools that automate tasks and group objects so that Tekla Structures treats them as a single unit. Components adapt to changes in the model, so that Tekla Structures automatically modifies a component if you modify the parts it connects. This is an example of how to apply a connection: 1. Pick the main part To see information about the connection, click the connection symbol
2. Pick the secondary part. The connection automatically creates the required parts, fittings, bolts, etc.
Component types
Components have the following subtypes: Item Connections Description Connect two or more parts, and create all the required objects (cuts, fittings, parts, bolts, welds etc.). Automatically create and assemble the parts to build a structure, but does not connect the structure to existing parts. Modeling tools can include connections and details. Add a detail to a main part. A detail is only connected to one part. When you create a detail, Tekla Structures prompts you to pick a part, followed by a point to locate the detail. Examples Two-sided clip angle, bolted gusset. Stairs, frames Symbol
Modeling tools
Details
Stiffeners, base plates, lifting hooks
System and custom components
Tekla Structures contains hundreds of system components by default. You can also create your own components, custom components. They have following subtypes: connection detail part seam
All components are stored in the Component catalog (p. 15). To open the component catalog, use the keyboard shortcut Crtl + F.
See also
Custom Components (p. 549) Exploding components (p. 550)
Component dialog box

The component dialog box is in two sections.
Upper part
You use the upper section of the dialog box to save and load predefined settings, see Save, Load, Save as, Help in the Modeling manual. For some components, it also contains buttons for accessing the bolt, weld and DSTV dialog boxes. For information on handling the saved properties, see Component properties files in the System manual.
Tabs
The green symbol indicates the correct direction for the connection or detail.
Tekla Structures uses the automatic property value
Tekla Structures uses the default property value The parts you select appear in blue. The parts the component creates appear in yellow
Lower part
The lower section of the dialog box is divided into tabs. This is where you define the properties of the parts and bolts that the component creates. The most common tabs that appear here are:
Picture illustrates the component. It shows just one example, but you can usually use one component in many situations. Parts is where you define the properties of the parts the component
creates
Parameters is where you set parameters to control the component (for example, for stiffeners, end plates, chamfers, etc.) Bolts is where you define the number of bolts and their edge dis-
tances
General is where you define the direction of the connection or detail and AutoDefaults rules
Picking order
To create a connection you need to pick existing parts or points. The default picking order for a connection is: 1. 2. 3. Main part Secondary part(s) If there is more than one secondary part, click the middle mouse button to finish selecting parts and create the connection.
Some connection dialog boxes illustrate the picking order for parts using numbers, as shown below:
Pick the parts in the order shown in the Picture
Details
The default picking order for a detail is: 1. 2. Main part. A point in the main part to show the location of the detail.
Modeling tools
The default picking order for a modeling tool is: 1. Pick one to three point(s) to show the location of the objects the modeling tool creates.
Up direction
The up direction of a connection or a detail indicates how the connection is rotated around the secondary part, relative to the current work plane. If there are no secondary parts, Tekla Structures rotates the connection around the primary part. The options are: +x, -x, +y, -y, +z, -z.
The Picture tab in the dialog box shows the up direction Tekla Structures will use. Tekla Structures also indicates the up direction in the connection symbol:
Manually defining up direction
To manually define the up direction: 1. 2. 3. Double-click the connection symbol to open the connection dialog box. On the General tab, change the x, y, or z direction. Try positive directions first. Click Modify to use the new values.
Automatic and default properties

Some connection dialog boxes contain list boxes that show property options as graphics. You can select system defaults, AutoDefaults, or have Tekla Structures automatically set the properties.
System default properties
If you leave fields in connection dialog boxes blank, Tekla Structures uses the system default properties. Manual entries, default, automatic and properties in the joints.def file, all override these system defaults. You cannot change system default properties.
10
Default and automatic properties
Icon
Description To have Tekla Structures use a default property in a connection, select the option marked with this symbol. If you use AutoDefaults for the connection, Tekla Structures uses the property defined in the AutoDefaults rules. If you are not using AutoDefaults, Tekla Structures creates the connection using the system default property. To have Tekla Structures automatically determine which option to use for a property, select the option marked with this symbol. Example, Boomerang bracing connection (60):
More information Using AutoDefaults (p. 42)
Use the Automatic option on the Gussetbolt1 tab to have Tekla Structures determine how the clip angle is connected to the gusset plate and beam.
11
General tab
Connections and details have the same General tab. It contains the following properties: Field
Up direction
Description Rotates the connection around the secondary part or detail around the main part. The fields next to the image define rotation angle around the x- and y-axis of the secondary. The upper one is for y- and the lower one for x.
More information Up direction (p. 9)
Position in relation to primary part
Available only for details. Select a checkbox next to the images to indicate the position of the definition point of the detail, relative to the main part. Use the Horizontal offset and Vertical offset fields to define the horizontal and vertical alignment of the detail, relative to the primary part.
Locked Class
Prevents modifications. A number given to all parts the connection creates. You can use class to define the color of parts in the model. Identifies the connection. Tekla Structures can display this connection code in connection marks in drawings. Automatically sets connection properties according to the selected rule group. To switch AutoDefaults off, select the rule group None. Automatically switches the connection to another according to the selected rule group.
Locking objects Colors
Connection code
AutoDefaults Rule Group
Using AutoDefaults (p. 42)
AutoConnection Rule Group
12
Design and Design type tabs

Some component dialog boxes include a Design tab, others include a Design type tab. Use the options on these pages to check if the component will bear the UDL (uniform distributed load), according to AISC (ASD) specifications. This design check is intended for use with imperial units. The Design tab also contains options to: Use AutoDefaults rule groups to automatically modify component properties to take the calculated load. To define which AutoDefaults rule group to use, go to the General tab and select the rule in the AutoDefaults rule group list box. For more information, see Reaction forces and UDL in the online help. Use information in an Excel spreadsheet to check connection design and automatically update component properties to bear the UDL. This is useful when you want to check connection design according to other design codes. See Using Excel in connection design (p. 44).
Design tab
To check the design of a component that has a Design tab page: 1. 2. 3. 4. Go to the Design tab and select Yes in the Use UDL listbox. To use information in an Excel spreadsheet in the UDL calculation, select Excel in the External design listbox. Enter the information you want to use in the calculation in the remaining fields. Select a connection in the model and click Modify. To view the results of the check, right-click the component symbol and select Inquire from the pop-up menu.The inquire object window opens, which contains a summary of the design checks and related information.
See also Using Excel in connection design (p. 44).

Design type tab
To check the design of a component that has a Design type tab page: 1. 2. Open the component properties dialog box. Go to the Design type tab and select Yes in the Check connection list box. Tekla Structures will check the connection each time it is used or changed in a model. Enter the information you want to use in the calculation in the remaining fields. Select a connection in the model and click Modify. Tekla Structures checks the component. A green component symbol indicates that the connection will bear the UDL, red indicates it will not.
3. 4. 5.
13
6.
To view the results of the check, right-click the component symbol and select Inquire from the pop-up menu.The inquire object window opens, which contains a summary of the design checks and related information, for example:
Primary angle, Gross shear [AISC ASD F4-1 (p5-49)] applied = 250.00, allowable = 190.80, capacity = 1.31 FAIL (t = 0.5000, tmin = 0.6551)
Example of design check information in the Inquire object dialog box.
The first row shows the part checked, the name of the check and a reference to the AISC specification. The second row shows the applied and allowed force and how much capacity has been used. The third row shows the results and possible solutions. In this example the primary angle plate was not thick enough. Tekla Structures has indicated the minimum thickness required to bear the UDL.
14
1.2 Component catalog

Tekla Structures contains a component catalog, where all components and sketched cross sections are stored. To open the component catalog, use the keyboard shortcut Crtl + F, or click the Search component icon on the component toolbar (see Component catalog example (p. 16)).
Using the component catalog

To open the component catalog, use the keyboard shortcut Crtl + F, or click the Search component icon on the component toolbar (see Component catalog example (p. 16)). You can do the following with components and sketched cross sections: search using name, number, or keywords start creating view properties collect your own favorites define keywords edit or add descriptions import/export
15
Component catalog example
This example shows the search results for the search term "Part":
View thumbnails Search View View folders details Show/ hide descriptions
To sort a column, click the header cell. System components have blue symbols. Custom components have yellow symbols.
Double-click the name to set the properties and create the component.
Component description.
16
Component grouping
By default, components are grouped in folders based on their type and framing condition. You can add and remove components, and create folders and subfolders. Information on the folders you create is stored in the file ComponentCatalogTreeView.txt, located in the attributes folder in the current model folder. The default tree settings are stored in the file ComponentCatalogTreeView.txt file, located in the folder ..\TeklaStructures\12.0\environments\*your environment*\system. If you modify the default tree, your settings are stored in the current model folder.
Creating new folders
To create new folders in the tree view, right-click a level in the tree and select an option from the popup menu:
Create new folder to create folder at the same level Create new sub-folder to create a folder one level below
Symbols
The first column in the catalog indicates the component types with following symbols: Symbol Component type System connections System detail System modeling tool Custom connections and seams Custom details Custom parts Sketched cross sections
17
Pop-up menus
System components
Right-click a system component in the Search view list to open a pop-up menu containing the following commands: Properties... Edit keywords... Add to Favorites Add to Search result... Remove from Search result Change picture... AutoDefaults Import
Custom components
Right-click a custom component in the Search view list to open a pop-up menu containing the following commands: Properties... Edit keywords... Add to Favorites Add to Search result... Remove from Search result Change picture... AutoDefaults Export Import Edit custom component Delete custom component
Sketched cross sections
Right-click a sketch in the Search view list to open a pop-up menu containing the following commands: Properties... Edit keywords... Add to Favorites Add to Search result... Remove from Search result Export Import Delete cross section sketch
See also
Thumbnail images (p. 19) Descriptions and keywords (p. 19) Grouping components (p. 20) Managing custom components (p. 604) Sketching and using cross sections
18
Thumbnail images
Most system components have a default thumbnail image in the component catalog, which shows you a typical situation where the component can be used. For example, this is what the thumbnail image for Bolted gusset (11) connection looks like:
To edit a thumbnail image for a component: 1. Create an image and save it in bmp format in ..\Tekla Structures\12.0\nt\bitmaps folder. To create the image, you can use Component basic view and Snapshot commands, for example.
2. 3. 4. 5. 6.
Press Crtl + F to open the component catalog. Right-click the component and select Change picture... Locate the thumbnail and select it: Click OK. Tekla Structures links the thumbnail to the component.
Descriptions and keywords

Descriptions
To view a component description, select the component in the Component catalog. Use the button to show or hide descriptions.
You can create new descriptions and edit existing ones: The default component descriptions are stored in the ComponentsDescriptions.csv file, located in ..environments\*your_environment*\system folder.
19
To add or edit a description, type text in the description field. When you select another component in the component catalog, Tekla Structures prompts you to save the description you added or edited. The first time you edit a component description, Tekla Structures creates the ComponentDescriptions.csv file in the current model's attributes folder and saves the edited descriptions there. Edited component descriptions are model-specific. To restore the default descriptions, delete the ComponentDescriptions.csv file in the model's attributes folder. Tekla Structures will then use the default descriptions file in the system folder.
Keywords
To add or edit keywords, right-click a component in the component catalog, and select Edit keywords... Keywords you add or edit are saved in ComponentCatalog.txt file in the current model folder. You can combine ComponentCatalog.txt files and move them to the system folder: ...\TeklaStructures\12.0\environments\*your environment*\system..
Grouping components
To create a new folder based on the results of a search:
1. 2. 3. 4.
Removing components from groups
In the Component catalog, enter your search criteria and click Search. To group the search results in a new folder, click Store. In the Store search result dialog box, enter a name for the folder and click
OK.
The new folder appears in the tree.
To remove components from a group, right-click the component and select: or

Remove from search result if the folder was created from a search Remove, if it is a default group.
20
Customizing and saving components

Many components are suitable for use in different situations. You can define the properties of a component to use in a specific situation, then save a copy in the component catalog to use in similar situations. For example, well use the Bolted gusset (11) component to connect a single brace at the base plate of column.
1.
To save a copy of the component, well right-click the component symbol in the model, and select Publish in catalog.... The Publish in catalog dialog box appears.
2.
We can add the component to a specific group. By default, the component is added to the All group.
21
3.
By default the component uses the same thumbnail image as the original component. To change the thumbnail, see Thumbnail images (p. 19).
Component toolbars
You will also find all the available components on the component toolbars, located to the right of the main Tekla Structures window. If the toolbars are not visible, click Window > Toolbars > Components to display them.
Usage
This is an example of toolbars and the functions they contain: Initiates the last connection you used Use the arrows to flip through the toolbars to check which components are available
Opens component catalog
Toolbar number or symbol
Component icons
1.3 Using components

Introduction
This section explains how to use components. It also includes an example.
Creating components
You create different types of component in different ways. For example, you pick existing parts to indicate which members a connection or a detail is attached to. You need to pick points to indicate the location or length of a detail or a modeling tool. See also Picking order (p. 9).
22
When you create connections, Tekla Structures prompts you to pick the primary part (the part secondary parts connect to), then the secondary part(s). For an example of using a connection, see Example (p. 23).
Status
Tekla Structures uses different-colored connection symbols to show the status of connections and details, as shown below: Color Green Yellow Status Connection created successfully. Connection created, but has problems. Often occurs when bolts or holes have an edge distance less than the default value for that connection. A common reason is that the up direction is not appropriate. See Up direction (p. 9). Tip
Red
Connection failed.
Example
When applying a component that you are unfamiliar with, accept the default properties and apply the component. Then look to see what needs to be modified. This is quicker than trying to set the values for the component before seeing what the component actually creates. This is an example of how to generate an end plate connection. The End plate (144) connection connects two beams, or a beam to a column, using a bolted end plate. To create the end plate connection: 1. 2. 3. In the Component catalog (p. 15), type "144" and click Search. Double-click the End plate (144) line. Tekla Structures displays the component dialog box and starts the End plate (144) command. Click Apply to create the component using the default properties.
23
4.
Tekla Structures prompts you to pick the main part (column) and then the secondary part (beam). Tekla Structures creates the connection.
5.
Select the next main part or interrupt the command.
If you need to change the number of bolts or plate dimensions, for example, you need to modify the component. For more information, see Modifying components (p. 24). If you use incorrect properties, Tekla Structures may fail to create the component (see Creating components (p. 22)).
Modifying components
To modify a component, double-click the component symbol in the model. The component dialog box appears. This is where you modify the component properties.
If you have Select component switched on , you do not have to pick component symbol, but you can just pick any object belonging to a component. This is the only method for selecting custom parts, because they do not have any symbol. You can also indicate which connections and details are affected by the modifications:
Modify connection type: If you have selected several connections details, clicking the Modify button modifies all the selected connec-
tions and details irrespective of their type. If the connection type is not the same as in the dialog box, Tekla Structures changes the connection type.
Ignore other types: Tekla Structures only modifies connections and
details of the type shown in dialog box.

24
Conceptual components
Conceptual components help create a smooth workflow from engineer to detailer. Engineers do not have to consider fabrication details, they simply create conceptual components that look real. The detailer then takes the conceptual components and creates fully-detailed components that include all the information needed for fabrication, such as assemblies, cast units, and reinforcing bars. The Tekla Structures configuration you have determines which components you can create: Type Conceptual Symbol Configuration Standard Design Description Conceptual component does not create assembly, cast unit, or reinforcing bars. The dialog box is same as in detailed component, but does not contain fields for part and assembly positions. Steel Detailing Precast Concrete Detailing Round
Changing component type
Rectangular Detailed
Full Detailing
Fully detailed component contains part and assembly numbering fields and creates needed assemblies, cast units and reinforcing bars.
You cannot create conceptual components using the Steel Detailing, Precast Concrete Detailing, or Full Detailing configurations, but they do include a tool that you can use to change individual conceptual components to detailed components. The Standard Design configuration also includes a tool to change individual detailed components into conceptual components. To change a conceptual component to a detailed component: 1. 2. Select the component symbol. Click Tools > Change to detailing component.
Changing part properties, such as changing the size of the main part, do not automatically change the component type. So someone using the Standard Design configuration can change the model without automatically changing detailed components back to conceptual ones.
25
Tips on working with components

No component created Many parts found
If you have difficulty applying a component, check the status bar for prompts. For example, you may need to click the middle mouse button to stop selecting parts, before Tekla Structures creates the component. If you are applying a connection that only allows for one secondary member, you may see the message Many parts found on the status bar. This means that Tekla Structures cannot determine which parts to connect. You may have several parts in the same location, or the view may be set too deep. If the component does not create the parts you need by default (for example, stiffener plates), look for a switch to turn them on. If there is no switch, try entering a value in the thickness field for that part (for example, on the Stiffeners tab). If the component creates parts you do not need, look for the switch to turn them off. If there is no switch, enter a zero (0) in the thickness field for that part.
Switch parts on/ off
Default: Tekla Structures creates stiffeners or uses value retrieved from AutoDefaults. Automatic: Tekla Structures creates or omits stiffeners depending on the situation in the model. Tekla Structures does not create stiffeners. Tekla Structures creates stiffeners. You need to specify profiles for some components. If a component fails, try entering a valid profile.
Entering valid profiles
1.4 Defining parts and plates

Use the Parts tab to define the parts that Tekla Structures creates when you use a component.
26
Using the dialog box

Some components list all parts on one tab, others list parts on separate tabs as shown in the following examples.
One Parts tab
Where there is one tab, the label is usually Parts or Plates.
Several Parts tabs
Plates can also appear on separate tabs. For example, in connection 56, Corner tube gusset, the parts appear on both the Gusset and Tube diag tabs.
Dimensioning parts
Use the Parts tabs to dimension specific part types in components. To delete a part, enter zero (0) in the t (thickness) field.
27
Plates
Enter the following dimensions for plates: Dimension
t b h
Description Plate thickness Plate width Plate height
You do not have to enter these dimensions for every component type, as Tekla Structures determines the plate shape differently for different components. For example, in end plate connections, Tekla Structures calculates width and height using the number of bolts and bolt edge distances. Click Help in a component dialog box to check which dimensions you need to enter.
Beams
To specify a library or parametric profile to use for beams: Enter the profile name. Or click , and select a profile from the profile catalog. The profile must exist in the profile catalog.
Part position number

Use the Pos_no field to enter the part position number for each part the component creates. This overrides the settings on the Setup > Options > Preferences tab. Specify a prefix and a start number, as shown below.
Prefix Start number Some component dialog boxes have a second row of Pos_no fields for you to enter the assembly position number.
28
Using the Preferences tab

To set the default prefix and start number for all the parts that components create, click Setup > Options > Preferences tab. You define different prefixes and start numbers according to the parts relationship to other parts in the component. Separate the prefix and part number using the \ character (for example, p\1).
Prefix
Part number
29
Defining materials
To define the materials for the parts that components create, click against the Material field. Tekla Structures opens the Select material dialog box. Click a material type, then click the material to use for the part.
Using the Preferences tab

To set the default part material for the parts that components create, click Setup > Options > Preferences tab > Part material. Tekla Structures uses this default if you leave the Material field blank in the component dialog box when you apply the component.
1.5 Defining bolts and welds

Use the Bolts or Welds tabs to define which bolts, assemblies, and welds to use in specific components.
30
Using the Bolts tab

This illustration shows the properties you can set in the Bolts tab of component dialog boxes: Slotted hole dimensions
Slotted to create
slotted hole in part
Check bolt components to include (bolt, washer, screw) Position of bolt group: Vertical Horizontal Shank length protruding from the nut
Bolt spacing vertical Number of bolts Enter bolt order number of bolt to delete
Bolt group pattern Number of bolts Bolt spacing (horizontal)
Edge distance
31
Defining bolts
Use the following fields on the Bolts tab to specify the type of bolts to use in individual components: Dialog box text
Bolt size Bolt standard Tolerance Thread in mat
Description Must be defined in the bolt assembly catalog. See also The bolt and bolt assembly catalogs in the online help. The bolt standard to use inside the component. Must be defined in the bolt assembly catalog. Gap between bolt and hole. Indicate if the thread can be inside bolted parts when using bolts with a shaft. Has no effect if using full-threaded bolts. Location where bolts should be attached.
Site/Workshop
Increasing bolt length

To allow for additional material thickness, increase the length of the bolt on the Bolts tab. For example, you could use this for painted parts. Enter extra bolt length
Tekla Structures uses this value in bolt length calculation. See Bolt length calculation in the online help.
Creating holes
To only create a hole, deselect all the components on the illustration in the Bolts tab.
32
Number of bolts and spacing

Use the Bolts tab to specify the number of bolts and bolt spacing, both horizontally and vertically. Enter the number of bolts in the shorter field, and the spacing between bolts in the longer field, as shown below. Use a space to separate bolt spacing values. Enter a value for each space between bolts.
Example
For example, if there are 3 bolts, enter 2 values. Number of bolts Bolt spacing
The settings above result in this bolt group layout:
Bolt group orientation

Some connections include the following options on the Bolts tab to orientate bolt groups: Option Description Square. Staggered in the direction of the secondary part.
Sloped in the direction of the secondary part.
33
Bolt group pattern

For some components you can select different bolt group patterns. You have the following options: Option
Edge distance
Edge distance is the distance from the center of a bolt to the edge of the part. Enter top, bottom, left, and right edge distances on the Bolts tab. A dimension line on the illustration shows each dimension. Edge distance dimension line
Enter edge distances here
34
Bolt position
In the list box on the Bolts tab, select an option to indicate how to measure dimensions for vertical and horizontal bolt position. Then enter the dimension in the fields indicated below. If you leave this field blank, Tekla Structures uses a system default value. Enter dimensions
Measure dimension from....
Vertical bolt position

Use these options to indicate how Tekla Structures measures vertical dimensions: Option
Top
Dimension from Upper edge of secondary part to uppermost bolt.
Illustration
Middle
Centerline of bolts to centerline of secondary part.
Bottom
Lower edge of secondary part to lowest bolt.
35
Horizontal bolt position

Use these options to indicate how Tekla Structures measures horizontal dimensions: Option
Left
Dimension from Left edge of secondary part to far left bolt.
Illustration
Middle
Centerline of bolts.
Right
Right edge of secondary part to far right bolt.
Defining slotted holes

To define slotted holes in components: 1. 2. 3. 4. Open the component properties dialog box and click on the Bolts tab. Different bolt groups may appear on different tabs in different dialog boxes. Set Hole type to Slotted. Select which parts have slotted holes from the Slots in list box. Select No to create round holes. To shape slotted holes, enter the x or y dimensions of the hole. To produce a round hole, enter zero (0) for both dimensions.
36
Slotted hole length = x or y dimension + Bolt size +

Tolerance
For some components you can specify which parts have slotted holes using the Bolts tab. For example, Clip angle (141), Shear plate simple (146). You can also use the Bolt command to modify bolt groups after creating components.
Deleting bolts
To delete bolts from a bolt group: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Double click the component symbol to open the component dialog box. Go to the Bolts tab. Check Delete. Enter the bolt number(s) of the bolt(s) to delete, separated by a space. Bolt numbers run left to right and top down. Click Modify to change the selected component. Click OK to exit the component dialog box.
37
Example
You start with this bolt group: 1 3 5 2 4 6
You enter the following bolt numbers:
The bolt group now looks like this:
2 5
Defining bolt assemblies

On the illustration on the Bolts tab, check the pieces to use in the bolt assembly (bolt, washers, and nuts).
To change the bolt assemblies in the current component: 1. 2. 3. 4. Click the component symbol to select it. Check the pieces to use. Check Effect in modify. Click the Modify button.
38
Welds
To define the properties of the welds Tekla Structures uses in a component, click the Welds button in the component properties dialog box. Tekla Structures displays the appropriate weld dialog box. The illustration identifies each weld using a number. For each weld, use row 1 to define the arrow side of the weld, and row 2 for the other side.
See also
Welds in the online help
1.6 AutoConnection
Introduction
Use AutoConnection to automatically select and apply connections with predefined properties to selected parts. Use AutoConnection to have Tekla Structures automatically create similar connections for similar framing conditions.
Using AutoConnection
Use AutoConnection to have Tekla Structures automatically create connections using a predefined set of rules, or rule group.
39
Creating connections
To create connections using AutoConnection: 1. 2. 3. Pick the parts to connect. Click Detailing > AutoConnection... to display the AutoConnection dialog box. Select a rule group in the first list box on the Rule groups tab as shown below.
Rule group for AutoConnection Rule group for AutoDefaults
4.
Click the Create connections button.
When you use AutoConnection, Tekla Structures ignores the properties in the connection dialog boxes and creates connections using the properties defined in the rule group. Tekla Structures does not modify existing connections. You can change the properties of connections you create using AutoConnection.
Additional options
Use the options on the Advanced tab to indicate which rule groups you want to use for each Framing condition (beam to beam web, beam to beam flange, etc.). You also have the option not to apply a rule group, or to apply a specific connection.
40
Example Options
You can use a rule group for all framing types other than beam to column flange, and indicate a particular connection to use for that framing type. Use Connection selection to indicate your preferences for each framing condition. You have the following options: Option
None AutoConnection
Result Tekla Structures does not create a connection. Tekla Structures applies the connection defined in the rule group you have indicated in the first list box on the Rule groups tab. Click Select to pick from a list of available connections. Click a connection, then OK. Tekla Structures creates the connection you specify using the default properties. See Automatic and default properties (p. 10).
A named connection
Use Parameters selection to indicate which connection properties you want to use. The options are: Option AutoDefaults Result Tekla Structures applies the properties of the rule group you have indicated in the first list box on Rule groups tab. Tekla Structures applies the default connection properties. See Automatic and default properties (p. 10).
No AutoDefaults
41
1.7 AutoDefaults
Introduction
Use AutoDefaults to automatically apply connections. When you use AutoDefaults, Tekla Structures automatically creates connections with predefined properties. For example, you can use AutoDefaults to automatically adjust the thickness of each base plate you create, according to the primary part profile. If the primary part profile changes, Tekla Structures will also automatically adjust the thickness of the base plate.
Using AutoDefaults
With AutoDefaults you can have Tekla Structures apply connection properties using a predefined set of rules. You can use AutoDefaults together with AutoConnection to define connection properties, or separately to define the properties of a single connection. To use AutoDefaults for a single connection: 1. 2. 3. Open the connection dialog box. On the General tab, select a rule group (the rule group cannot be None). On all the tabs, set the fields that you want AutoDefaults to override to
Default by selecting the options marked with the arrow symbol
).
4.
Click Apply to create the connection using AutoDefaults. To quickly set all the fields in a dialog box to Default, load <Defaults> in the connection dialog box.
42
How to use AutoDefaults effectively

Use default values when you create a connection, then use AutoDefaults to modify the properties. If you manually modify connection properties after using AutoDefaults, Tekla Structures will not automatically update the connection properties, even if AutoDefaults is active. AutoDefaults does not change connection properties that have been modified. It only modifies connection properties in fields containing the default properties. For example, you have manually set a base plate thickness of 20 mm in the Base plate dialog box of a connection. AutoDefaults is active and sets plate thickness according to the primary part profile. If you modify the primary part profile, Tekla Structures does not update the base plate thickness. It remains at 20 mm.
Checking AutoDefaults properties

To check the properties AutoDefaults has applied to a connection: 1. 2. Double-click the connection symbol to open the connection dialog box. In the list box in the upper left corner of the dialog box, select <AutoDefaults>.
43
3.
Click Load. Tekla Structures shows the applied properties in the fields. You can also see all the combined properties used for that connection.
Checking AutoDefaults rules

You can check which rules AutoDefaults has used for a particular connection. 1. 2. Select the connection symbol and right-click. Select Inquire.
Tekla Structures shows the rule group and rule sets that the connection passed. You can also see all the properties files used for that connection.
1.8 Using Excel in connection design

You can link system components and Excel spreadsheets, so when a component is applied or modified, an associated Excel spreadsheet application can be run. The configuration information is passed from the component to the spreadsheet, calculation run within the spreadsheet and component properties passed back to the connection. You can use Excel in connection design for all steel components that have the Design tab in their properties dialog box.
Tekla Structures includes sample spreadsheet for connection design and a template spreadsheet you should use to create your own spreadsheet applications to use with Tekla Structures components. Before you start: Create the connections and parts. Create the Excel spreadsheet for connection type, or use a predefined file. See more in Setting up Excel files (p. 45).
To use the Excel spreadsheet for connection design: 1. 2. Double-click the connection to open the connection properties dialog box. Go to the Design (or Design type) tab and select Excel in the External design list box.
44
3. 4. 5. 6.
Click Modify. The connection properties are transferred from Tekla Structures to a connection type specific Excel spreadsheet, where the properties are calculated. The calculated properties are saved to an output file. The modified properties are transferred back to Tekla Structures and the connection is modified according to the changes.
Setting up Excel files

The following list describes what kind of files are needed for performing connection design with Excel: Visual Basic script file linking Tekla Structures with external software. Excel spreadsheet containing calculations. Component type specific spreadsheet, which contains predefined calculations. When you run the connection design, the connection properties and information of the main and secondary parts are transferred to the Input and Component sheets of the spreadsheet.
Connection specific result file, which displays the modified connection properties is stored to model folder. This file is created automatically from the Calculation sheet of the spreadsheet. The file is updated each time you modify the connection. Calculation results can be stored as Excel spreadsheet, HTML or PDF format, depending on how calculation spreadsheet is configured.
File names and locations
Excel.vb file (located in the ...\nt\bin\plugins folder) defines the Excel spreadsheet file names and the locations. Excel searches for the spreadsheet in the following order and with following name: 1. File named "component_ + number or name + .xls", from the current model folder: ..\*model folder*\exceldesign For example, ..\test_model\exceldesign\component_144.xls
45
2.
File name and path defined with variable XS_EXTERNAL_EXCEL_DESIGN_PATH : XS_EXTERNAL_EXCEL_DESIGN_PATH (=%XS_DIR%\environments\country-independent\exceldesign\) + "component_" + number + ".xls"
By default, the result file is stored in the model folder, and named with component ID (For example, component_9502_res.xls).
Sample implementation
Below is descibed the contents of an Excel spreadsheet which is used for End plate (144) connection: When user clicks Modify in the End plate (144) properties dialog box, Excel.vb file calls Excel spreadsheet named component_144.xls.
Contents
The sample spreadsheet includes the following sheets:

Inputs (user inputs on connection dialog).
Tekla Structures transfers the component properties from the component properties dialog box to this sheet.
Component
Tekla Structures transfers the component geometry and information on the main and secondary parts (for example, part profiles) into this sheet. The component attributes in the spreadsheet are the same as in the corresponding .inp file. See more about .inp files in Input files.
46
This sheet includes calculations (the calculations can be as Visual Basic macros in the sheet).
Calculation
Summary of calculation is collected to the Calculation sheet. This page or full Excel spreadsheet can be stored as a report of the calculation.
Outputs
Excel adds the modified values to the Output sheet. These values are tranferred back to the connection and connection in the model is modified accordingly.
47
Indicating component status

When you use Excel in connection design, you can have Tekla Structures use different colored component symbols to indicate the status of a component in the model. To do this, include the error attribute on the Output page of the Excel spreadsheet for the component. The possible values are: Value 1 Color Green Status Bolt edge distances are sufficient. Passes the connection design check using the UK and US design codes embedded in the system. 2 Yellow Edge distances are insufficient according to the value in the Coefficients properties in the Options dialog box (Setup > Options). Tekla Structures cannot calculate the component properties. Possible reasons include: Incorrect connection direction Incorrect workplane Inappropriate connection selected The connection design check was carried out using the embedded UK and US design codes and the connection cannot support the loading defined by the user.
Red
48
Steel Connection Properties

Once you have created a frame of parts in your Tekla Structures model, you will need to connect those parts to complete the model. This chapter explains the properties that are common to many different Tekla Structures connections and details.
Introduction
Contents
This chapter is divided into the following topics: Notch (p. 49) Haunch (p. 56) Stiffeners (p. 58) Beam cut (p. 62) Doubler plate (p. 65) Angle box (p. 67)
2.1 Notch
Use the options on the Notch tab to automatically create notches for the secondary beam, and control the notch properties. The Notch tab has two sections: automatic properties (top section) manual properties (bottom section).
Automatic and manual properties work independently of each other.
TEKLA STRUCTURES - DETAILING MANUAL Steel Connection Properties
49
Automatic notching
To switch on automatic notching, select an option in the notch shape list box. The fields on the Notch tab are: Field Description Notch shape. Turns automatic notching on and off. Notch size. Flange cut shape. More information Notch shape (p. 51)
Notch size (p. 52) Flange cut shape (p. 53) Notch dimension rounding (p. 53) Notch position (p. 54) Notch chamfer (p. 55)
Notch dimension rounding. Notch position.
Notch chamfer.
Automatic notching options affect both the top and bottom flange.
Manual notching
Use manual notching when a part that does not belong to the connection clashes with the secondary part. When you use manual notching, connections create cuts using the values you enter in the fields on the Notch tab. You can use different values for the top and bottom flange. Use the following fields to define manual notches: Field Description Side of flange notch. More information Side of flange notch (p. 55) Flange notch shape (p. 56)
Flange notch shape.
50
Field A B
Description The cut dimensions of the top and bottom flange in the dx and dy direction. Enter values for options in the flange notch shape list box, if possible. The gap between the notch edge and the primary beam flange is equal to the primary web rounding. The notch height is then rounded up to the nearest 5 mm. Flange notch depth dimension.
B A
Notch shape
Use the following options to define how Tekla Structures notches the secondary beam: Option Description AutoDefaults can change this option. Notches the secondary beam with the cuts square to the main beam web. Notches the secondary beam with the cuts square to the secondary beam. Notches the secondary beam with the dy cut square to the main beam, and the dx cut square to the secondary beam. More information Automatic and default properties (p. 10)
51
Notches the secondary beam with the cuts square to the secondary beam. Notches the secondary beam with the dy cut square to the main beam, and the dx cut square to the secondary beam.
Notch size
Use the following options to define notch size. Field Description AutoDefaults can change this option. Tekla Structures measures the notch size from the edge of the main beam flange, and from underneath the top flange of the main beam. Tekla Structures measures the notch size from the centerline of the main beam and from the top flange of the main beam. Enter the horizontal and vertical dimensions for these options in the fields shown below: More information Automatic and default properties (p. 10)
52
Flange cut shape

Use these options to define the shape of flange cut. Option Description AutoDefaults can change this option. Cuts the secondary beam flange parallel to the main beam. Cuts the secondary beam flange square. More information Automatic and default properties (p. 10)
Notch dimension rounding

Use these options to indicate if Tekla Structures should round up notch dimensions. Even if this setting is active, Tekla Structures only rounds up dimensions when necessary. Option Description AutoDefaults can change this option. Tekla Structures does not round notch dimensions. Switches on notch dimension rounding. Tekla Structures rounds up the dimension to the nearest multiple of the value you enter. For example, if the actual dimension is 51 and you enter a round-up value of 10, Tekla Structures rounds the dimension up to 60. Enter the increment for horizontal and vertical dimension rounding in the following fields: More information Automatic and default properties (p. 10)
53
Example
This example shows the effect of using rounding: Before: Tekla Structures applies these horizontal and vertical rounding values:
After:
Notch position
Use the following options to indicate the horizontal position of the cut: Option Description AutoDefaults can change this option. Cut below the flange. More information Automatic and default properties (p. 10)
Cut above the flange.
54
Notch chamfer
Use the following options to define notch chamfering: Option Description AutoDefaults can change this option. Does not chamfer the notch. Creates the notch with a line chamfer. Chamfers the notch. More information Automatic and default properties (p. 10)
Enter a radius for the chamfer in the field shown below:
Side of flange notch

Use the following options to indicate which side of the beam flange Tekla Structures notches: Option Description AutoDefaults can change this option. Notches both sides of the flange. Notches the near side of the flange. Notches the far side of the flange. More information Automatic and default properties (p. 10)
55
Flange notch shape

Use the following options to indicate the notch shape in the beam flange. Option Description AutoDefaults can change this option. Tekla Structures removes the entire flange of the secondary as far back as you specify. The default depth for the notch is twice the thickness of the secondary flange. The cut always runs the entire width of the secondary flange. Chamfers the flange. If you do not enter a horizontal dimension, Tekla Structures creates a chamfer of 45 degrees. Cuts the flange with default values unless you enter values in fields A and B. Does not cut the flange. More information Automatic and default properties (p. 10)
Manual notching (p. 50)
Manual notching (p. 50)
Cuts the flange according to the value in field A to make it flush with the web. Cuts the flange according to the values in fields A and B.
Manual notching (p. 50) Manual notching (p. 50)
2.2 Haunch
You can use several options to define haunch plates. The Haunch tab has two sections that control the following:
56
Creating haunch plates Haunch plate chamfer.
Creating haunch plates

Use the Create plate field to define when Tekla Structures should create haunch plates. The options are: Option Default Auto Description Same as the Auto option. When a clip angle crosses the secondary beam flange(s), Tekla Structures automatically creates top or bottom haunch plates, or both, as needed. Always creates top and bottom haunch plates. To create a single plate, enter zero in the thickness (t) field for the plate you do not need (top or bottom plate). More information
Yes
No
Does not create haunch plates.
Enter values in the following fields, for the top and bottom plates, if needed:
t - thickness b - width h - height Pos_no - Part position number. Enter the part prefix in the first field, the part
number in the second field.

Material - Click ... to select a material from a material catalog Name - The part name, for example TOP_PLATE
57
Haunch plate chamfer

To define haunch plate line chamfer properties, enter horizontal and vertical dimensions for the top and bottom plates, as indicated below: Top plate line chamfer Vertical dimensions Horizontal dimensions
Bottom plate line chamfer
2.3 Stiffeners
Use the following fields to define stiffeners. (These fields do not appear in the dialog box of every connection that creates stiffeners): Field Description Creates stiffeners. More information Creating stiffeners (p. 59) Stiffener type (p. 59)
Select chamfered or square stiffeners. Stiffener size.
Stiffener orientation.
Stiffener orientation (p. 61) Stiffener position (p. 61)
Stiffener position.
58
Field
Description Stiffener chamfer.
More information
Gap between stiffener and the bottom flange of beam.
Creating stiffeners
Use the following options to define when Tekla Structures creates stiffeners: Option Description AutoDefaults can change this option. The Automatic option. Tekla Structures creates stiffeners when necessary. Tekla Structures does not create stiffeners. Tekla Structures creates stiffeners. More information Automatic and default properties (p. 10)
Stiffener type
You can use several options to define stiffener type. The Stiffeners tab may contain two types of options, to define: Whether the stiffeners are chamfered or square Stiffener size.
59
Chamfered or square
Use the following options to create chamfered or square stiffeners: Option Description AutoDefaults can change this option. Creates line chamfers. More information Automatic and default properties (p. 10)
Creates square stiffener plates leaving a gap for the primary web rounding. Creates line chamfers.
Stiffener size
Use the following options for stiffener size: Option Description AutoDefaults can change this option. Creates a full stiffener of the same height as the web of the main part. Tekla Structures determines the size based on the size of the shear plate. Tekla Structures attempts to keep the bottom edges of the stiffener plate and shear plate level, if possible. Leaves a gap between the stiffener plate and the bottom flange of the main part bottom. Does not create stiffeners. More information Automatic and default properties (p. 10)
60
Stiffener orientation
Use the following options to define stiffener orientation: Option Description AutoDefaults can change this option. Creates stiffeners in the direction of the secondary part. Creates stiffeners perpendicular to the main part. More information Automatic and default properties (p. 10)
Stiffener position
Enter the following dimensions to define the position of the stiffener:
A B B
A - The gap between the main part web and the stiffener plate. B - The vertical location of the near side or far side stiffener. Enter positive or negative dimensions to move the stiffener.
By default, Tekla Structures positions the edges of the stiffener level with the flanges of the secondary part.
61
2.4 Beam cut

Use the options on the Beam cut tab to define rat holes, flange cuts, and end preparation for beams. You can use different values for top and bottom flanges. The Beam cut tab contains the following fields: Field Description Rat hole. More information Rat holes (p. 63)
Flange cut.
Flange cut (p. 63)
End preparation.
End preparation (p. 64)
Field
A C
Description
A: The vertical dimension of the top and bottom rat hole. B: Gap between the web of the secondary part and the main part. Tekla Structures adds the value you enter here to the gap you enter on the Picture tab. C: The horizontal dimension of the top and bottom rat hole. D: Gap between the secondary part flange and the main part. Tekla Structures adds the value you enter here to the gap you enter on the Picture tab.
C A D
62
Rat holes
These options control rat hole settings. Option Description AutoDefaults can change this option. Creates a round rat hole. More information Automatic and default properties (p. 10)
Creates a square rat hole.
Creates a rat hole with a line cut. Creates a round rat hole with a radius that you specify in this field:
. Creates a cone-shaped rat hole with a radius that you specify in this field:
Flange cut
Use the following options to define flange cuts: Option Description AutoDefaults can change this option. More information Automatic and default properties (p. 10)
63
Option
Description Does not cut the flange.
More information
Cuts the flange.
End preparation
Use the following options to define end preparation: Option Description AutoDefaults can change this option. The Automatic option. Prepares both top and bottom flange. Does not prepare the beam end. Prepares both top and bottom flange. Prepares the top flange. More information Automatic and default properties (p. 10)
Prepares the bottom flange.
64
2.5 Doubler plate

Doubler plates are used to strengthen the web of the main part. Tekla Structures does not create them by default. Use the following fields to create and define doubler plates: Field Description Creates doubler plates. More information Creating doubler plates (p. 66) Doubler plate edge shape (p. 67)
Defines the shape of the edge of the doubler plate.
General settings
Use the following fields to determine the location of the doubler plate in the web, and control plug weld hole settings.
A A: Edge distance from the
face of the column flange.

B: Plug weld hole location E B C B D
from the edge of the doubler plate.

C: Number of holes. D: Hole spacing. E: Top edge of doubler plate
in relation to the top of the secondary part.
B C D
65
Plug weld hole size

Enter the following dimensions to define the size of plug weld holes: Hole diameter. Slot length. Slot width.
Creating doubler plates

Use the following options to define if Tekla Structures creates doubler plates and where they are located: Option Description AutoDefaults can change this option. By default, Tekla Structures does not create doubler plates. Does not create doubler plates. Creates a doubler plate to the near side. Creates a doubler plate to the far side. Creates doubler plates to both sides of the web. More information
66
Doubler plate edge shape

Use the following options to define the shape of the edge of the doubler plate: Field Description AutoDefaults can change this option. More information
Creates a bevelled plate. Enter the angle of the bevel in this field:
Creates a square plate.
2.6 Angle box

The purpose of seat angles is to carry loads from the secondary part. Only the Angle profile box (170) connection and Angle profile box (1040) detail create seat angles by default. Seat angles can be located to the top, bottom or both flanges of the secondary part. The seat angle can be stiffened, and bolted or welded to the main and secondary parts. Use the following fields to create seat angles and define their properties: Field Description Seat angle position. More information Seat angle position (p. 68) Seat angle orientation (p. 69) Seat angle rotation (p. 69)
67
Seat angle orientation.
Seat angle rotation.
Field
Description Seat angle attachment. Stiffener type.
More information Seat angle attachment (p. 70) Seat angle stiffener type (p. 70)
Stiffener chamfer type. Bottom plate chamfer. Notching.
Middle stiffener position. End stiffener position.
Seat angle position

Use the following options to define the position of seat angles: Option Description AutoDefaults can change this option. More information
Does not create seat angles.
Creates a seat angle on the top flange. Creates a seat angle under the bottom flange. Creates a seat angle to both the top and the bottom flange.
68
Seat angle orientation

Use the following options to define if the longer leg of the angle profile connects to the main or the secondary part: Option Description AutoDefaults can change this option. Connects the longer leg of the angle profile to the secondary part. Connects the longer leg of the angle profile to the main part. Connects the longer leg of the angle profile to the part where bolts reach further from the angle corner. More information
Seat angle rotation

Use the following options to define seat angle rotation. The Angle profile box (170) connection also includes an option to use a plate as the seat instead of the angle profile: Option Description AutoDefaults can change this option. Does not rotate the angle profile. Rotates the angle profile horizontally 90 degrees. To stiffen the rotated angle, select the Middle option in the Middle stiffener position list box. Uses a bottom plate as the seat instead of the angle profile.
More information
69
Seat angle attachment

Use the following options to define how the angle profile is attached to the main and secondary parts: Option Description AutoDefaults can change this option. Bolts the angle profile to both the main and secondary parts. Welds the angle profile to the main part and bolts it to the secondary. Bolts the angle profile to the main part and welds it to the secondary. Welds the angle profile to both the main and the secondary parts. More information
Seat angle stiffener type

Use the following options to define the seat angle stiffener: Option Description AutoDefaults can change this option. Creates a rectangular stiffener plate. Creates a triangular stiffener plate. The line connecting the ends of the angle profile legs determines the stiffener plate shape. More information
70
Concrete Detailing
Introduction Audience Assumed background Contents
This chapter introduces the concrete detailing tools available in Tekla Structures. This chapter is aimed at concrete detailers and designers. We assume that you have read Parts in the Modeling Manual and created parts. This chapter contains the following topics: Corbel connection (14) (p. 71) Seating connections (p. 75) Concrete stairs (7) (p. 88) Stairwells and elevator shafts (90) (p. 90) Slabs (p. 94)
3.1 Corbel connection (14)

Connects a beam to a column using a straight, beveled, or rounded corbel and reinforcing bars or fastening plates.
Parts created
Corbel Bearing plate Reinforcing bar (optional) Fastening plates (2) (optional) The Getting Started (p. 5) chapter introduces the concept of using elements to automatically connect parts and create model objects.
TEKLA STRUCTURES - DETAILING MANUAL Concrete Detailing
71
Where to use
Situation
More information Connects a beam to a column using a reinforcing bar and a beveled corbel.
Connects a beam to a column using fastening plates and a rounded corbel.
Before you start
Create the following parts: Concrete column Concrete beam
72
Defining properties
Use the tabs in the Corbel connection (14) dialog box to define the following properties: Tab
Picture Parts Rebar
Contents Corbel dimensions, corbel shape, tolerances Bearing plate properties Option to use reinforcing bar or fastening plates to connect corbels, reinforcing bar and fastening plate properties Information used in structural analysis
See also Chamfering corbels (p. 73) Creating a bearing plate (14) (p. 74) Connecting material for corbels (14) (p. 74)
General Analysis
General tab (p. 12) Analysis properties of components
Picking order
1. 2.
Column Beam
Chamfering corbels
The options for chamfering corbels are: Option Description Beveled (Default)
73
Option
Description Straight
Rounded
Creating a bearing plate (14)

To create the bearing plate, define the thickness, material, and name of the bearing plate, and enter the plate distances from the edges of the corbel.
Connecting material for corbels (14)

Select one of the following options to specify the parts to use to connect the corbel to the beam or column: Option Connect by using One reinforcing bar (Default) Two fastening plates
74
3.2 Seating connections

Tekla Structures includes several seating connections that you can use to connect concrete columns and beams using anchor bolts. The seating connection tools are: Command Seating with dowel (75) (p. 75) Two-sided seating with dowel (76) (p. 80) Seating with dowel to flange (77) (p. 84) Two-sided seating with dowel to flange (78) (p. 86) Icon Description Connects a column and beam using an anchor bolt. Connects a column and two beams using anchor bolts. Connects the flanges of a beam to a column using anchor bolts. Connects the flanges of two beams to a column using anchor bolts.
3.3 Seating with dowel (75)

Connects a column and a beam using an anchor bolt.
Parts created
Anchor bolt Nut Washer plate Bearing plate Fittings for beam and column Hole for bolt Corbel (optional) Recess for nut and washer plate (optional) The Getting Started (p. 5) chapter introduces the concept of using components to automatically connect parts and create model objects.
75
Where to use
Situation
More information Connects a beam and a column using an anchor bolt. Washer plate and nut protrude from the beam.
Connects a beam and a column using an anchor bolt and a beveled corbel. Washer plate and nut recessed into the beam.
Before you start
Create the following parts: Concrete column (round or rectangular profile) Concrete beam (rectangular, HI, I, L, or inverted T profile)
76
Defining properties
Use the tabs in the Seating with dowel (75) dialog box to define the following properties: Tab
Picture
Contents Position of anchor bolt, bolt hole and bearing plate, bolt hole dimensions, option to fit beam or column, grout type, beam clearance
See also Defining bolt hole dimensions (p. 77) Fitting the beam or column (75) (p. 78) Defining grout (75, 76) (p. 78)
Parts
Bearing plate, grout, washer plate, nut, recess, and anchor bolt properties Option to create corbel, corbel properties Information used in structural analysis
Creating a recess (75, 76) (p. 79) Chamfering corbels (p. 73) General tab (p. 12) Analysis properties of components
Corbel General Analysis
Picking order
1. 2.
Column Beam
Defining bolt hole dimensions

Enter the following bolt hole dimensions:
Field 1 2 3
Description Hole dimension in the direction of the beam The distance from beam center line to hole center and bolt. Hole dimension in the direction perpendicular to the beam.
77
Fitting the beam or column (75)

Select one of the following options to have Tekla Structures fit the column or the beam: Option Description Fits the column. (Default)
Fits the beam. The beam must be sloped.
Defining grout (75, 76)

Select one of the following options to include and define grout: Option Description No grout. (Default)
Bolt hole grouted. No nut or washer plate.
Bolt hole grouted. Bolt, washer plate, and anchor bolt protruding.
78
Creating a recess (75, 76)

Select one of the following options to define if the nut and washer plate are recessed into the beam: Option Description Nut and washer plate on the surface of the beam. (Default)
Nut and bolt plate recessed into the beam.
Defining recess dimensions

If you choose to recess the nut and washer plate into the beam, enter the following dimensions to define the recess:
79
Bearing plate position (75, 76)

Select one of the following options to define the position of the bearing plate: Option Description Square with beam. (Default)
Square with column.
3.4 Two-sided seating with dowel (76)

Connects a column and two beams using anchor bolts.
Parts created
Anchor bolts (2) Nuts (2) Washer plates (2) Bearing plates (2) Fittings for beam and column (2) Holes for bolts (2) Corbels (optional) (2) Recesses for washer plate and nut (optional) (2) The Getting Started (p. 5) chapter introduces the concept of using components to automatically connect parts and create model objects.
80
Where to use
Situation
More information Connects two beams to a column using anchor bolts and creates corbels. Nuts and washer plates on the surface of the beams.
Connects two beams to a column using anchor bolts. Nuts and washer plates recessed into the beams. Second beam is sloped, and is cut to create a gap between the beam and the column.
Before you start
Create the following parts: Concrete column (round or rectangular profile) Two concrete beams (rectangular, HI, I, L, or inverted T profile)
81
Defining properties
Use the tabs in the Two-sided seating with dowel (76) dialog box to define the following properties: Tab
Picture
Contents Dimensions defining the position of the anchor bolts relative to the beams and bearing plates. Options to cut and shape the ends of the beams and to fit column or beams.
More information To use the same dimensions for both beams, set Use the
same parameters for left and right beams to Yes and enter
the dimensions for the left beam only. Shaping beam ends (76, 78) (p. 83) Fitting beam or column (76) (p. 83)
Parts Left beam Right beam
Bearing plate, bolt, nut and anchor bolt properties Left beam is the first beam picked and right is the second. Anchor bolt, bolt hole and recess properties. Clearance between beam and column if beam is sloped.
Dimensioning parts (p. 27) Defining bolt hole dimensions (p. 77) Creating a recess (75, 76) (p. 79) Defining recess dimensions (p. 79) Chamfering corbels (p. 73) General tab (p. 12)
Option to create corbel, corbel properties Information needed for structural analysis
Analysis properties of components
Picking order
1. 2. 3.
Column Beam 1 Beam 2
Click the middle mouse button to finish picking and create the connection.
82
Fitting beam or column (76)

Select one of the following options to fit the beams or the column: Option Description Fits column. (Default)
Fits beam.
Shaping beam ends (76, 78)

Select one of the following options to define how the end of the beams are cut and shaped: Key 1 = column 2 = first beam picked 3 = second beam picked Options
83
3.5 Seating with dowel to flange (77)

Connects the flanges of a beam to a column using anchor bolts and an optional corbel.
Parts created
Anchor bolts (2) Nuts (2) Washer plates (2) Bearing plate (1) Fittings for beam and column Holes for bolts (2) Corbel (optional) Recess for nut and washer plates The Getting Started (p. 5) chapter introduces the concept of using components to automatically connect parts and create model objects.
Where to use
Situation
More information Connects the flanges of a beam to a column using anchor bolts and a beveled corbel. Nuts and washer plates recessed.
Before you start
Create the following parts: Concrete column (Round or rectangular profile) Concrete beam with flange (rectangular, HI, I, L, or inverted T profile)
84
Defining properties
Use the tabs in the Seating with dowel to flange (77) dialog box to define the following properties: Tab
Picture
Contents Dimensions defining the position of the anchor bolt relative to the beam and bearing plate, length of anchor bolt in beam and column, bolt hole dimensions and position Bearing plate, washer plate, nut and anchor bolt properties, option to create recess, recess properties Options to create corbel, corbel properties Information needed for structural analysis
More information Defining bolt hole dimensions (p. 77)
Parts
Creating a recess (77, 78) (p. 85)
Chamfering corbels (p. 73) General tab (p. 12) Analysis properties of components
Creating a recess (77, 78)

To cut a recess in the beam web, select the Yes option in the Create recess dropdown list. Enter the following dimensions to define the recess:
85
3.6 Two-sided seating with dowel to flange (78)

Connects the flanges of two beams to a column using anchor bolts and optional corbels.
Parts created
Anchor bolts (4) Nuts (4) Washer plates (4) Bearing plate (2) Fittings for beam and column Holes for bolts (4) Corbels (2) optional Recesses for nut and washer plate (4) The Getting Started (p. 5) chapter introduces the concept of using components to automatically connect parts and create model objects.
86
Where to use
Situation
More information Connects the flanges of two beams to a column using anchor bolts.
Connects the flanges of two beams to a column using anchor bolts and beveled corbels.
Before you start
Create the following parts: Concrete column (Round or rectangular profile) Concrete beam with flange (rectangular, HI, I, L, or inverted T profile)
87
Defining properties
Use the tabs in the Two-sided seating with dowel (78) dialog box to define the following properties: Tab
Picture
Contents Dimensions defining the position of the anchor bolts relative to the beam and bearing plate, length of anchor bolts in beam and column, beam ends Bearing plate, washer plate, nut and dowel properties Left beam is the first beam picked and right is the second. Bolt hole, nut and washer plate properties. Option to create recess, recess properties.
More information Defining bolt hole dimensions (p. 77) Shaping beam ends (76, 78) (p. 83) Dimensioning parts (p. 27) Defining bolt hole dimensions (p. 77) Creating a recess (77, 78) (p. 85) Chamfering corbels (p. 73)
Parts Left beam Right beam
Left corbel Right corbel General Analysis
Option to create corbel, corbel properties
General tab (p. 12) Information needed for structural analysis Analysis properties of components
3.7 Concrete stairs (7)

Creates concrete stairs. The Getting Started (p. 5) chapter introduces the concept of using components to automatically connect parts and create model objects.
88
Where to use
Situation
More information A concrete staircase connected to two concrete slabs.
Before you start Defining properties
Create two concrete slabs to connect the stairs to. Use the tabs in the Concrete stairs (7) dialog box to define the following properties: Tab
Parameters Part Notch
Contents Run and rise dimensions, stair slab thickness Stairs properties Tolerance between the stairs and adjacent parts
More information Defining stair properties (p. 90) Part properties Defining stair properties (p. 90)
Picking order
1. 2. 3.
Pick a point to indicate the level of the lowest step. Pick a point to indicate the level of the highest step. Click two parts to which to connect the stairs. Tekla Structures fits the stairs to these parts using the values in the Tolerance fields on the Notch tab.
Click the middle mouse button to finish picking and create the stairs.
89
Defining stair properties

The illustration below shows the stairs properties that you can define. Length Length at bottom Height Width Slab thickness Length at top Tolerances
In the Approximate dimension list box, select whether you want to specify the rise (Height) or the run (Length).
Defining stair tolerances

Tolerances are the gaps that Tekla Structures leaves between the ends of the stairs and adjacent structures. Use the Notch tab to define length, height, and width tolerances.
3.8 Stairwells and elevator shafts (90)

Creates a rectangular stairwell or elevator shaft to represent the structure in the design stage. When you detail the structure, you can apply seams, connections, and reinforcement to complete the details of a stairwell or elevator shaft. This component uses the Concrete stairs (7) (p. 88) component for creating stairs. The Getting Started (p. 5) chapter introduces the concept of using components to automatically connect parts and create model objects.
Parts created
Wall panels Landings (optional) Flights of stairs (optional) Roof slab (optional) Openings (optional)
90
Where to use
Situation Second point picked.
More information A stairwell over four floors created using the default options. As shown, the points picked and the dimensions on the Stairs and landings tab determine the length of the stairwell. Walls consist of one or more precast concrete panels.
First point picked. Stairwells always contain a first floor and a top floor. Indicate the number of additional floors on the Plan view tab, Levels field. This stairwell has 2 additional floors, for a total of 4 floors.
Top floor
Additional floor Additional floor 1st or ground floor
Elevator shaft created by selecting the Elevator shaft option on the Stairs and landings tab, Type field, for all floors.
91
Defining properties
Use the tabs in the Stairwells and elevator shafts (90) dialog box to define the following properties: Tab
Plan view
Contents Number of floors or levels. Position of picked points. Length and width of shaft. Wall panel dimensions.
More information Defining stairwell properties (p. 93)
Openings
Opening dimensions for each wall panel and for the first, additional, and top floors. Stair and landing options and dimensions. Option to create elevator shaft (in the Type list boxes).
Each wall may have a single opening, or no opening.
Stairs and landings
Attributes
Basic part properties for walls, stairs, and landings. Option to use the saved properties from the Concrete stairs (7) (p. 88) component for the first, additional, and top stairs.
Part properties Defining stair properties (p. 90)
Picking order
1.
On the Plan view tab, check the Position option. The default is in the middle of walls 3 and 4.
2. 3.
Pick a point to indicate the position of wall 3. Pick a point to indicate the position of wall 4.
92
Defining stairwell properties

Use the Plan view tab in the Stairwells and elevator shafts (90) dialog box to define the properties of the stairwell or elevator shaft.
Defining number of floors and height

To define the number of levels and floor heights, enter a height for each floor level in the Levels field, for example:
Tekla Structures also uses these values to calculate the total height of the stairwell.
Defining position
To create the stairwell or elevator shaft, you pick two points in the model. Use the Position field to define the location of the stairwell or elevator shaft relative to these points. The options are: Middle (default) Left Right Enter the offset distance from the selected position. Here, the offset is from the middle of wall.
Defining length and width

To manually define the total length and total width of the stairwell or elevator shaft, enter the following values: L - total length W - total width Leave both fields blank to have Tekla Structures automatically calculate these dimensions from the the points picked:
93
Second point picked.

Total length, L
First point picked.

Total width, W
The dimensions defined on the Stairs and landings tab may override the total length or width that is automatically calculated or that you manually enter.
3.9 Slabs
Tekla Structures includes several tools you can use to create concrete slabs of various types. The tools are: Command Slab generation with polygon plate (61) (p. 94) Icon Description Creates slabs based on the shape of an auxiliary slab or plate. Change the size or shape of the slab by dragging the handles of the plate. Creates slabs based on points you pick. You cannot change slab shape after creation. Creates slabs between two support lines, which can be polylines or sloped. Creates various types of concrete slabs, including fanned layouts.
Slab generation with points (62) (p. 96) Modeling of floor bay (66) (p. 97) Modeling of slab area (88) (p. 105)
3.10 Slab generation with polygon plate (61)

Creates slabs based on the shape of an auxiliary plate.
94
Parts created Where to use
Concrete slabs. Situation More information Hollow core slab created using an auxiliary plate. To change the shape or size of the plate, use the Polygon shape command. See Edit > Polygon shape in the online help.
Create a contour plate or a concrete slab in the shape of the slabs you want to create. This is the auxiliary plate. Use the tabs in the Slab generation with polygon plate (61) dialog box to define the following properties: Tab
Parameters
Contents Slab dimensions, gaps between slabs, slab direction and distribution Slab properties
More information Defining slab properties (p. 96) Defining slab type (p. 95) Part properties
Parts
Analysis Loading
Analysis properties of slab. Loads properties used for analysis.
Analysis properties of slab components Loading
Picking order
Auxiliary plate.
Defining slab type

To select a slab type from the profile catalog, click the Slab field on the Parts tab. The profile catalog includes the following profile types: Hollow-core slabs Double tee slabs Thin-shell slabs Composite slabs button against the
95
To find these profiles: 1. 2. or: 1. 2. 3. In the Profile category list box, select Parametric profile. Set profile type to User-defined, parametric. In the Profile subtype list box, select a slab profile. In the Profile category list box, select Library profile. In the tree, click User-defined, fixed.
Defining slab properties

Use these options to define slab properties: Property Description Gap between slabs. To create overlapping slabs, enter a negative value. Use this to allow for joint reinforcement, grouting, etc.
Distance from the outer edges of the slabs and the corner of the auxiliary plate. To create a slab larger than the auxiliary plate, enter a negative value. Use this option to allow space for other parts, such as bearing beams.
Generation direction Adjustment
Defines the direction in which Tekla Structures creates the slabs. Defines which slab(s) to truncate or delete for even slab distribution. The options are first, last, and first and last. Click the browse button to select a slab profile from the profile catalog.
Slab profile
3.11 Slab generation with points (62)

Creates slabs based on the corner points you pick.
96
Concrete slabs. Situation More information Double tee slabs created by picking eight points. You cannot change the slab area once the slabs are created.
Defining properties
Use the tabs in the Slab generation with points (62) dialog box to define the following properties: Tab
Parameters
Contents Slab dimensions, gaps between slabs, slab direction and distribution Slab properties Analysis properties of slab. Loads properties used for analysis.
More information Defining slab properties (p. 96) Defining slab type (p. 95) Part properties Analysis properties of slab components Loading
Parts
Analysis Loading
Picking order
Pick any number of points to indicate corners of the slab. Close the shape by picking the first point you picked.
3.12 Modeling of floor bay (66)

Creates an area of concrete slabs between two support lines that you define, for example, between two main frames. Support lines can be polylines or sloped.
Parts created
Concrete slabs.
97
Where to use
Situation
More information Slab area created between two support lines.
Create two support lines with two or more points. Use the tabs in the Modeling of floor bay (66) dialog box to define the following properties: Tab
Parameters Profiles
Contents The position of the slab. The properties of slab profiles.
More information Defining slab position (p. 101) Defining slab profile properties (p. 103)
Picking order
1. 2. 3. 4.
Pick points to define the first support line. To finish, middle-click away from the last point picked. Pick points to define the second support line. To finish, middle-click away from the last point picked. Pick a point to indicate the origin of the slabs. Pick a point to indicate the direction of the slabs.
See also
Examples (p. 99)
98
Examples
These examples show how to use the Modeling of floor bay (66) component.
Example 1:
Pick 2 points to define support line 2. To finish, middle-click.
To finish, middle-click.
Pick 2 points to define support line 1. Pick a point to indicate the origin of the slab. Tekla Structures creates the floor bay.
To finish, middle-click. Pick a point to indicate the direction of the slab.
99
Example 2:
Pick 4 points to define support line 2. To finish, middle-click.
To finish, middle-click.
Pick 2 points to define support line 1. Tekla Structures creates the floor bay.
To finish, middle-click. Pick a point to indicate the direction of the slab.
Pick a point to indicate the origin of the slab.
100
Defining slab position

Use these options to define the position of the slab: Property Description The position of the slab relative to the origin line picked when creating the slab. The options are center of profile (default) or center of seam. Select the slab spacing and enter the appropriate dimension. The options are seam (default) or center to center. If you select the seam option, the bottom dimension is enabled. If you select the center-to-center otion, the upper dimension is enabled. Slab offsets from support lines 1 and 2.
Vertical position of the slab. The options are Top (default), Center or Bottom. Enter an optional offset value.
Projection type
Defines how the slabs are spaced on a sloping floor bay. See Defining projection type (p. 102)
101
Defining projection type

Use the Projection type field to define how to handle slab spacing or seams on a sloping floor bay. The options are Global (default), Support line 1, Support line 2, or Both support lines.
Global: the centers of the slabs remain constant, seam spacing adjusts.
Support line 1: Seamspacing on support line 1 does not adjust (effect
exaggerated here):
Support line 2: Seam spacing on support line 2 does not adjust (effect exaggerated here):
Both support lines: Seam spacing is calculated at the average plane position between both support lines
102
Along this line, center to center and seam width are exactly as entered in the dialog box: Support line 2
Support line 1
Plane between support lines 1 and 2
Defining slab profile properties

Use the options on the Profiles tab to define a default profile for all the slabs in the floor.
Index list
Use the Index list to specify different profiles, seam width, and various cutting options for specific slabs or seams. See also Adjustment type (p. 104). Input the values individually, or in a list:
Examples for slabs
If the origin point is the center of slab:
If the origin point is the center of seam:
103
Examples for seams
If the origin point is the center of slab:
If the origin point is the center of seam:
Adjustment type
Use to define the type of adjustment for the selected slab. The options are:
104 Default Use the default slab profile. Profile Use the specific slab profile. Cut left side Cut the left side of the profile. If no profile is defined,
uses the default slab profile.

Cut right side Cut the right side of the profile. If no profile is
defined, uses the default slab profile.

Cut both sides Cut both sides of the profile. If no profile is defined,
uses the default slab profile.

Seam width Adjust the seam width.
Profile/Seam width
Depending on which adjustment type option you choose, defines: The width of the default slab profile. The width of the specified profile. Seam width.
3.13 Modeling of slab area (88)

Use to create various types of concrete slabs, including fanned layouts. This component creates slabs between two support lines, which can be polylines or sloped. To create a fanned layout, use support lines that are curved or of different lengths.
Concrete slabs. Situation More information Slab area created between two support lines.
Fanned layouts of slab area
The Getting Started (p. 5) chapter introduces the concept of using components to automatically connect parts and create model objects.
Before you start
Create the two support lines with two or more points.
105
Defining properties
Use the tabs in the Modeling of slab area (88) dialog box to define the following properties: Tab
Parameters
Contents Distance from the outer edges of the slabs to the support lines, slab direction and distribution, fan angle. Slab properties. Element and seam index properties.
More information Defining slab area properties (p. 107)
Parts Advanced
Picking order
1. 2. 3.
Pick points to define the first support line. Click the middle mouse button outside the point you just picked. Pick points to define the second support line. Click the middle mouse button outside the point you just picked. Pick two points to indicate the direction of the slabs. The first point is the origin for the slabs.
106
Defining slab area properties

Use these options to define slab properties: Property Description Distances from the slab to the support lines.
Origin point
Origin point of the slab. Origin point is the point you pick after picking the support line points. The options are Middle, Bottom, and Top. Defines which slab(s) to truncate or delete, or how the slab area is generated. The slab closest to the first support lines origin is the first. The fan angle.
Support line plane Adjustment
Slab Standard spacing Advanced tab
Defining slab type (p. 95) Slab spacing. Use the Advanced tab to modify individual slabs and seams. You can index them and then define width or angle for the indexed objects. The number of the slab, seam, or fanned seam that is different from the others. The width of the indexed slab or seam. The fan angle of the indexed seam.
Index Width Angle
107
3.14 Automatic seam recognition (30)

Automatic seam recognition (30) is used to add predefined custom seams between parallel parts, such as slabs or wall elements.
Use for
Situation
More information Use to connect parts with predefined custom seams.
Before you start
Create parallel parts, for example, concrete slabs or walls. Create custom seam.
Defining properties
Use the tabs in the Automatic seam recognition (30) dialog box to define the following properties: Property
Seam name
Description Enter the seam name, or use the browse button (...) to locate the seam in the Select component dialog box. Enter the name of the seam attribute file (optional). Select to change the direction. Select to reverse the main and secondary part. You may need to change the Seam up direction too. Define the direction of the seam. Control the location of the calculated seam points.
Seam property file Seam direction Seam input part order
Seam up direction Position
108
Picking order
1. 2.
Pick the main part. Pick secondary parts. Click the middle mouse button to finish picking and create the seams between the parts.
See also
For more information on custom components, see Defining custom components.
109
3.15 Array of objects (29)

Use this component to copy model objects along a line. If you modify the original object, Tekla Structures also changes the copied objects.
Copies of the selected model objects. Situation Description An array of parts.
An array of components.
Before you start
Create the parts you want to copy.
110
Defining properties
Use the Array of objects (29) dialog box to define the following properties: Property
Number of copies Spacing values Copy to the opposite direction Start point for copying Copy at equal distances
Description The number of copies created. Define the spacing of the objects.
Choose either the object to be copied or the first input point. To create the objects at equal distances. Spacing value will be ignored.
Picking order
1. 1. 2. 3.
Pick the objects to copy. Click the middle mouse button to finish picking. Pick a point to indicate the start of the line along which to arrange copied objects. Pick a point to indicated the end of the line.
3.16 Hole generation (32)

Creates a hole in the object, or splits the object in two, if the hole cuts the whole object. Use this component, for example, in welded profiles, slabs, or panels generated with a component.
Parts created
Cut.
111
Where to use
Situation
More information A hole created by picking one point.
Defining properties
Use the tabs in the Hole generation (32) dialog box to define the following properties: Tab
Parameters
Contents Hole dimensions, rotation, location and cut method.
More information Defining hole properties (p. 113)
Picking order
To create a hole, 1. 2. 3. Pick the part or object (component) to be cut. Click the middle mouse button to end picking. Pick the position relative to the hole being generated.
112
Defining hole properties

Use the following properties to define the hole dimensions and location: Property Width Description Define hole dimensions and the location of the picked point (yellow cross in the image). The selected partcut option affects which of these dimensions are available.
Height Y distance
X distance To rotate the hole, define the rotation angle in this field.
The cutting depth.
Part cut
Select the hole type. The options are

Polygon creates a regtangular hole using width and height. Round plate creates a round hole using height as a diameter. Profile creates a cut using the selected profile.
Profile
If you selected Profile as the hole type, browse for the profile in Profile field.
113
114
Reinforcement
Introduction
Once you have created a model of concrete parts, you will need to reinforce the parts. This chapter explains how to create reinforcement in Tekla Structures. It also includes a general description of reinforcement properties and an overview of reinforcement commands. You can find step-by-step instructions for these commands in the online help.
Audience Assumed background
This chapter is aimed at concrete detailers and designers. Before you start to create reinforcement, you need to have concrete parts in your model, as explained in Parts in the Modeling Manual and in Concrete Detailing (p. 71). Running the structural analysis as explained in Analysis and Design in the Analysis Manual gives you the required area of reinforcement. Read Loads in the Analysis Manual for instructions on how to create loads.
Contents
This chapter is divided into the following sections: Getting started with reinforcement (p. 116) Basic reinforcement properties (p. 117) Working with reinforcement (p. 123) Reinforcement for foundations (p. 132) Beam, column, and slab reinforcement (p. 144) Single bars, bar groups, and meshes (p. 172)
TEKLA STRUCTURES - DETAILING MANUAL Reinforcement
115
4.1 Getting started with reinforcement

In Tekla Structures, you can use different methods to create reinforcement. You can create:
Concepts
Single reinforcing bars Reinforcing bar groups Reinforcement meshes Reinforcement components.
We recommend that you use reinforcement components to create reinforcement whenever possible. They are adaptive, attached to a concrete part, and updated automatically if the dimensions of the reinforced part change, for example. Then create additional reinforcing bars using other tools. Reinforcing bar groups consist of several identical, or very similar, bars. Tekla Structures always treats these bars as a group, modifies them in the same way, deletes them all at the same time, etc. Reinforcement meshes include bars in two perpendicular directions, i.e. main bars and crossing bars. Tekla Structures treats mesh bars as one unit but distinguishes the main and crossing bars.
Reinforcement properties
Every reinforcement object has properties which define it (for example, grade, diameter or size, minimum bending radius). Use the reinforcement properties dialog boxes to view or modify the properties of reinforcement. Click Properties > Reinforcing bars to open reinforcement properties dialog boxes, or double-click an existing reinforcement object in the model. You can use reinforcement properties in filters. For example, you can select, modify, or hide reinforcing bars based on their properties. See Filter in the Modeling Manual. You can include reinforcement properties and user-defined attributes in drawing and report templates. Basic reinforcement properties (p. 117) Reinforcement in drawings Getting Started (p. 5) with Detailing
Filtering by properties In reports and drawings See also
116
4.2 Basic reinforcement properties

This section explains properties that are common to most types of reinforcement in Tekla Structures.
Name Grade Size Bending radius
You can enter names for reinforcing bars. Tekla Structures uses names in reports and drawing tables. The strength of the steel used in reinforcing bars. Can also indicate other factors, such as the weldability or surface deformations of the bar. Depending on the environment, the nominal diameter of the bar, or a mark that defines the diameter. Complies with the design code you are using. Main bars, stirrups, ties, and hooks usually have their own minimum internal bending radii, which are proportional to the diameter of the reinforcing bar. The actual bending radius is normally chosen to suit the size of the mandrels on the bar-bending machine. Tekla Structures reinforcement bar bending types are recognized using internal bending type definitions. Internal bending types are hard coded to the software. However, these internal bending types are mapped to area specific reinforcement bar bending type codes in ...\system\rebar_schedule_config.inp file. This file can be localized to match local requirements. For more information on internal bending types, see Appendix G, Reinforcing bar bending types in the System manual.
Bending types
Reinforcement catalog
Gradesizeradius combinations are predefined in the reinforcement catalog. You can select which catalog to use, and add, modify, and delete the information it contains. See The reinforcing bar catalog in the online help.
117
Select...
To define the grade, size, and bending radius of a reinforcing bar, click Select... next to the Grade, Size, and Bending radius fields in the Reinforcing bar properties dialog box. The Select reinforcing bar dialog box appears, showing the available bar sizes for the chosen grade. You can also define whether the bar is a main bar or a stirrup or tie:
You can also enter the grade, size, and bending radius of individual reinforcing bars using the appropriate fields in the Reinforcing bar properties dialog box.
Class
Use Class to group reinforcement. To display reinforcing bars of different classes in different colors, click Setup > Colors... and select By class from the Colors list box. See also Colors in the Modeling Manual. Reinforcing bar groups mainly have the same properties as single reinforcing bars. They can also have the following extra properties: Number of bars Spacing (see Spacing reinforcing bars (p. 121)) Tapering
Bar groups
See also
Numbering reinforcement (p. 127)
118
Hooks
To add hooks to the ends of reinforcing bars for anchoring purposes, use the Hooks section of the Reinforcing bar properties dialog box:
The options for the hook at the beginning and end of the bar are: Option Description No hook Standard 90-degree hook Standard 135-degree hook Standard 180-degree hook Custom hook The reinforcement catalog contains predefined dimensions for all standard hooks (minimum bending radius, minimum hook length). See The reinforcing bar catalog in the online help.
Custom hook
To manually define the angle, radius, and length of a hook, select the Custom hook option and complete the following fields in the Reinforcing bar properties dialog box: Field
Angle Radius Length
Description Enter a value between 180 and +180 degrees. Internal bending radius of the hook. Length of the straight part of the hook. Angle Length
Radius
119
Concrete cover
Reinforcing bars need a concrete cover, to protect them against harmful elements, such as the weather and fire. When you create single bars, Tekla Structures uses the thickness of concrete cover to determine the position of the bar. You pick points to define the shape and plane of the bar.
Cover thickness Example
Use the Cover thickness fields in the reinforcement properties dialog boxes to define concrete cover. To create a beam stirrup, pick the corner points on the cross-sectional end plane of the beam to define the bar shape and plane. The cover thickness on the plane is the distance from beams bottom, top, and side surfaces to the stirrup. The cover thickness from the plane is the distance from the end surface of the beam to the stirrup, and perpendicular to the bar plane. Concrete cover Description Concrete cover on the plane For example, the distances from a beams bottom, top, and side surfaces to a stirrup. To specify different concrete covers on the different legs of a reinforcing bar, enter a thickness value for each leg in the On plane field, in the order you pick points to create the bar. If you enter less values than there are bar legs, Tekla Structures uses the last value for remaining legs. Concrete cover from the plane For example, the distance from a beams end surface to the closest stirrup, perpendicular to the stirrup plane.
Leg length
At the start and end point of a reinforcing bar, you can also define the concrete cover in terms of cover thickness or leg length. Option
Cover thickness Leg length
Description Defines the distance from the bar end to the concrete surface. Defines the length of the ultimate leg of the bar.
120
To define the length of an ultimate leg of a bar, use the Leg length option and the Snap to nearest points switch. Then pick anywhere on a part edge or line to indicate the direction for the bar leg.
Reinforcement components
When you use reinforcement components, Tekla Structures places the reinforcement using the dimensions of the part and the values in the Cover thickness field, or the graphic fields shown below:
Spacing reinforcing bars

Bar groups
There are several ways to distribute bars in a reinforcing bar group. To create a bar group, open the Reinforcing bar properties dialog box. On the Group tab, select an option from the Creation method list box. The options are: Option
By exact spacing value with flexible first space
Description Creates fixed, equal spaces between the bars. The first space adjusts to even out bar distribution. Enter the spacing value in the Exact spacing value field. If the first space is less than 10% of the exact spacing value, Tekla Structures removes one bar. Same as the first option, but the last space adjusts to even out bar distribution. Same as the first option, but the middle space adjusts to even out bar distribution. If there are an odd number of bars (two middle spaces), the other middle space adjusts to even out bar distribution. Same as the first option, but both the first and last spaces adjust to even out bar distribution. Distributes the bars using the information you specify in the Exact spacing values field, so you can enter every spacing value manually. Use the multiplication character to repeat spacings, e.g. 5*200, to create five spaces of 200.
By exact spacing value with flexible last space By exact spacing value with flexible middle space By exact spacing value with flexible first and last space By exact spacings
121
Option
Equal distribution by number of reinforcing bars Equal distribution by target spacing value
Description Tekla Structures determines the spacing value based on the fixed number of bars. Enter the number in the Number of reinforcing bars field. Tekla Structures aims the spacing value as closely as possible at the value in the Target spacing value field and determines the number of bars compatibly.
Omitting reinforcing bars

You may occasionally need to omit specific reinforcing bars. For example, when several reinforced areas intersect, causing reinforcing bars to overlap, or when you want to start bar distribution at a specific distance from the end of a part. To indicate which bars to omit, select an option from the Reinforcing bar(s) not to be created to the group list box:
None (all reinforcing bars included) First Last First and last
User-defined attributes of reinforcement

Create user-defined attributes to add information about reinforcing bars, bar groups, or reinforcement meshes. Attributes can consist of numbers, text, or lists. To create user-defined attributes, click the User-defined attributes button in the reinforcement properties dialog box. Use the User field 1...4 fields to define the attributes you need. You can also change the name of these fields, and add new ones, by editing the objects.inp file. For more information, see Adding properties in the online help.
Meshes
A reinforcement mesh consists of reinforcing bars in two directions. You can define the following properties:
Create mesh
Create mesh with the Detailing > Reinforcement mesh command or a component, for example,
122
Mesh shape
Reinforcement meshes can be: Rectangular Polygonal Bent
Distribution pattern of bars
Use the Pitching fields to define the pattern of longitudinal and crossing bars. You can use more than one pitch value. For example: Longitudinal: 3*200 3*600 2*100 Cross: 4*200 4*100
Mesh size
The way you define the size of the mesh depends on the shape of the mesh and how it was created: Evenly-spaced rectangular meshes - manually define the size Polygonal and bent meshes - Tekla Structures automatically calculates the width and length Unevenly-spaced meshes - Tekla Structures calculates the size of the mesh using the values in the Pitching, Left overhang, and Right overhang fields.
See also
Reinforcement mesh in the online help
4.3 Working with reinforcement

This section explains how to create, place, attach, and modify reinforcement.
123
Placing reinforcement
To place a reinforcing bar group, pick two sets of points: 1. 2. The first set of points defines the plane of the first bar and the shape of a single bar in the group. Click the middle mouse button to end picking. Pick a second set of points to indicate the distribution direction and length of the bars.
To place reinforcement components, select the part to reinforce. See also Using reinforcement handles (p. 125).
Attaching reinforcement to parts

Attach reinforcement to a part or cast unit when you want the reinforcing bars to follow the part or cast unit if it is moved, copied, deleted, etc. Tekla Structures automatically attaches a reinforcement to the part you pick before you place the reinforcement. You can also manually attach reinforcement to a part or cast unit. You must attach reinforcement to a part or cast unit to have Tekla Structures merge automatic reinforcing bar marks. See Merging reinforcing bar marks in the Drawing Manual.
Attaching manually
To manually attach reinforcement to a part or cast unit: 1. 2. 3. Select the reinforcement to attach. Right-click and select Attach to part from the pop-up menu. Select the part to attach the reinforcement to.
Detaching
To detach reinforcement from a part: 1. 2. Select the reinforcement to detach. Right-click and select Detach from part from the pop-up menu.
Modifying reinforcement
To modify a single reinforcing bar, bar group, or reinforcement mesh, doubleclick the reinforcement to open the properties dialog box. To modify the properties of a reinforcement component, double-click the blue modeling tool symbol (M).
124
To update the reinforcing bar, bar group, reinforcement mesh, or component you selected, click Modify.
Changing reinforcement shape

To change the shape of the reinforcement, you can: Add bar corners Remove bar corners Move bar and mesh corners Change the direction of the longitudinal mesh bars Change the distribution length of bar groups
Using reinforcement handles

Tekla Structures uses handles to indicate: The ends and corners of a reinforcing bar The distribution length of a bar group The corners and main bar direction of a mesh
When you select a reinforcement, the handles turn magenta.

Examples
Here are some ways to use handles to modify reinforcement:
125
Handles to change group distribution length
Handles to move bar corners
Handles to move mesh corners
Handles to change main bar direction To use handles to modify reinforcement: 1. 2. 3. Select the reinforcement to display its handles. Click the handle you want to move. Tekla Structures highlights the handle. Move the handle(s) like any other object. See Move in the Modeling Manual. If Drag and drop is active, just drag the handle to a new position. See Drag and drop in the Modeling Manual.
See also Polygon shape in the Modelin Manual.
Exploding reinforcement
Before you can modify or remove single bars in a reinforcement component, you need to use the Explode component command to ungroup the bars that the reinforcement contains.
126
To ungroup reinforcing bars: 1. 2. Click Detailing > Explode component. Select the blue modeling tool symbol (M) on the reinforcement. Tekla Structures ungroups the reinforcing bars.
Splitting reinforcing bar groups

You can split normal and tapered reinforcing bar groups. To split a reinforcing bar group: 1. 2. 3. Click Edit > Split. Select the reinforcing bar group. Pick a point to indicate where to split the group.
Numbering reinforcement
Tekla Structures numbers reinforcement in the same way as it numbers parts. See Numbering parts in the Modeling Manual. This section contains information that you should consider when you plan reinforcement numbering. See Numbering in the Modeling Manual for information on how to set up and carry out numbering.
What affects reinforcement numbering

Tekla Structures treats reinforcing bars as identical, and gives them the same number, if the following properties are the same:
Defining identical bar geometry
Bar geometry Numbering series Size Grade Bending radius
Tekla Structures uses the values in the rebar_config.inp file in the ..\environments\*your_environment*\system\ folder to round bar dimensions up or down. For example, if you set the rounding accuracy for bar dimensions to 5 and rounding direction to up, Tekla Structures rounds all bar dimensions up to the nearest 5 mm. So, bars with dimensions of 131 mm and 133 mm would both round up to 135 mm. This gives them identical bar geometry. For more information, see Reinforcement settings for drawings (p. 128).
Class
Class does not affect numbering. Tekla Structures gives the same number to identical reinforcing bars that belong to different classes.
127
User-defined attributes
Tekla Structures treats reinforcing bars as different, and so numbers them differently, if the values of a user-defined attribute differ. If a user-defined attribute has the variable consider_in_numbering set to yes, Tekla Structures takes this user-defined attribute into account when numbering. For more information on defining user-defined attributes, see Adding properties in the online help.
How reinforcement affects part numbering

To force Tekla Structures to give otherwise identical concrete parts and cast units different numbers if they have different reinforcement: 1. 2. 3. Click Setup > Numbering.... In the Numbering setup dialog box, select the Reinforcing bars checkbox. Click OK.
Cast unit numbering does not affect reinforcement numbering. For more information on cast units, see Cast units and assemblies in the Modeling Manual.
Reinforcement settings for drawings

Tekla Structures uses the settings in the rebar_config.inp file in the ..\environments\*your_environment*\system\ folder to define the following reinforcementrelated issues in drawings: Contents of reinforcement marks on a dimension line Selected area-specific reinforcing bar bending schedule Rounding of bar dimensions Available symbols for meshes, strands, and unbonding Appearance of reinforcement pull-outs
You can edit the rebar_config.inp file using any standard text editor (Notepad). The entries in the rebar_config.inp file are: Entry MergeOneFormat MergeTwoOrMoreFormats MergeAndFormat LeaderLinetype DimensionMarkSpacingSeparator ="/" Affects the separator in reinforcement marks on a dimension line. See also Reinforcement marks on a dimension line. Description No longer used. Define these properties in the drawing properties.
128
Entry ExactDimensionMarkSpacingSeparator
Description =" + " Separator between different exact spacing values in reinforcement marks on a dimension line. ="*" Separator between the number of bars and their exact spacing value in reinforcement marks on a dimension line. Defines how the dimension line text appers for reinforcing bar groups. The following example is from the European environment:
ExactDimensionMarkPcsSeparator
GroupBarMark
GroupBarMark="%NUMBER%%SHAPE%%POS%-T%SIZE%-K%CC%" The available elements are: %NAME% %GRADE% material grade of the rebar or mesh %CLASS% class designation of the rebar or mesh %LENGTH% total length of the rebar %NUMBER% quantity of rebars %CC% center-to-center spacing %CC_MIN% smallest spacing value of the rebar group %CC_MAX% largest spacing value of the rebar group %CC_EXACT% all spacing values of the rebar group %SHAPE% shape of the rebar based on environment/rebar catalog %POS% rebar position number
See also Reinforcement marks on a dimension line.
129
Entry MarkingDimAttributes ScheduleCountry
Description No longer in use. Defines which bending schedule is used. Affects bending shapes in templates and reports. The available schedules are FIN, SWE, UK, US. When you number the model, the bending shape for the bar is given according to this information. For example, in the European environment, the bending shapes are letters A, B, C, etc. See also Reinforcement bar bending types.
ScheduleDimensionRoundingDirection ScheduleTotalLengthRoundingDirection ScheduleDimensionRoundingAccuracy
Options: "UP": rounds bar dimensions up "DOWN": rounds bar dimensions down
Sets the rounding accuracy for bar dimensions. Default is 1 mm. Tekla Structures rounds individual bar dimensions up or down according to the option you select for ScheduleDimensionRoundingDirection.
ScheduleTotalLengthRoundingAccuracy
Sets the rounding accuracy for the total bar length. Default is 10 mm. Tekla Structures rounds individual bar dimensions up or down according to the option you select for ScheduleTotalLengthRoundingDirection.
MeshSymbolFile
Points to the mesh symbol file that contains the available mesh symbols. Affects the available reinforcement mesh symbols in drawings. By default, points to the mesh.sym file in the ...\TeklaStructures\*version*\environments\country-independent\symbols folder.
130
Entry StrandSymbolFile
Description Points to the strand symbol file that contains the available strand symbols. Affects drawings. By default, points to the strand.sym file in the ...\TeklaStructures\*version*\environments\country-independent\symbols folder.
UnbondingSymbolFile PullOutColor
Points to the unbonding symbol file that contains the available unbonding symbols. Sets the color for the pull-outs in reinforcement marks. You can use fourteen colors (numbered from 1 to 14, see Colors). See also Reinforcement pull-outs. Sets the line type for reinforcing bar shape in pull-outs. Options: 1 = continuous line 2 = dashed line
PullOutVisibleLineType
PullOutRepresentation
Shows or hides the pull-outs. Options: 0 = not visible 1 = visible
PullOutAngleColor
Sets the color for the angle in pull-outs.
You can use fourteen colors (numbered from 1 to 14, see Colors). PullOutAngleLineType Sets the line type for angle lines in pull-outs. Options: 1 = continuous line 2 = dashed line
131
4.4 Reinforcement for foundations

Tekla Structures includes the following components that you can use to automatically create reinforcement for foundations: Component Strip footing (75) (p. 132) Pile cap reinforcement (76) (p. 134) Pad footing (77) (p. 139) Starter bars (p. 141) Icon Description Creates reinforcement for a concrete strip footing. Creates reinforcement for a concrete pile cap. Creates reinforcement for a concrete pad footing. Creates starter bars in a footing and a pedestal for a column. Creates starter bars in a footing for a column.
4.5 Strip footing (75)

Creates reinforcement for a concrete strip footing.
Bars created
Longitudinal bars for the top and bottom surfaces and sides of the footing Stirrups The Getting Started (p. 5) chapter introduces the concept of using components to automatically connect parts and create model objects.
Use for
Situation Straight strip footings that have rectangular cross sections
More information
132
Situation
More information Main bars entirely inside the footing, no side bars, stirrup laps at stirrup corners. Main bars protruding from the footing, two bars on both sides, stirrup laps in the middle of the top surface.
Do not use for
Footings that have: Irregular cross sections Skew or cut corners Create the concrete strip footing. Calculate the required area of reinforcement.
Use the following tabs in the Strip footing (75) dialog box to define the properties of the objects that this component creates: Tab
Picture Main bars
Contents Concrete cover thickness, location of side bars and first stirrups Grade, size, number, spacing, and bond lengths of the top, bottom, left, and right bars Grade, size, spacing, and bend type of stirrups Numbering properties, name, and class of the top, bottom, left, and right bars, and stirrups
See also Concrete cover (p. 120) Basic reinforcement properties (p. 117) Strip footing reinforcement properties (p. 133)
Stirrups Attributes
Picking order
1.
Concrete strip footing.
Strip footing reinforcement properties

Bond length of main bars
Bond lengths define how far main bars extend into adjacent structures at the ends of strip footings. Use the Bond length 1 fields on the Main bars tab for the first end of the footing (with the yellow handle), and the Bond length 2 fields for the second end of the footing (with the magenta handle).
133
You can define bond lengths separately for:

Bend type for stirrups
Top bars Bottom bars Bars on the left side of the footing Bars on the right side of the footing
To define the location of the stirrup laps in the strip footing, select an option from the Bend type list box on the Stirrups tab. The options are: Option
At mid
Examples
At corner
4.6 Pile cap reinforcement (76)

Creates reinforcement for a concrete pile cap.
Bars created
Bars in two directions for the top and bottom surfaces of the pile cap Lacer bars The Getting Started (p. 5) chapter introduces the concept of using components to automatically connect parts and create model objects.
134
Use for
Situation
More information Bottom bars concentrated over the piles, top bars under the column. Two lacer bars.
Bars evenly distributed on the bottom and top surfaces. No lacer bars.
Rectangular footings with or without cut corners, footings that are skewed on one or both sides Bars on the top, bottom, or both surfaces of the footing Straight or bent bar ends
Pad footing and pile cap shapes (p. 136)
Create the concrete pile cap. Calculate the required area of reinforcement.
Use the following tabs in the Pilecap reinforcement (76) dialog box to define the properties of the objects that this component creates: Tab
Picture Primary top bars Secondary top bars Primary bottom bars Secondary bottom bars
Contents Concrete cover thickness, primary bar direction Grade, size, hooks, bend lengths, distribution (by number or spacing), and arrangement/location of the top and bottom bars in two directions
See also Concrete cover (p. 120) Hooks (p. 119) Bar distribution (p. 137)
135
Tab
Lacer bars
Contents Option to create lacer bars, grade, size, number, spacing, location, type, orientation, and laps of lacer bars Numbering properties, name, and class of the top, bottom, and lacer bars
See also Lacer bars for pad footings and pile caps (p. 138) Basic reinforcement properties (p. 117)
Attributes
Picking order
1. 2. 3.
Concrete pile cap Piles and/or columns Click the middle mouse button to finish.
Pad footing and pile cap shapes

Use the Pile cap reinforcement (76) and Pad footing (77) tools to create reinforcement for the following shapes of foundations: Shape Description Rectangular
Skewed on two sides
Skewed on one side
Rectangular with cut corners
136
Bar distribution
Pad footings
In pad footings, you can arrange the main reinforcing bars into: One zone of bars that have the same bar properties Three zones of bars that have different bar properties
You set the options separately for primary and secondary bars. Select an option from the Arrangement list box on the relevant tab in the Pad footing (77) dialog box.
Pile caps
Define the pile cap reinforcement using the following properties in the Pile cap reinforcement (76) dialog box: Field
To suit pile/column % of pile/column width
Description Select Yes to concentrate main bars over piles and under columns. The area where the bars are concentrated, as a percentage of the width of the pile or column. For example, if the pile diameter or width is 500 mm, enter 120 in the % of pile width field to concentrate bars in a 600 mm-wide area over the pile.
Bar portioning (%) Bar portioning (number of bars)
The proportion of bars concentrated over a pile or under a column. The number of bars concentrated over a pile or under a column.
You can define these properties separately for: Primary top bars Secondary top bars Primary bottom bars Secondary bottom bars
137
Lacer bars for pad footings and pile caps

Lacer bars are reinforcing bars that loop around the sides of a concrete footing. You can create up to six different groups of lacer bars in a footing. Each group can contain different values for: Grade Bar size Number of bars Spacing Shape Dimensions
To create lacer bars for a footing: 1. 2. 3. Open the footing reinforcement properties dialog box and click the Lacer bars tab. In the Lacer bar option list box, select Yes to create lacer bars. Enter properties for each lacer bar group: Description Quantity, spacing, and location of lacer bar groups. Tekla Structures only uses information from some of the fields, in this order of priority: 1. 2. 3.
Number of bars and Spacing Number of bars, Start, and End Spacing, Start, and End
Property
Type
The number and location of laps. The options are:
Orientation
The options are Default, Front, and Back.
138
Property
p1...p4 L1...L4
Description The exact locations and lengths of lacer bar laps. Locations are measured from the corner of the bar to the midpoints of laps.
The location of the topmost lacer bar, measured from the end of main bars. Entering a value here overrides the location defined in the End field.
4.7 Pad footing (77)

Creates reinforcement for a concrete pad footing.
Bars created
Bars in two directions for the bottom surface of the pad footing Lacer bars The Getting Started (p. 5) chapter introduces the concept of using components to automatically connect parts and create model objects.
139
Use for
Situation
More information Rectangular footing, 90-degree hooks at the primary bar ends, 180degree hooks at the secondary bar ends, no lacer bars.
Rectangular footing, three zones of primary bars with different spacing, straight bar ends, three lacer bars.
Footing skewed on two sides, two groups of lacer bars with different spacing.
Rectangular footings with or without cut corners, footings that are skewed on one or both sides
Pad footing and pile cap shapes (p. 136)
Create the concrete pad footing. Calculate the required area of reinforcement.
Use the following tabs in the Pad footing (77) dialog box to define the properties of the objects that this component creates: Tab
Picture
Contents Concrete cover thickness
See also Concrete cover (p. 120)
140
Tab
Primary bar Secondary bar
Contents Arrangement, grade, size, hooks, bend lengths, and distribution (by number or spacing) of the primary and secondary bars, primary bar direction Grade, size, number, spacing, location, type, orientation, and laps of lacer bars Numbering properties, name, and class of the primary, secondary, and lacer bars
See also Hooks (p. 119) Bar distribution (p. 137) Lacer bars for pad footings and pile caps (p. 138) Basic reinforcement properties (p. 117)
Lacer bar
Attributes
Picking order
1.
Concrete pad footing
4.8 Starter bars

Starter bars for pillar (86) and Starter bars for footing (87) create starter bars in a footing for a column. Starter bars may go through a pedestal or straight to the column. Starter bars can be in a rectangular or circular form. Bars created
Starter bars (straight or L-shaped) Stirrups (optional) The Getting Started (p. 5) chapter introduces the concept of using components to automatically connect parts and create model objects.
141
Use for
Situation
More information
Starter bars for footing (87) places
starter bars in a footing in rectangular or circular form. Starter bars can be straight or L-shaped, and can have stirrups.
Starter bars for pillar (86) creates straight or L-shaped starter bars that go through a rectangular or circular pedestal. Starter bars can have stirrups.
Create the footing. Calculate the required area of reinforcement.
Use the following tabs in the Starter bars for pillar (86) and Starter bars for footing (87) dialog boxes to define the component properties: Tab
Picture
Contents
86: Bar dimensions and loca-
See also Concrete cover (p. 120) Starter bar stirrups (p. 143) Concrete cover (p. 120) Starter bar location (p. 143) Starter bar stirrups (p. 143)
tions, number and spacing of bars, stirrup type, concrete cover thickness
87: Bar dimensions and loca-
tions, number and spacing of bars, concrete cover thickness

Location 87 only: Location of bars, stirrup
type
Parameters
Grade, size, name, class, and numbering properties of bars
Basic reinforcement properties (p. 117)
142
Picking order
1. 2.
Footing Pedestal (only for Starter bars for pillar (86))
Starter bar stirrups

Use these options to define stirrup laps in footings: Option Description Laps on the side of the stirrups 45-degree hooks at bar ends
Laps at stirrup corners 135-degree hooks at bar ends
Laps at stirrup corners 90-degree hooks at bar ends
If the starter bars are in a circular form, you must define the angle of stirrup overlap.
Starter bar location

When you use Starter bars for footing (87), you must define the location of starter bars. Enter the distance from the center of the bar group to the center of the footing, in two directions:
143
4.9 Beam, column, and slab reinforcement

Tekla Structures includes the following components that you can use to automatically create reinforcement for beams, columns, and slabs: Component Beam reinforcement (63) (p. 144) Double tee reinforcement (64) (p. 147) Beam end reinforcement (79) (p. 150) Corbel reinforcement (81) (p. 153) Round column reinforcement (82) (p. 156) Rectangular column reinforcement (83) (p. 160) Hole reinforcement for slabs and walls (84) (p. 164) Hole creation and reinforcement (85) (p. 166) Slab bars (18) (p. 170) Icon Description Creates reinforcement for a concrete beam. Creates prestressed strands and other reinforcement for a concrete double tee. Creates reinforcement for the end of a concrete beam or strip footing. Creates reinforcement for one or two corbels in a concrete column. Creates reinforcement for a concrete column that has a round cross section. Creates reinforcement for a concrete column that has a rectangular cross section. Creates a hole in a concrete slab or wall and reinforcement around the hole. Creates a hole in a concrete part and reinforcement around the hole. Creates the main reinforcement for a concrete slab.
4.10 Beam reinforcement (63)

Creates reinforcement for a concrete beam.
Bars created
Longitudinal main bars Corner and side bars Main and additional stirrups (2 groups) The Getting Started (p. 5) chapter introduces the concept of using components to automatically connect parts and create model objects.
144
Use for
Situation
More information Rectangular beams
L-shaped beams (RCL profiles)
RCX profiles
Inverted T-beams (RCDL profiles)
145
Create the concrete beam. Calculate the required area of reinforcement.
Use the following tabs in the Beam reinforcement (63) dialog box to define the properties of the objects that this component creates: Tab
Parameters
Contents Concrete cover thickness, number, size, and location of bars, stirrup size Distances from the part ends to the first stirrups, number of spaces and spacing of main and additional stirrups in five zones along the length of the part Grade, name, class, and numbering properties of the bottom, top, and side bars, and main and additional stirrups
See also Concrete cover (p. 120) Beam reinforcement properties (p. 147)
Stirrup spacing
Advanced
Picking order
1.
Concrete beam
146
Beam reinforcement properties

Use the following fields on the Parameters tab in the Beam reinforcement (63) dialog box to define the beam reinforcement properties:
Main stirrup size Size of corner bars Additional stirrup size Number and size of bars
4.11 Double tee reinforcement (64)

Creates prestressed strands and other reinforcement for a concrete double tee.
Bars created
Prestressed strands in double tee ribs Stirrups in double tee ribs Reinforcement mesh on the top surface of the double tee
147
Use for
Situation Straight strands Different strand pattern and number of strands When you use different stirrup shapes and spacings
More information
Create the concrete double tee. Calculate the required area of strands and other reinforcement.
Use the following tabs in the Double tee reinforcement (64) dialog box to define the properties of the objects that this component creates: Tab
Parameters
Contents Concrete cover thickness, size, number, and pattern of strands, stirrup size and type, size and spacing of longitudinal and crossing bars in the mesh Distances from the part ends to the first stirrups, number of spaces and spacing of stirrups in five zones along the length of the part Grade, name, class, and numbering properties of the strands, stirrups, and mesh bars
See also Concrete cover (p. 120) Double tee reinforcement properties (p. 149)
Stirrup spacing
Advanced
148
Picking order
1.
Concrete double tee
Double tee reinforcement properties

Strand pattern
Use the following options to define the strand pattern in double tee ribs:
Grid Staggered 1st Staggered 2nd
Stirrups
Use the following options to define the stirrups and stirrup hooks in double tees: Option
Closed
Example
Open
149
Option
Open with 90 degree hooks
Example
4.12 Beam end reinforcement (79)

Creates reinforcement for the end of a concrete beam or strip footing.
Bars created
Horizontal U-shaped bars (types 1 and 2) Framing bars (types 3A and 3B) Oblique bar (type 4) Stirrups (types 5A and 5B)
150
Horizontal U bars (type 2) Horizontal U bars (type 1) Oblique bar (type 4)
Framing bars (type 3A) Framing bars (type 3B) Stirrups (type 5A) Stirrups (type 5B)
Use for
Situation Standard beams Dapped beams Beams with anchor bolt hole in the notched area Beams and strip footings that have a rectangular cross section
Do not use for Before you start Defining properties
More information Use bars 3A and 5A for the beam end.
Parts that have irregular cross sections. Create the concrete beam or strip footing. Calculate the required area of reinforcement.
Use the following tabs in the Beam end reinforcement (79) dialog box to define the properties of the objects that this component creates: Tab
Picture
Contents Concrete cover thickness, distances from the concrete surface to the bars, angle of bar 4 Bar dimensions of each bar type, which bars to create
See also Concrete cover (p. 120) Beam end reinforcing bars (p. 152)
Bars
151
Tab
Groups
Contents Number and spacing of bars in each group of bar types. If the spacing varies, enter each value individually. In the Bar 4 list box, select Yes to create the bar.
See also
Attributes
Grade, size, class, and numbering properties of the bars
Picking order
1.
Concrete beam or strip footing
Beam end reinforcing bars

Horizontal U bars 1 and 2
Use the following options to create bars in the lower area of the beam end, in the horizontal planes (bar type 1): Option Description Two bars on each plane. One in the middle of the beam end, the other extending to the sides of the beam.
One bar on each plane, extending to the sides of the beam.
152
Option
Description One bar on each plane, in the middle of the beam end.
Two identical, overlapping bars on each plane.
To create bars in the upper area of the beam end, around a hole, enter dimensions for bar 2.
Vertical framing bars 3A and 3B

To create vertical framing bars, enter dimensions for: Bar 3A: for the notched area of the beam. Bar 3B: for the higher part of the beam.
Stirrups 5A and 5B
To create stirrups for beam ends, enter dimensions for: Bar 5A: for the notched area of the beam. Bar 5B: for the higher part of the beam.
4.13 Corbel reinforcement (81)

Creates reinforcement for one or two corbels in a concrete column. The two corbels must have the same top level, thickness, and horizontal location.
Bars created
Main bars Stirrups Additional bars
153
Use for
Situation
More information Two corbels, beveled and rounded, with the same top level, thickness, and horizontal location. Two additional bars crossing each other.
One straight corbel. One additional bar.
Do not use for Before you start
Two very different corbels. Create the concrete column and beam(s). Create the corbel(s). See Corbel connection (14) (p. 71) and Seating connections (p. 75). Calculate the required area of reinforcement.
154
Defining properties
Use the following tabs in the Corbel reinforcement (81) dialog box to define the properties of the objects that this component creates: Tab
Main bars
Contents Dimensions, grade, size, name, class, numbering properties, number, and spacing of main bars, distances from the concrete surface to the bars Distances from the concrete surface to the stirrups, length of stirrup hooks, number, spacing, grade, size, name, class, and numbering properties of stirrups Distances from the concrete surface to the additional bars, dimensions, number, grade, size, name, class, and numbering properties of additional bars
See also Basic reinforcement properties (p. 117)
Stirrups
Representation of stirrups (p. 160)
Additional bars
Additional bars in corbels (p. 156)
Picking order
1. 2.
Concrete column Corbel(s)
155
Additional bars in corbels

Use these options to define the number of additional bars in corbels: Option Description No additional bars.
One additional bar.
Two additional bars parallel to each other.
Two additional bars crossing each other.
4.14 Round column reinforcement (82)

Creates reinforcement for a concrete column that has a round cross section.
Bars created
Longitudinal main bars Stirrups Column end reinforcement The Getting Started (p. 5) chapter introduces the concept of using components to automatically connect parts and create model objects.
156
Use for
Situation
More information Main bars bent outside the column. Continuous spiral stirrup.
Straight main bars protruding from the column, or entirely inside the column. Separate stirrups. End of column reinforced.
Ends of column cut or fitted Exact or variable stirrup spacing

Rectangular columns. Create the concrete column. Calculate the required area of reinforcement.
Use the following tabs in the Round column reinforcement (82) dialog box to define the properties of the objects that this component creates: Tab
Main bars
Contents Horizontal and vertical bond lengths at the top and bottom of the column, thickness of concrete cover over stirrups Number, rotation, grade, size, class, name, and numbering properties of the bars
See also Concrete cover (p. 120) Basic reinforcement properties (p. 117)
Stirrups
Thickness of concrete cover over stirrups at the top and bottom of the column, spacing and number of stirrups or turns in each stirrup group, stirrup types, overlap angle
Column stirrup properties (p. 159) Group 1 is the top stirrup group, 5 is the bottom one. Group 3 is always created.
157
Tab
Stirrup attributes Top
Contents Grade, size, name, class, and numbering properties of each stirrup group Concrete cover thickness, dimensions, rotation, number, grade, size, class, name, and numbering properties of the top reinforcement Concrete cover thickness, dimensions, rotation, number, grade, size, class, name, and numbering properties of the bottom reinforcement
See also Basic reinforcement properties (p. 117) Column top and bottom reinforcement (p. 160) Concrete cover (p. 120) Basic reinforcement properties (p. 117)
Bottom
Picking order
1.
Concrete column
158
Column stirrup properties

Use these options to define the stirrups in round and rectangular columns: Option Description Separate stirrups Applies to Round columns
Single, continuous spiral stirrup
Separate spiral stirrups
Angle of stirrup overlap
Laps at stirrup corners 135-degree hooks at bar ends Laps at stirrup corners 90-degree hooks at bar ends
Rectangular columns
Use these options in the Bars/laps list box to define the spacing of stirrups: Option
Exact space, flexible at ends Target space
Description Tekla Structures uses exactly the spacing value you specify, and evens out the stirrup distribution at the column ends. Tekla Structures creates the stirrups at even spacings and tries to use the spacing value you specify.
159
Representation of stirrups
Use these options to define how Tekla Structures shows stirrups in the model and drawings: Option Description Stirrup corners collide. Use this option to show stirrups as single lines in drawings, even if they do not look realistic in the model. Stirrup corners do not collide.
Column top and bottom reinforcement

Use these options to define the rotation of the reinforcement at the top or bottom of columns: Option Description No rotation. Transverse bars are perpendicular to the longer side of the column. Rotation angle is 90 degrees. Transverse bars are parallel to the longer side of the column. Rotation angle of the reinforcement at the ends of round columns. Round columns Applies to Rectangular columns
4.15 Rectangular column reinforcement (83)

Creates reinforcement for a concrete column that has a rectangular cross section.
160
Bars created
Longitudinal main bars: corner bars (4), side bars Stirrups Intermediate links Column end reinforcement The Getting Started (p. 5) chapter introduces the concept of using components to automatically connect parts and create model objects.
Use for
Situation
More information Main bars bent outside the column. Side bars on long sides. Intermediate links tie side bars at every second stirrup.
Straight corner and side bars entirely inside the column. End of column reinforced.
Ends of column cut or fitted Exact or variable stirrup spacing

Round columns. Create the concrete column. Calculate the required area of reinforcement.
161
Defining properties
Use the following tabs in the Rectangular column reinforcement (83) dialog box to define the properties of the objects that this component creates: Tab
Picture
Contents Rotation of reinforcement in square columns, number and spacing of side bars, options to create intermediate links and define which side bars to tie, thickness of concrete cover over stirrups Horizontal and vertical bond lengths, at the top and bottom of the column, for corner and side bars Grade, size, class, name, and numbering properties of the main bars Thickness of concrete cover over stirrups at the top and bottom of the column, spacing and number of stirrups in each stirrup group, stirrup types Grade, size, name, class, and numbering properties of each stirrup group Grade, size, name, class, numbering properties, and spacing of intermediate links in each stirrup group Concrete cover thickness, dimensions, direction, number, grade, size, class, name, and numbering properties of the top reinforcement Concrete cover thickness, dimensions, direction, number, grade, size, class, name, and numbering properties of the bottom reinforcement
See also Square columns (p. 163) Intermediate column links (p. 163) Concrete cover (p. 120)
Main bars
Main bar attributes Stirrups
Basic reinforcement properties (p. 117) Column stirrup properties (p. 159) Group 1 is the top stirrup group, 5 is the bottom one. Group 3 is always created. Basic reinforcement properties (p. 117) Intermediate column links (p. 163)
Stirrup attributes Intermediate links
Top
Column top and bottom reinforcement (p. 160) Concrete cover (p. 120) Basic reinforcement properties (p. 117)
Bottom
162
Picking order
1.
Concrete column
Square columns
In square columns, you must identify the perpendicular sides of a column if they require different reinforcement. Use the list box on the Picture tab to rotate all reinforcement in a square column by 90 degrees:
Intermediate column links

If you have rectangular columns that have very large cross sections, the side bars may be a long way from the corners of the stirrups. You will need to create intermediate links in order to tie all side bars, and prevent them from buckling when they are in compression. On the Picture tab, define the distance from the stirrup corner within which stirrups tie the side bars. Tekla Structures creates intermediate links to tie side bars outside stirrup corners.
163
Use these options to define the spacing of intermediate links: Option Description Spacing is the same as stirrup spacing.
Spacing is double the stirrup spacing (intermediate links at every second stirrup). Same as above, but for alternate stirrups.
4.16 Hole reinforcement for slabs and walls (84)

Creates a hole in a concrete slab or wall and reinforcement around the hole.
Bars created
Straight bars along hole edges Diagonal bars close to hole corners U-shaped edge bars The Getting Started (p. 5) chapter introduces the concept of using components to automatically connect parts and create model objects.
164
Use for
Situation Rectangular holes in concrete slabs and walls
More information
Straight and edge bars only, no diagonal bars.
Diagonal and edge bars only, no straight bars.
Hole rotated from the direction of the slab. One diagonal bar at each corner.
Different number of bars on each side of the hole in the wall. No diagonal bars.
Do not use for
Round holes.
165
Create the concrete slab or wall. Calculate the required area of reinforcement.
Use the following tabs in the Hole reinforcement for slabs and walls (84) dialog box to define the properties of the objects that this component creates: Tab
Picture
Contents Hole dimensions, bar dimensions and location, concrete cover thickness Rotation angle of the hole:
See also Concrete cover (p. 120)
Horizontal and vertical bars
Which bars are closest to the surface of the concrete (vertical or horizontal), number, grade, size, numbering properties, name, and class of each bar group along the sides of the hole Spacing, grade, size, numbering properties, name, and class of bar group on each side Number, grade, size, numbering properties, name, and class of bar group at each corner of the hole
Basic reinforcement properties (p. 117) The slab or wall direction defines the direction of the hole and which bars are to the left and right of, and above and below the hole.
Edge bars
Diagonal bars
Picking order
1. 2.
Center of the hole Concrete slab or wall
4.17 Hole creation and reinforcement (85)

Creates a hole in a concrete part and reinforcement around the hole.
Bars created
Straight bars at hole edges Stirrups Z-shaped bars
166
Use for
Situation
More information Rectangular hole, stirrups on each side of the hole, no Z-shaped bars.
Round hole, Z-shaped bars, no stirrups around the hole.
Concrete beams or columns Round or rectangular holes With or without Z-shaped bars or stirrups
Hole only. No additional reinforcement around it.
Parts that have round or irregular cross sections. Create the concrete part. Calculate the required area of reinforcement.
167
Defining properties
Use the following tabs in the Hole creation and reinforcement (85) dialog box to define the properties of the objects that this component creates: Tab
Picture
Contents Hole shape, direction, and dimensions, bar dimensions and location, concrete cover thickness, angle of Z-shaped bars The number, grade, size, name, class, and numbering properties of: Straight bars above and below the hole Z-shaped bars on the left and right side of the hole
See also Reinforcement around holes (p. 168) Concrete cover (p. 120) Basic reinforcement properties (p. 117)
Bars
Stirrups
Number, spacing, grade, size, name, class, and numbering properties of stirrups Additional stirrup settings
Basic reinforcement properties (p. 117) Stirrups at holes (p. 170)
Picking order
1. 2.
Center of the hole Concrete part
Reinforcement around holes

Use these options to create holes and additional reinforcement: Option Description Creates a hole and additional reinforcement around it.
Only creates a hole, no reinforcement.
168
Use these options to define the direction of holes: Option Description Hole along the local y direction of the part.
Hole along the local z direction of the part.
Use these options to define Z-shaped bars around round holes: Option Description Concrete cover measured in the direction of the radius of the hole.
Concrete cover measured from the corner of the bounding box around the hole. Use these options to define the direction of Z-shaped bars: Option Description
169
Stirrups at holes
Use these options to define the stirrups around holes: Option Description Single stirrups
Bundled stirrups
Hooks
Option
Description 135-degree hooks
90-degree hooks
See also
Representation of stirrups (p. 160)
4.18 Slab bars (18)

Creates reinforcement for a concrete slab.
Bars created
Main slab bars. The Getting Started (p. 5) chapter introduces the concept of using components to automatically connect parts and create model objects.
170
Use for
Situation
More information
Slab bars (18) creates reinforcement for
the bottom or top surface of the slab, or for both. See Slab reinforcement properties (p. 172).
Create the concrete slab. Calculate the required area of reinforcement.
Use the following tabs in the Slab bars (18) dialog box to define the properties of the objects that this component creates: Tab
Picture
Contents Concrete cover thickness, which bars to create (bottom/top/both), primary bar direction
See also Concrete cover (p. 120) Slab reinforcement properties (p. 172) Basic reinforcement properties (p. 117) Slab reinforcement properties (p. 172)
Bottom bars Top bars Attributes
Grade, size, spacing, and generation type of bottom bars Grade, size, spacing, and generation type of top bars Numbering properties, name, and class of bars
Picking order
1.
Concrete slab
171
Slab reinforcement properties

Tekla Structures creates slab reinforcement using the properties in the Slab bars (18) dialog box: Field
Create bars
Description Defines on which surface(s) to create bars. The options are:

Both sides Bottom side Top side
More information
Primary bar direction
The direction of primary bars. Use to change bar direction. The options are:
Use slab x direction Use slab y direction Use global x direction Use global y direction
Bar generation type
Defines whether Tekla Structures treats the bars as a group or a mesh.
Getting started with reinforcement (p. 116)
4.19 Single bars, bar groups, and meshes

Tekla Structures includes the following tools to create single reinforcing bars, bar groups, and reinforcement meshes: Command
Reinforcing bar
Icon
Description Creates a single reinforcing bar. Creates a reinforcing bar group. Creates a curved reinforcing bar group. Creates a circular reinforcing bar group.
Reinforcing bar group
Curved reinforcing bar group Circular reinforcing bar group
172
Command
Reinforcement mesh
Icon
Description Creates a reinforcement mesh. Creates prestressed strands. Creates an array of overlapped reinforcement meshes. Creates two lifting anchors or anchor groups for a concrete part.
Reinforcement strand pattern
Reinforcement mesh array in area (89) (p. 174) Lifting anchor (80) (p. 177)
See the online help for detailed instructions on how to use these tools.
173
4.20 Reinforcement mesh array in area (89)

Creates reinforcement meshes for an entire concrete part, or for a defined polygonal area.
Parts created Use for
Reinforcement meshes. Situation More information Array of overlapping rectangular meshes.
Array of meshes in a polygonal area that you define. Meshes clipped to fit defined area.
Before you start
Create the concrete part. Set the work plane parallel to the plane where you want to create the mesh array.
174
Defining properties
Use the following tabs in the Reinforcement mesh array in area (89) dialog box to define the properties of the objects that this component creates: Tab
Picture
Contents Mesh catalog type, mesh size, bar diameter, pitch, and overhang values for longitudinal and crossing bars, bending radius, cover thickness. Overlapping values, mesh generation values Numbering properties, name, grade, and class of reinforcement meshes.
See also Meshes (p. 122)
Generation Attributes
Mesh generation properties (p. 175) Basic reinforcement properties (p. 117)
Picking order
1.
To attach the reinforcement mesh array: to the entire part, pick the starting point of the mesh to a selected area, pick points to define the polygonal shape of the mesh
2.
Click the middle mouse button to create the reinforcement mesh array.
Mesh generation properties

Overlapping
Define the minimum and maximum overlap of longitudinal and crossing bars:
175
Generation
Use the following properties to define how Tekla Structures creates the mesh array: Property
Mesh type
Options
Rectangle Polygon
Description Creates a mesh array for rectangular parts. Creates a polygonal mesh array, defined by points you pick.
Generation direction
X, Y
Generation direction. To rotate the mesh generation direction around the alignment point, enter an angle. Options that affect how the mesh array is generated.
Overlapping values also affect how
rotation angle
Adjustment
Delete first Delete last Delete first and last Generate from last Generate from first Generate symmetrically
the mesh array is generated.
Clipping outside See also
Yes No
Select Yes to clip the meshes to fit the part or the selected area.
Reinforcement mesh array in area (89) (p. 174)

Reinforcement mesh in the online help.
176
4.21 Lifting anchor (80)

Creates two lifting anchors (or anchor groups) for a concrete part and places them symmetrically on either side of the parts center of gravity. 30% of part length (default)
Center of gravity
Objects created
Lifting anchors (2 or more) Recesses for anchors (optional) The Getting Started (p. 5) chapter introduces the concept of using components to automatically connect parts and create model objects.
Use for
Situation
More information Straight anchor with straight legs (Type A in the anchor properties file, see Anchor properties from file (p. 182)) Straight anchor with Lshaped legs (Type D)
177
Situation
More information Angle anchor with straight legs (Type B)
Angle anchor with Lshaped legs (Type C)
Custom components as anchors
Anchors recessed into the part.
Skew and/or rotated anchors
Before you start
Create the concrete part.
178
Defining properties
Use the following tabs in the Lifting anchor (80) dialog box to define the properties of the objects that this component creates: Tab
Picture
Contents Anchor dimensions and locations, number and spacing of anchors, option to use custom components as anchors, option to create recesses, recess dimensions, skew angle of anchors, option to rotate anchors, basic anchor properties
See also Lifting anchor properties (p. 179) Custom components as lifting anchors (p. 181) Creating recesses for lifting anchors (p. 181) Basic reinforcement properties (p. 117)
Picking order
1.
Concrete part
Lifting anchor properties

The properties of lifting anchors are: Field
Anchor dimensions
Description The options are:

Use dialog values Select from file, see Anchor proper-
ties from file (p. 182). You need to enter different dimensions for different anchor types. The distance between an anchor (or anchor group) and the center of gravity of the part. Default is 30% of the part length.
179
Field
Description The distance between an anchor (or group) and the center line of the part.
Number of bars/spacings
The number and spacing of anchors in a group. If the spacing varies, enter each value individually. See Custom components as lifting anchors (p. 181). The option to define if the anchors are recessed into the part. See Creating recesses for lifting anchors (p. 181).
Custom Custom settings
The skew angle of anchors. Anchor heads are skewed towards the parts center of gravity.
Rotate anchor
The option to rotate anchors. The options are:

No: Anchors parallel to the part. Yes: Anchors perpendicular to the part.
Side
The side of the part where Tekla Structures creates the anchors. The options are Front, Top, Back, and Below. See Basic reinforcement properties (p. 117).
Grade, Size, Name, Prefix, Start number, Class
180
Custom components as lifting anchors

To use custom components as lifting anchors: 1. Select the following option in the upper graphic list box for the anchor shape and type:
2. 3. 4. 5.
See also
Click the ... button next to the Custom field to open the Select component dialog box. Browse for the custom component you want to use as lifting anchor. Select the component and click OK. To use saved custom component properties, enter the name of the saved properties file in the Custom settings field.
For more information on custom components, see Defining custom components (p. 550).
Creating recesses for lifting anchors

Select one of the following options to define if the lifting anchors are recessed into the concrete part: Option Description Anchors on the surface of the part. (Default)
Anchors recessed into the part.
181
If you choose to recess the anchors into the part, use the following fields to define the shape and dimensions of the recesses:
Anchor properties from file

You can define lifting anchor properties by entering values in the dialog box (see Lifting anchor properties (p. 179)), or you can create a file containing the anchor properties you want to use. Use any standard text editor to create the file and save it as LiftingAnchors.dat in the model folder. To use the anchor properties you define in a file: 1. 2.
Example
In the Lifting anchor (80) dialog box, select Select from file from the Anchor dimensions list box. Click the ... button to browse for the file.
Create a row in the file for each lifting anchor. Enter the following properties, separated by spaces: Anchor capacity [kN], including safety and material factors Type [A, B, C, or D], see the Use for table in Lifting anchor (80) (p. 177) Grade [characters] Size [characters] Anchoring length 1 [mm] Anchoring length 2 [mm] Protruding dimension of the anchor outside the part [mm] Penetrating dimension of the anchor inside the part [mm] Bending radius [mm] Hook length [mm] (0 = no hook) Angle of leg 1 [degrees] Angle of leg 2 [degrees]
182
Here is an example of a lifting anchor file (Tekla Structures ignores the comments enclosed in /* */): LiftingAnchors.dat
10 B A500HW 10 400 400 100 20 B A500HW 12 600 600 150 30 B A500HW 16 900 900 200 10 B A500HW 10 400 400 100 20 B A500HW 12 600 600 150 30 B A500HW 16 900 900 200 0 30 75 30 30 0 36 100 30 30 0 80 150 30 30 0 30 0 36 0 80 0 30 30 0 30 30 0 30 30 /* /* /* /* /* /* /\ / \ \/ \/ /\ / \ / \ */ */ */ */ */ */
10 C A500HW 10 400 400 100 200 30 75 30 30 20 C A500HW 12 600 600 150 300 36 100 30 30 30 C A500HW 16 900 900 200 500 80 150 30 30 10 C A500HW 10 400 400 100 200 30 20 C A500HW 12 600 600 150 300 36 30 C A500HW 16 900 900 200 500 80 0 30 30 0 30 30 0 30 30
/* /\ */ /* _ / \ _ */ /* |__/ \__| */ /* /\ */ /* / \ */ /* ___/ \___ */
Tekla Structures will use the first anchor in the file that: 1. 2. Has the shape and type you define using the graphic list boxes in the Lifting anchor (80) dialog box. Can carry the parts weight with other identical anchors. The total number of anchors is two times the number you specify in the Number of bars field.
183
184
Built-up Components
Introduction Contents
This chapter introduces the built-up components available in Tekla Structures. This chapter is divided into the following topics: Beams (p. 185) Columns (p. 196) Frames (p. 201) Connections and details (p. 204)
5.1 Beams
Use these componentss to automatically create built-up beams: Component Box girder (S13) (p. 186) Image Description Creates a built-up beam using four plates welded together.
Cross profile (S32) (p. 188)
Creates a built-up beam using an I profile and two T profiles welded to the I profile web.
TEKLA STRUCTURES - DETAILING MANUAL Built-up Components
185
Component Cross plate profile (S33) (p. 189)
Image
Description Creates a built-up beam from seven plates welded together.
Tapered beam (S98) (p. 190)
Creates a tapered or straight built-up beam with I shape.
Tapered beam 2 (S45) (p. 192)
Creates a tapered or straight built-up beam with I shape. Flange and web plates can be spliced.
5.2 Box girder (S13)

Creates a built-up beam with box cross section.
Use for Do not use for Before you start
Straight built-up beams. Tapered built-up beams. Ensure that you have two points to pick.
186
Defining properties
Use the following tabs in built-up beam dialog boxes to define the properties of the component: Tab
Picture Parts Parameters
Contents Dimensions of plates. Properties of plates. Part names, classes and finishes. Beam location and length.
See also Dimensioning parts (p. 27) Built-up beam parameters (p. 187)
Picking order
1. 2.
Starting point for the beam. End point for the beam.
Built-up beam parameters

The Parameters tabs for the following built-up beams are the same:
Box girder (S13) Cross profile (S32) Cross plate profile (S33)
Use the following fields to change part properties and length and location of beams: Field
Name Class Finish Move end 1
Description See Part properties.
Moves the end of the beam you pick first. Negative values shorten the beam, positive values lengthen it. Moves the end of the beam you pick second. Negative values shorten the beam, positive values lengthen it. See Horizontal position. See Rotation. See Position depth.
Move end 2
Position in plane Position in plane offset Rotation Rotation offset Position in depth Position in depth offset
187
5.3 Cross profile (S32)

Creates a built-up beam using an I profile and two T profiles welded to the I profile web.
Use for Do not use for Before you start Defining properties
Straight built-up beams. Tapered built-up beams. Check that you have two points to pick. Use the following tabs in built-up beam dialog boxes to define the properties of the parts the component creates: Tab
Contents Dimensions of profiles. Properties of plates. Part names, classes and finishes. Beam location and length.
See also Eccentricity (p. 188) Dimensioning parts (p. 27) Built-up beam parameters (p. 187)
Picking order
1. 2.
Eccentricity
Use eccentricity to adjust the location of horizontal parts relative to vertical parts in the following built-up beams:
Cross profile (S32) Cross plate profile (S33)
188
By default the eccentricity is zero. So T profiles or plates are connected to the middle of the I profile web or vertical plate.
5.4 Cross plate profile (S33)

Creates a built-up beam using seven plates welded together.
Use for Do not use for Before you start Defining properties
Straight built-up beams. Tapered built-up beams. Ensure that you have two points to pick. Use the following tabs in built-up beam dialog boxes to define the properties of the parts this component creates. Tab
Contents Dimensions of plates. Properties of plates. Part names, classes and finishes. Location and length of beam.
See also Eccentricity (p. 188) Dimensioning parts (p. 27) Built-up beam parameters (p. 187)
Picking order
1. 2.
189
5.5 Tapered beam (S98)

Creates a tapered or straight built-up beam with I shape.
Parts created
Web plate Top flange plate Bottom flange plate The Getting Started (p. 5) chapter introduces the concept of using components to automatically connect parts and create model objects.
Use for
Situation
More information Creates a simple built-up beam between two picked points.
Ensure that you have two points to pick. Use the following tabs in the Tapered beam (S98) dialog box to define the properties of the component: Tab
Picture
Contents Height of the web or the entire beam, depending on the option in the Height type field on the Parameters tab. Sloping rise and run values. Properties of plates. Height type, type of reference point, type of cut, end plate thickness, position of web plate.
See also
Parts Parameters
Dimensioning parts (p. 27) Tapered beam parameters (p. 191)
190
Picking order
1.
Pick a start and end point to indicate beam length: 2
Tapered beam parameters

The properties on the Parameters tab in the Tapered beam (S98) dialog box are: Property
Height type Type of reference point
Description Affects the height values entered in the Picture tab. Location of the end of the beam, relative to a point you pick:
Top profile, end of endpl
Top profile, end of webpl
Top webpl, end of endp
Top webpl, end of webpl
191
Property
Type of cut
Description Shape of beam ends:

Vertical in global system
Perpend to top flange
Position of web plate Thickness of endplate
In Z of current plane: depends on the position of
the work plane Adjusts the location of web plate. See also Position depth in the online help. Set-back distance of beam ends.
5.6 Tapered beam 2 (S45)

Creates a built-up beam with I shape. The beam can be tapered or straight. You can control the size of the spliced material.
Parts created
Web plates Top flange plates Bottom flange plates The Getting Started (p. 5) chapter introduces the concept of using components to automatically connect parts and create model objects.
192
Use for
Situation
More information A simple, straight beam built up from two flange plates and a web plate.
A tapered beam built-up from several spliced plates. The points you pick determine beam length. You can adjust the length on the Picture tab.
Ensure that you have two points to pick. Use the following tabs in the Tapered beam (S45) dialog box to define the properties of the parts this component creates: Tab
Picture Parts
Contents Beam dimensions and location, relative to the points picked. Properties of plates.
See also Picture (S45) (p. 194) Dimensioning parts (p. 27)
Picking order
1.
Pick a start and end point to indicate beam length: 2
193
Picture (S45)
The Picture tab in the Tapered column (S45) dialog box contains the following dimensions:
Field
1
Description Distance from the first point picked to the end of the beam. Negative value lengthen the beam, positive values shorten it. Beam depth at the first end.
More information
The height of the web or the entire beam, depending on the option Depth measure (p. 212).
3 4 5
Length of top flange plates. Length of web plates. Length of bottom flange.
For example, to have four one-meter sections, enter 4*1000. Leave blank to create the flange or web from a single plate.
6 7 8
Gap between the top flange plates. How much the beam slopes from the horizontal. Gap between the bottom flange plates. Enter a percentage.
194
Field
9
Description Distance from the last point picked to the end of the beam. Negative value lengthen the beam, positive values shorten it. Beam depth at the second end.
More information
10
The height of the web or the entire beam, depending on the option Depth measure (p. 212).
See also
Use the following options to define beam location and dimensions: Option See also Beam position to picked point (p. 211)
Web plate orientation (p. 212)
Beam end alignment (p. 212)
Depth measure (p. 212)
195
5.7 Columns
Use these components to automatically create built-up columns: Component Tapered column (S99) (p. 196) Image Description Creates a single built-up column, which can be straight or tapered.
Tapered column 2 (S44) (p. 199)
Creates a built-up column, which can be straight or tapered. Flange and web plates can be spliced.
5.8 Tapered column (S99)

Creates a single built-up column, which can be straight or tapered.
Parts created
Vertical web plate Vertical outside flange plate Inclined inside flange plate Top plate Flange stiffeners (2) Horizontal stiffeners (2) The Getting Started (p. 5) chapter introduces the concept of using components to automatically connect parts and create model objects.
196
Use for
Situation
More information A tapered built-up column with a stiffened corner.
Flange stiffeners
A straight built-up column.
Ensure that you have a point to pick. Use the following tabs in the Tapered column (S99) dialog box to define the properties of the parts this component creates: Tab
Contents Column dimensions. Properties of plates. Plate sizes, distances and other properties.
See also Picture (S99) (p. 198) Dimensioning parts (p. 27) Parameters (S99) (p. 199)
197
Picking order
1.
Pick a point to indicate the location of column:
Picture (S99)
Use the following options on the Picture tab in the Tapered column (S99) dialog box to define the dimensions of the parts this component creates:
Field
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Description Extra length for top plate. Extra length for outer flange. Length of horizontal stiffener. Top level of horizontal stiffener. Bottom level of column. Roof slope as a percentage, for example 10. Distance from the top corner to the top of the stiffener.
198
Field
8 9
Description Distance from the top of the stiffener to the inner corner of the web plate. Web plate width at bottom.
Parameters (S99)
Use the Parameters tab in the Tapered column (S99) dialog box to define the following properties: Field
Outer flange profile Inner flange profile Top plate profile Horizontal stiffener profile Outer flange splice distance Inner flange splice distance Horizontal stiffener chamfer Orientation
Description Profile size of plates. The file std_flange_plates.dat defines the available plate profiles.
If the plate is longer than the maximum plate length (defined in std_flange_plates.dat), Tekla Structures creates a splice. Dimension of internal chamfer in horizontal stiffener. (Default is 15.) Rotates the column web relative to the work plane.
5.9 Tapered column 2 (S44)

Creates a welded built-up column, which can be tapered or straight. You can control the taper and the size of the spliced material.
Parts created
Web plates Top flange plates Bottom flange plates The Getting Started (p. 5) chapter introduces the concept of using components to automatically connect parts and create model objects.
199
Use for
Situation
Example A simple straight column built up from two flange plates and a web plate.
A more complex tapered column, with several plates forming the web, top, and bottom flanges.
Ensure that you have a point to pick. Use the following tabs in the Tapered column 2 (S44) dialog box to define the properties of the parts this component creates: Tab
Picture
Contents Column dimensions and location relative to points picked. Properties of plates.
See also Similar to Tapered beam 2 (S45), see Picture (S45) (p. 194). Dimensioning parts (p. 27)
Parts
Picking order
1.
Pick the position of the column.
200
5.10 Frames
Use the following components to automatically create built-up frames, beams, and columns: Component Tapered frame comonor (S53) (p. 201) Image Description Creates a built-up frame or parts of it. You can control the taper and the size of the spliced material.
5.11 Tapered frame comonor (S53)

Creates a built-up frame or parts of it. You can control the taper and the size of the spliced material.
Parts created
Built-up columns with base plate and end plate (2) Built-up beams with end plates (2) Built-up beams with end plates (2) The Getting Started (p. 5) chapter introduces the concept of using components to automatically connect parts and create model objects.
201
Use for
Situation Beam 1
More information Built-up frame. Use the following options:

Frame options to Column and beams Symmetry to Yes
Beam 2
Sloped built-up frame. Use the following options:

Frame options to Column and beams Symmetry to Yes
Only half of the frame. Use the following options:

Frame options to Column and first beam Symmetry to No
Built-up column with base plate and end plate. Use the following options:
Frame options to Column Symmetry to No
202
Situation
More information Built-up beam (1) with end plates. Use the following options:
Frame options to First beam Symmetry to No
Built-up beam (2) with end plates. Use the following options:
Before you start Defining properties Frame options to Second beam Symmetry to No
Ensure that you have a point to pick. Use the following tabs in the Tapered frame comonor (S53) dialog box to define the properties of the parts this component creates: Tab
Picture
Contents Column dimensions and location relative to points picked.
See also Works similar to Tapered beam 2 (S45), see Picture (S45) (p. 194). Dimensioning parts (p. 27)
Parts Column Column2 Column3 Beam1 Beam1_2 Beam2 Beam2_2
Properties of plates. Column dimensions. Base plate bolts. End plate bolts between column and beam 1. Beam 1 dimensions. End plate bolts between beam 1 and beam 2. Beam 2 dimensions. End plate bolts at the hip between beam 2 and beam 2.
Picking order
1. 2.
Pick the position of the column. Tekla Structures creates the frame.
203
5.12 Connections and details

Use the following components to automatically create connections and details for built-up beams and columns: Component Tapered beam to column (197) (p. 204) Image Description Creates a connection between a tapered beam and a tapered column.
Tapered column to beam (199) (p. 206)
Creates a connection between a tapered beam and a tapered column.
Tapered beam to beam (200) (p. 207)
Creates a connection between tapered beams.
Tapered column base plate (1068) (p. 209)
Creates a base plate detail to a tapered column.
5.13 Tapered beam to column (197)

Creates a connection between a tapered beam and a tapered column.
Parts created
Plate to the top of the column Stiffeners (2 or 4) Plate to the beam flange (optional) The Getting Started (p. 5) chapter introduces the concept of using components to automatically connect parts and create model objects.
204
Use for
Situation
Example Connection created using two stiffeners and flange and column plates. Plates are connected with four bolts, but you can use any number.
Connection created using four stiffeners and a column end plate. Does not create a separate plate for the beam flange.
Create the tapered beam. Create the tapered column.
Use the following tabs in the Tapered beam to column (197) dialog box to define the properties of the parts this component creates: Tab
Picture
Contents Dimensions of end plates and stiffeners. Location of stiffeners. Options to fit column flange. Properties of column plate, beam plate and stiffeners. Bolt properties, number of bolts, spacing. Option to create slotted holes.
See also Column fitting option (197) (p. 213) Dimensioning parts (p. 27) Defining bolts (p. 32) Defining slotted holes (p. 36) Defining bolt assemblies (p. 38) Number of bolts and spacing (p. 33)
Parts Bolts
205
Picking order
1. 2.
Pick the flange of the beam. Pick the web of the column.
5.14 Tapered column to beam (199)

Creates connection between a tapered beam and a tapered column. All parts are optional. To omit a part, set its thickness to 0 on the Parts tab.
Parts created
End plates: to top of column and beam flange (optional) Web stiffeners (8) (optional) Triangular beam flange stiffener (optional) Triangular flange stiffeners (2) (optional) Beam web stiffeners (2) (optional) The Getting Started (p. 5) chapter introduces the concept of using components to automatically connect parts and create model objects.
Use for
Situation Beam flange stiffener Beam web stiffeners
Example Connection created using all possible parts. Plates are connected using four bolts, but you can use any number.
Flange stiffeners Endplates Web stiffeners
Before you start
Create the tapered beam. Create the tapered column.
206
Defining properties
Use the following tabs in the Tapered column to beam (199) dialog box to define the properties of the parts this component creates: Tab
Picture
Contents Dimensions of end plates and stiffeners. Location of stiffeners. Option to fit column flange. Properties of column plate, beam plate and stiffeners. Bolt properties, number of bolts, spacing. Option to create slotted holes.
See also Column fitting option (199) (p. 214) Corner fitting option (199) (p. 214) Dimensioning parts (p. 27) Defining bolts (p. 32) Defining slotted holes (p. 36) Defining bolt assemblies (p. 38) Number of bolts and spacing (p. 33)
Parts Bolts
Picking order
1. 2.
Pick the web of the beam. Pick the web of the column.
5.15 Tapered beam to beam (200)

Creates a connection between tapered beams. To omit a part, set its thickness to 0 on the Parts tab.
Parts created
End plates (2) Flange stiffeners (4) (optional) Web stiffeners (8) (optional) The Getting Started (p. 5) chapter introduces the concept of using components to automatically connect parts and create model objects.
207
Use for
Situation
More information This example is created with all stiffeners and end plates. Plates are connected with eight bolts, but you can use any number.
Before you start
Create the following parts: Tapered beam Another tapered beam
Defining properties
Use the following tabs in the Tapered beam to beam (200) dialog box to define the properties of the parts this component creates: Tab
Picture
Contents Dimensions of end plates and stiffeners. Location of stiffeners. Option to fit column flange. Properties of end plates, web stiffeners and flange stiffeners. Bolt properties, number of bolts, spacing. Option to create slotted holes.
See also Column fitting option (200) (p. 215) Dimensioning parts (p. 27) Defining bolts (p. 32) Defining slotted holes (p. 36) Defining bolt assemblies (p. 38) Number of bolts and spacing (p. 33)
Parts Bolts
Picking order
1. 2.
Pick the flange of the first beam. Pick the flange of the second beam.
208
5.16 Tapered column base plate (1068)

Creates a base plate detail to a tapered column.
Parts created
Base plate Web stiffeners (4) Flange stiffeners (2) (optional) The Getting Started (p. 5) chapter introduces the concept of using components to automatically connect parts and create model objects.
Use for
Situation
Example Detail uses four web stiffeners and without flange stiffeners. The end plate is connected using four bolts, but you can use any number.
Detail uses four web stiffeners and two flange stiffeners.
Before you start
Create a tapered column.
209
Defining properties
Use the following tabs in the Tapered column base plate (1068) dialog box to define the properties of the parts this component creates: Tab
Picture
Contents Dimensions of base plate and stiffeneres. Location of web stiffeners. Option to fit column flange. Properties of base plate, web and flange stiffeners. Bolt properties, number of bolts, spacing. Option to create slotted holes.
See also Column fitting option (1068) (p. 213)
Parts Bolts
Dimensioning parts (p. 27) Defining bolts (p. 32) Defining slotted holes (p. 36) Defining bolt assemblies (p. 38) Number of bolts and spacing (p. 33)
Picking order
1. 2.
Pick the tapered column. Pick a point to indicate the location of base plate.
5.17 Tapered component properties

This section describes the options that appear in many of the tapered component dialog boxes. In the table below, the Option column shows the default option. To see all available options, click the link in the See also column. Option Description Position of the beam, relative to the point picked. Orientation of the web plates. Alignment of beam end cut. See also Beam position to picked point (p. 211) Web plate orientation (p. 212) Beam end alignment (p. 212)
210
Option
Description How the depth of the beam is measured. Option to fit the flanges of a tapered column (1068). Option to fit the flanges of a tapered column (197). Option to fit the flanges of a tapered column (199). Option to fit corner of tapered beam.
See also Depth measure (p. 212) Column fitting option (1068) (p. 213)
Column fitting option (197) (p. 213)
Corner fitting option (199) (p. 214)
Option to fit the flanges of tapered beams (200).
Beam position to picked point

Use the following options to move the beam relative to the point picked. Separate options may be available for both beam ends: Option Description Moves the beam so that the point is located at the top of the top flange. Moves the beam so that the point is located at the bottom of the top flange. Moves the beam so that the point is located in the middle of beam cross-section.
211
Web plate orientation

Use one of the following options to set the orientation of web plates for built-up sections: Option Description Web plates cut perpendicular to the top flange.
Web plates cut vertically.
Beam end alignment

Use one of the following options to cut the beam end: Option Description Cut is vertical or horizontal.
Cut is perpendicular to top flange.
Cut is relative to the current position of the work plane.
Depth measure
Use one of the following options to define beam depth: Option Description Depth calculated from outer surfaces of top and bottom flanges. Depth is the depth of the web.
212
Column fitting option (1068)

Use one of the following options to define how the column flange is cut in the Tapered column base plate (1068) (p. 209) detail: Option Description Column flange fitted to be level with the base plate.
Column flange is perpendicular to column axis.

This option defines how the column flange is cut in the Tapered beam (S98) (p. 190) connection. Option Description Column flange fitted to be level with the end plate.
Column flange perpendicular to column axis.
213

This option defines how the column flange is cut in the Tapered column to beam (199) (p. 206) connection. Option Description Column flange fitted to be level with the end plate.
Column flange perpendicular to column axis.
Corner fitting option (199)

This option defines how the corner is cut in the Tapered column to beam (199) (p. 206) connection. Option Description Corner is fitted.
Corner is not fitted.
214

This option defines how the column flange is cut in the Tapered beam to beam (200) (p. 207) connection. Option Description Beam flanges fitted to be level with the end plates.
Beam flange perpendicular to beam axis.
215
216
Bracing Components
Introduction
The Tekla Structures component catalog includes a variety of bracing components that automatically create complete bracing connections. It also includes bracing elements (such as gusset plates and stiffeners), that you can combine with other components to create your own bracing connections. To open the component catalog, use the keyboard shortcut Ctrl + F. Bracing connections are located in the Steel detailing section of the component catalog:
Contents
The Bracing components chapter contains the following topics: Glossary of parts (p. 218) Simple gusset plate connections (p. 220) Corner bracing connections (p. 245) Windbracing connections (p. 271) Bracing connection elements (p. 276)
217
TEKLA STRUCTURES - DETAILING MANUAL Bracing Components
See also
For general information about components and how to use them, see Basics (p. 5) and Using components (p. 22). Component catalog (p. 15) Custom Components (p. 549)
6.1 Glossary of parts

Bracing components create some or all of the following parts: Part Gusset plate Gusset plate Image
Connection plate Connection plates
Cover plate Cover plates
Tongue plate A tongue plate slots into a hollow profile brace.
218
Part Clip angle
Image
Clip angles
Shear tab Shear tab
Seal plate
Seal plates seal the ends of hollow braces. In this example they are used with chamfered connection plates.
219
Part Tee
Image
Tees are formed from T or cut I profiles, or two plates. Tees seal hollow braces and connect them to another part (e.g. a gusset plate) Stiffener
Stiffeners
6.2 Simple gusset plate connections

Simple gusset plate connections automatically connect braces to a single main part, using a gusset plate. Braces either connect directly to the gusset plate, or use connection material. Tekla Structures includes the following simple gusset plate connections: Component Welded gusset (10) (p. 222) Image Description Welds braces to a gusset plate.
220
Bolted gusset (11, 196) (p. 225)
Bolts braces to a gusset plate. Optional clip angles or shear tabs.
Bracing cross (19) (p. 229)
Bolts twin-profile braces to an existing gusset plate.
Tube gusset (20) (p. 231)
Bolts braces to a gusset plate using connection plates and optional tongue plates. Seals braces.
Tube crossing (22) (p. 235)
Bolts braces to an existing gusset plate using connection plates and optional tongue plates. Seals braces.
Std bracing connection (67) (p. 236)
Bolts 1 or 2 braces to a gusset plate using connection plates. Seals hollow braces.
Wrapped cross (61) (p. 238)
Bolts braces to an existing gusset plate, using connection plates and clip angles.
221
Gusseted cross (62) (p. 240)
Bolts braces to a gusset plate using clip angles and connection plates. Welds or bolts the gusset plate to the beam or column.
Portal bracing (105) (p. 243)
Connects up to three hollow braces to a beam, using a gusset plate and tees.
Welded gusset (10)

Connects 1 to 10 braces to a beam or column using a gusset plate welded to the web or flange of the beam or column. Welds the braces to the gusset plate.
Profiles Parts created
Braces: Gusset plate to connect braces to the column or beam web Seal plates (hollow braces) The Getting Started (p. 5) chapter introduces the concept of using components to automatically connect parts and create model objects.
222
Use for
Situation
Description Brace profile: T Connection method: Gusset plate welded to column flange Braces welded to gusset plate
Brace profile: T Connection method: Gusset plate welded to column web Braces welded to gusset plate
Before you start
Create a beam or column and 1 to 10 braces.
223
Defining properties
Use the following tabs in the dialog box to define the properties of the parts this component creates:
Tab Picture Contents See also
Dimensions that define the position and shape of the gusset plate. Gusset plate properties.
Modifying gusset plate shape (p. 285) Dimensioning parts (p. 27) Defining materials (p. 30) Defining gusset plate type (p. 286) Fine-tuning position (p. 289) Defining gusset plate position on the brace (p. 289)
Gusset
Brace conn
Seal plate, brace notch and slot properties.
Dimensioning parts (p. 27) Defining materials (p. 30)
General
Connection properties, AutoDefaults and AutoConnection rule groups. Information used in structural analysis
General tab (p. 12)
Analysis
Tekla Structures uses values in the joints.def file to create this component.
Picking order
1. 2. 3. 4.
Beam or column First brace Second and subsequent braces Click the middle mouse button to create the component
224
Bolted gusset (11, 196)

Connects 1 to 10 braces to a beam or column using a gusset plate, which is bolted or welded to the beam or column. Bolts the braces to the gusset plate. Creates optional clip angles, either at the ends of the braces, or on each side.
Gusset plate Clip angles or shear tabs(optional) connecting the gusset plate to the beam or column Clip angles (optional) connecting the brace to the gusset plate Connection plates Seal plates (hollow braces) The Getting Started (p. 5) chapter introduces the concept of using components to automatically connect parts and create model objects.
225
Use for
Situation
Description Brace profile: RHS Connection method: Gusset plate bolted to beam flange using a clip angle Braces slotted around the gusset plate and attached to it using bolts and clip angles
Brace profile: Tube Connection method: Gusset plate welded to beam web Brace notched around gusset plate and pinned to it
Brace profile: T Connection method: Gusset plate welded to beam flange Brace bolted to gusset plate
Brace profile: L Connection method: Gusset plate welded to column flange Brace bolted to gusset plate
226
Create a beam or column and 1 to 10 braces. Use the following tabs in the dialog box to define the properties of the part this component creates: Tab
Picture
Contents Dimensions that define the position, shape, and chamfer of the gusset plate. Gusset, connection plates, and clip angle properties; clip angle limit for parallel bracing.
See also Modifying gusset plate shape (p. 285) Dimensioning parts (p. 27) Defining materials (p. 30) Defining gusset plate type (p. 286) Defining gusset plate position on the beam or column (11) (p. 289) Selecting gusset plate connection material (11) (p. 287)
Gusset
Brace conn
Sealplate properties, brace notch and slot properties.
Dimensioning parts (p. 27) Defining materials (p. 30) Creating tongue plates (20, 22, 56) (p. 293)
General
Connection properties, AutoDefaults and AutoConnection rule groups.
General tab (p. 12)
227
Tab
Gussetbolt
Contents Option to weld or bolt clip angles to gusset plate and brace, option to weld or bolt gusset plate to beam or column, bolt group properties for gusset plate bolts. Bolt group properties for the bolts that connect the first brace picked to the gusset plate. Bolt group properties for the bolts that connect the second and subsequent braces picked to the gusset plate. Option to use clip angles or shear tabs to connect the brace to the gusset, bolt group properties for bolts that connect optional clip angles.
See also Defining bolts and welds (p. 30)
Bracebolts1
Bracebolts2 Bracebolts3
Angle bolts
Dimensioning parts (p. 27) Defining materials (p. 30) Defining bolts and welds (p. 30) Using clip angles to connect braces (11, 57) (p. 295)
Analysis
Information used in structural analysis
Bolted gusset (196)
With hollow secondary parts Bolted gusset (196) automatically removes connection objects created between the gusset plate and the hollow secondary part, and then uses the connection Tube crossing (22) (p. 235) between the gusset plate and the hollow secondary part. To define which property file Tube crossing (22) uses, go to Brace bolts 2 tab, and enter the property file name in the field Attributes for Tube crossing (22).
228
Picking order
1. 2. 3. 4.
The beam or column First brace Second and subsequent braces Click the middle mouse button to create the component
Bracing cross (19)

Bolts one or more twin-profile braces to an existing gusset plate.
Profiles
Braces: Twin profiles To create a gusset plate, use the Standard gusset (1065) (p. 277) component, or the Parts > Contour plate command.
Parts created
229
Use for
Situation
Description Brace profile: L Connection method: Braces bolted directly to gusset plate
Brace profile: W Connection method: Braces notched around gusset plate and bolted to it
Create a gusset plate and 1 to 10 braces. Use the following tabs in the dialog box to define the properties of the parts this component creates: Tab
Parameters General
Contents Option to notch brace flange, notch properties. Connection properties, AutoDefaults and AutoConnection rule groups. Bolt group properties for the bolts that connect the braces to the gusset plate. Information used in structural analysis
See also
General tab (p. 12)
Bolts
Defining bolts and welds (p. 30) Analysis properties of components
Analysis
230
Picking order
1. 2. 3. 4.
Gusset plate First brace Second and subsequent braces Click the middle mouse button to create the component
Tube gusset (20)

Connects 1 to 10 hollow braces to a beam or a column using a gusset plate. Bolts braces to the gusset plate using a welded connection plate and optional tongue plate. Seals braces.
Braces: RHS, tube Gusset plate Connection plates End plates Tongue plates Cover plate The Getting Started (p. 5) chapter introduces the concept of using components to automatically connect parts and create model objects.
Use for
Situation
Description
231
Brace profile: RHS Connection method: Gusset plate welded to column flange Brace bolted to gusset plate using a tongue plate
Brace profile: RHS Connection method: Gusset plate welded to column flange Brace welded to connection plate. The end of the brace is notched to accommodate the bolts in the connection between the connection plate and the gusset plate.
Before you start
232
Defining properties
Use the following tabs in the dialog box to define the properties of the parts this component creates: Tab
Picture
Contents Dimensions that define the position, shape, and chamfer of the gusset plate. Gusset plate properties.
See also Modifying gusset plate shape (p. 285) Defining gusset plate type (p. 286) Defining gusset plate position on the brace (p. 289) Defining gusset plate position on the beam or column (11) (p. 289) Specifying gusset plate connection material (11, 20, 62) (p. 290)
Gusset
Brace conn
Connection, end, tongue, and cover plate properties. Option to cut brace or connection plate.
Dimensioning parts (p. 27) Defining materials (p. 30) Defining the brace connection (p. 291) Creating tongue plates (20, 22, 56) (p. 293)
General
General tab (p. 12)
233
Tab
Gusset conn
Contents Option to weld or bolt clip angles to gusset plate and brace, bolt group properties for bolts that connect the gusset plate to the beam or column. Bolt group properties for the bolts that connect the first brace picked to the gusset plate. Bolt group properties for the bolts that connect the second and subsequent braces picked to the gusset plate. Cover plate and cross plate properties.
See also Defining bolts and welds (p. 30)
Bracebolts1
Cross plates
Analysis
Picking order
1. 2. 3. 4.
234
Tube crossing (22)

Bolts one or more braces to an existing gusset plate, directly, or using connection plates. Seals braces.
Profiles
Braces: W, RHS, tube To create a gusset plate, use the Standard gusset (1065) (p. 277) component or the Parts > Contour plate command.
Parts created
Connection plates End plates Tongue plates Cover plates The Getting Started (p. 5) chapter introduces the concept of using components to automatically connect parts and create model objects.
Use for
Situation
Description Brace profile: RHS, W Connection method: RHS brace bolted to gusset plate using a tongue plate W-profile braces bolted directly to gusset plate
Picture
Contents Dimensions that define connection plate width, brace notch, and clearance between the gusset plate and brace.
See also
235
Brace conn
Properties of connection, end, tongue, and cover plates. Options defining the brace connection.
Dimensioning parts (p. 27) Defining materials (p. 30) Defining the brace connection (p. 291) Creating tongue plates (20, 22, 56) (p. 293)
Brace bolts
Bolt group properties for the bolts that connect the braces to the gusset plate. Connection properties, AutoDefaults and AutoConnection rule groups. Cover plate and cross plate properties. Information used in structural analysis
Defining bolts and welds (p. 30) General tab (p. 12)
General
Rib plates Analysis
Tekla Structuresuses values in the joints.def file to create this component.
Picking order
1. 2. 3. 4.
Std bracing connection (67)

Connects 1 or 2 braces to a beam or column, using a gusset plate and connection plates. Seals hollow and tube profile braces. You can define different properties for the upper and lower brace connections.
Braces: RHS, tube Gusset plate Connection plates Seal plates
236
Use for
Situation
Description Brace profile: RHS Connection method: Gusset plate welded to column web Brace bolted to gusset plate using chamfered connection plates.
Create a beam or column and 1 or 2 braces. Use the following tabs in the dialog box to define the properties of the parts this component creates: Tab
Picture
Contents Dimensions that define the location of the braces on the gusset plate, connection plate chamfer, end plate clearance. Properties of all plates.
See also Dimensioning parts (p. 27)
Parts
Gusset
Gusset plate properties and location.
Dimensioning parts (p. 27) Defining materials (p. 30) Modifying gusset plate shape (p. 285)
General
General tab (p. 12)
237
Bracebolts1
Bolt group properties of the bolts connecting the connection plate to the gusset plate for the first brace picked. Bolt group properties of the bolts connecting the connection plate to the gusset plate for the second and subsequent braces picked. Information used in structural analysis
Defining bolts and welds (p. 30)
Bracebolts2
Analysis
Picking order
1. 2. 3. 4.
Wrapped cross (61)

Bolts one or more braces to an existing gusset plate, using connection plates and clip angles.
Profiles
To create a gusset plate, use the Standard gusset (1065) (p. 277) component or the Parts > Contour plate command.
Parts created
Clip angles Connection plates The Getting Started (p. 5) chapter introduces the concept of using components to automatically connect parts and create model objects.
238
Use for
Situation
Description Brace profile: W Connection method: Braces bolted to gusset plate using clip angles and connection plates
Picture Brace conn
Contents Gap between the gusset plate and brace. Properties of connection, filler, and shim plates, and shear tabs; options to create clip angles or shear tabs, filler and shim plates.
See also
Dimensioning parts (p. 27) Defining materials (p. 30) Creating filler plates (58, 61, 62, 63) (p. 297) Creating shim plates (58, 61, 62, 63) (p. 298)
General
General tab (p. 12)
239
Brace bolts
Bolt group properties of the bolts connecting the connection plate to the gusset plate and brace. Bolt group properties of the bolts that connect the clip angles to the braces. Information used in structural analysis
Angle bolts
Analysis
Picking order
1. 2. 3. 4.
Gusseted cross (62)

Bolts 1 to 10 braces to a beam or column using a gusset plate. Welds or bolts the gusset plate to the beam or column. Bolts braces to the gusset plate using clip angles and connection plates.
Braces: U, W Gusset plate Clip angles Connection plates Filler plates Shim plates The Getting Started (p. 5) chapter introduces the concept of using components to automatically connect parts and create model objects.
240
Use for
Situation
Description Brace profile: W Connection method: Gusset plate welded to beam Different connection materials used for each brace
Brace profile: W Connection method: Gusset plate welded to beam Braces bolted to gusset plate using connection plates and clip angles.
Brace profile: W Connection method: Gusset plate welded to beam Different connection materials used for each brace
241
Create a beam or column and 1 to 10 braces Use the following tabs in the dialog box to define the properties of the parts this component creates: Tab
Picture
Contents Dimensions that define the position and shape of the gusset plate, brace notch properties. Properties of gusset and connection plates, and angle profiles.
See also Modifying gusset plate shape (p. 285)
Gusset
Dimensioning parts (p. 27) Defining materials (p. 30) Modifying gusset plate shape (p. 285) Defining gusset plate position on the brace (p. 289) Defining gusset plate type (p. 286) Defining chamfer dimensions (p. 288) Specifying gusset plate connection material (11, 20, 62) (p. 290)
Brace conn
Properties of connection, filler, shim, and shear tabs; options to create clip angles or shear tabs, filler and shim plates.
Dimensioning parts (p. 27) Defining materials (p. 30) Creating filler plates (58, 61, 62, 63) (p. 297) Creating shim plates (58, 61, 62, 63) (p. 298)
General
General tab (p. 12)
242
Gusset conn
Options to weld or bolt clip angles to gusset plate and braces, options to bolt or weld gusset plate to beam or column, bolt group properties for gusset plate bolts. Bolt group properties for the bolts in the upper, or only connection plate. Bolt group properties for the bolts in the middle connection plate. Bolt group properties for the bolts in the lower connection plate. Information used in structural analysis
Bracebolts1
Bracebolts2
Bracebolts3
Analysis
Picking order
1. 2. 3. 4.
Beam or column First brace Second and subsequent braces Click the middle mouse button to create the component The order in which you pick the braces is important. It can affect the position of braces on the gusset plate. See Picking order affects brace position (p. 287).
Portal bracing (105)

Connects up to 3 hollow braces to a beam or column, using a gusset plate and Tees.
Topics Profiles Parts created
RHS, tube Gusset plate Tees

243
Use for
Situation
Description Brace profile: Tube Connection method: Gusset plate welded to beam Braces bolted to gusset plate using tees
Brace profile: RHS Connection method: Gusset plate welded to column Braces bolted to gusset plate using tees
Braces that are not in the same plane. Create up to three braces all in the same plane, and a beam. Use the following tabs in the dialog box to define the properties of the parts this component creates: Tab
Parts
Contents Properties of the gusset plate and the Tees at the ends of the braces. Tee dimensions, clearances, option to chamfer gusset plate, position of gusset plate.
See also Defining Tees (105) (p. 303)
Parameters
244
General
Connection properties, AutoDefaults and AutoConnection rule groups. Bolt group properties of the bolts use to connect the first brace picked to the gusset plate. Bolt group properties of the bolts use to connect the second and third brace picked to the gusset plate. Information used in structural analysis
General tab (p. 12)
Bolts
Bolts 2 Bolts 3
Analysis
Picking order
1. 2. 3. 4.
Beam or column First brace Second and third braces Click the middle mouse button to create the component
6.3 Corner bracing connections

Use corner bracing connections to automatically connect bracing where two parts meet to form a corner, for example: Beam and column Column and base plate Beam and extended end plate Two beams and a column
Tekla Structures includes the following corner bracing connections: Component Corner tube gusset (56) (p. 247) Image Description Bolts braces to a gusset plate using connection plates and optional tongue plates. Seals hollow braces
245
Corner bolted gusset (57) (p. 250)
Bolts braces to a gusset plate. Welds the gusset plateto one or both of the parts that form the corner. Seals hollow braces.
Wraparound gusset (58) (p. 253)
Bolts or welds braces to a gusset plate. Option to wrap the gusset plate around a third part, usually a column. Option to use connection material to connect the gusset plate to the main parts. Bolts or welds hollow braces to a gusset plate. Option to wrap the gusset plate around a third part, usually a column. Option to use connection material to connect the gusset plate to the main parts. Bolts or welds braces to a gusset plate. Option to use clip angles. Option to wrap the gusset plate around a third part, usually a column. Option to use connection material to connect the gusset plate to the main parts. Bolts braces to a gusset plate using clip angles and connection plates. Welds the gusset plate to one of the main parts.
Hollow brace wraparound gusset (59) (p. 256)
Wraparound gusset cross (60) (p. 260)
Corner wrapped gusset (63) (p. 264)
246
Bent gusset (140) (p. 267)
Connects braces in different planes to one or more beams or columns that are in different planes.Creates a gusset plate that is bent along two different bending lines. Seals hollow braces. Bolts a single brace to a gusset plate where two parts meet to form a corner. Rib plates strengthen the connection.
Heavy brace (165) (p. 269)
Corner tube gusset (56)

Connects 1 to 10 hollow braces to the corner where two parts meet, using a gusset plate. Bolts braces to the gusset plate using a connection plate or tongue plate slotted into the brace. Option to create extra connection plates. Seals braces.
Braces: RHS, tube Gusset plate Connection plates Tongue plates (optional) Cover plates (optional) Seal plates The Getting Started (p. 5) chapter introduces the concept of using components to automatically connect parts and create model objects.
247
Use for
Situation
Description Brace profile: RHS Framing type: Column and extended end plate Connection method: Gusset plate welded to extended end plate Braces bolted to gusset plate using tongue plates
Brace profile: RHS Framing type: Column and beam Connection method: Gusset plate welded to column flange Braces bolted to gusset plate using tongue plates, connection and cover plates
Create two parts that form a corner, and 1 to 10 braces. Use the following tabs in the dialog box to define the properties of the parts this component creates: Tab
Picture
Contents Dimensions that define the position, shape, and chamfer of the gusset plate. Gusset plate properties, properties of brace notches.
See also Modifying gusset plate shape (p. 285) Defining gusset plate type (p. 286) Defining gusset plate position on the brace (p. 289)
Gusset
248
Tab
Brace conn
Contents Connection, seal, tongue, and cover plate properties.
See also Dimensioning parts (p. 27) Defining materials (p. 30) Defining the brace connection (p. 291) Creating tongue plates (20, 22, 56) (p. 293)
General
Connection properties, AutoDefaults and AutoConnection rule groups. Bolt group properties for the bolts that connect the first brace picked to the gusset plate. Bolt group properties for the bolts that connect the second and subsequent braces picked to the gusset plate. Information used in structural analysis
General tab (p. 12)
Tubebolts1
Tubebolts2
Analysis
Picking order
1. 2. 3. 4. 5.
The first part that forms the corner First brace Second and subsequent braces The second part that forms the corner (Tekla Structures connects the gusset plate to this part) Click the middle mouse button to create the component
249
Corner bolted gusset (57)

Connects 1 to 10 braces to the corner where two parts meet, using a gusset plate. Welds the gusset plate to one or both of the parts that form the corner. Creates optional clip angles, either at the ends of the braces, or on each side. Seals RHS or tube braces.
T, L, RHS, tube, twin Gusset plate Clip angles(optional) Seal plates The Getting Started (p. 5) chapter introduces the concept of using components to automatically connect parts and create model objects.
250
Use for
Situation
Description Brace profile: RHS Framing type: Column and extended end plate Connection method: Gusset plate welded to extended end plate Braces pinned to the gusset plate
Brace profile: T, L Framing type: Column and extended end plate Connection method: Gusset plate welded to extended end plate Braces bolted to gusset plate
Before you start
Create 2 parts to form a corner, and 1 to 10 braces.
251
Defining properties
Picture
Contents Dimensions that define the position and shape of the gusset plate. Gusset plate properties, brace notch properties, weld options.
See also Modifying gusset plate shape (p. 285) Defining gusset plate properties (p. 285) Defining gusset plate position on the brace (p. 289)
Gusset
Bracebolts1
Bolt group properties for the bolts that connect the first brace picked to the gusset plate. Connection properties, AutoDefaults and AutoConnection rule groups. Bolt group properties for the bolts that connect the second and subsequent braces picked to the gusset plate. Option to create clip angles, location of clip angles, bolt group properties for the bolts that connect the clip angles to the gusset plate. Information used in structural analysis.
General
General tab (p. 12)
Bracebolts2
Angle bolts
Analysis
Picking order
1. 2. 3. 4.
The first part that forms the corner (Tekla Structures connects the gusset plate to this part) First brace Second and subsequent braces The second part that forms the corner
252
5.
Click the middle mouse button to create the component
Wraparound gusset (58)

Connects 1 to 10 braces to the corner where two or three parts meet, usually two beams and a column, using a gusset plate. Option to wrap the gusset plate around the third part, usually a column. Bolts or welds the brace web to the gusset plate using connection plates, and bolts or welds the brace flange to the gusset plate using clip angles. Either connects the gusset plate directly to the two beams, or uses clip angles or shear tabs, or connection plates.
Braces: W, C Gusset plate Clip angles or shear tabs Connection plates The Getting Started (p. 5) chapter introduces the concept of using components to automatically connect parts and create model objects.
Use for
Situation
Description Brace profile: W Framing type: Beam and column Connection method: Gusset plate bolted to column flange using a clip angle Braces bolted to gusset plate using a connection plate and clip angles
Before you start
Create 2 or 3 parts that form a corner, and 1 to 10 braces.
253
Defining properties
Picture
Description Dimensions that define the shape of the gusset plate, location of braces and clip angles; clearances; work point location. Properties of gusset and fastener plates, and clip angles.
See also Modifying gusset plate shape (p. 285) Specifying work point location (58, 59, 60) (p. 302) Dimensioning parts (p. 27) Defining gusset plate type (p. 286) Defining wraparound gusset plates (58, 59, 60) (p. 287) Defining chamfer dimensions (p. 288)
Gusset
Brace conn
Properties of connection, filler, shim, and shear tabs; options to create clip angles or shear tabs plates, filler and shim plates; brace connection properties.
Dimensioning parts (p. 27) Defining materials (p. 30) Creating filler plates (58, 61, 62, 63) (p. 297) Creating clip angles or shear tabs (58, 61, 62, 63) (p. 296) Creating shim plates (58, 61, 62, 63) (p. 298) Defining the brace connection (p. 291)
254
Gusset bolts 1
Connection options and bolt group properties for the first brace picked. Connection options and bolt group properties for the second and subsequent braces picked. Bolt group properties for the bolts that connect the first brace picked to the gusset plate. Bolt group properties for the bolts that connect the second and subsequent braces picked to the gusset plate. Properties of end preparations, rat holes, and cuts to beam flange. Information used in structural analysis.
Gusset bolts 2
Bracebolts1
Bracebolts2
Beam cut
Beam cut (p. 62)
Analysis
Picking order
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.
The first part that forms the corner First brace Second and subsequent braces The second part that forms the corner To wrap the gusset plate around the column where two beams and a column meet, pick the column (optional) Click the middle mouse button to create the component
255
Hollow brace wraparound gusset (59)

Connects 1 to 10 braces to the corner where 2 or 3 parts meet, using a gusset plate. Option to wrap the gusset plate around the third part, usually a column. Bolts or welds the brace web to the gusset plate using connection plates, and bolts or welds the brace flange to the gusset plate using clip angles. Either connects the gusset plate directly to the existing parts, or uses clip angles or connection plates. Seals braces.
Braces: RHS, tube Gusset plate Connection plates (optional) Clip angles (optional) End plates The Getting Started (p. 5) chapter introduces the concept of using components to automatically connect parts and create model objects.
256
Use for
Situation
Description Brace profile: RHS Framing type: Beam and column Connection method: Gusset plate bolted to column flange using a clip angle Brace bolted to gusset plate using a tongue plate
Brace profile: RHS Framing type: Beam and column Connection method: Gusset plate bolted to column flange using a clip angle Brace welded to connection plate. The end of the brace is notched to accommodate the bolts in the connection between the connection plate and the gusset plate.
Before you start
Create 2 or 3 parts that form a corner, and 1 to 10 braces.
257
Defining properties
Picture
Contents Dimensions that define the shape of the gusset plate, the width of the connection plate, and location of clip angles; clearances; brace notch properties; work point location.
See also Dimensioning parts (p. 27) Defining materials (p. 30) Defining gusset plate type (p. 286) Defining wraparound gusset plates (58, 59, 60) (p. 287) Defining chamfer dimensions (p. 288) Notching the brace (22, 59) (p. 294) Specifying work point location (58, 59, 60) (p. 302)
Gusset
Properties of gusset and connection plates, and clip angles; option to create clip angles or shear tabs.
Dimensioning parts (p. 27) Defining materials (p. 30) Modifying gusset plate shape (p. 285) Defining gusset plate type (p. 286) Defining chamfer dimensions (p. 288)
Brace conn
Properties of connection, end, tongue, and cover plates. Options defining the brace connection.
Dimensioning parts (p. 27) Defining materials (p. 30) Defining the brace connection (p. 291) Notching the brace (22, 59) (p. 294)
258
General
Connection properties, AutoDefaults and AutoConnection rule groups. Options for the first part picked: options to weld or bolt clip angle to gusset plate and first part picked, bolt group properties for clip angle bolts. Options for the second part picked. Same as Gusset conn 1. Bolt group properties for the bolts that connect the first brace picked to the gusset plate. Bolt group properties for the bolts that connect the second and subsequent braces picked to the gusset plate. Information used in structural analysis.
General tab (p. 12)
Gusset conn 1
Gusset conn 2
Bracebolts1
Bracebolts2
Analysis
Picking order
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.
The first part that forms the corner First brace Second and subsequent braces The second part that forms the corner To wrap the gusset plate around the column where two beams and a column meet, pick the column (optional) Click the middle mouse button to create the component
259
Wraparound gusset cross (60)

Connects 1 to 10 braces to a gusset plate where 2 or 3 parts meet to form a corner, using clip angles and connection plates. Option to wrap the gusset plate around the third part, usually a column. Connects the gusset plate to the parts using clip angles or connection plates, or welds it directly to the first part picked. Creates optional clip angles, either at the ends of the braces, or on each side. Seals hollow braces.
Braces: L, W, WT, RHS, tube Gusset plate Connection plates Clip angles (optional) Seal plates (hollow braces) The Getting Started (p. 5) chapter introduces the concept of using components to automatically connect parts and create model objects.
Use for
Situation
Description Brace profile: W Framing type: Column and 2 beams Connection method: Gusset plate bolted to beams using clip angles Braces notched and bolted to gusset plate
Brace profile: RHS Framing type: Column and beam Connection method: Gusset plate bolted to column using a clip angle Brace pinned to gusset plate
260
Brace profile: L Framing type: Two beams with different elevations Connection method: Gusset plate notched and bolted to both beams using clip angles Brace bolted to gusset plate
Brace profile: RHS Framing type: Column and column base plate Connection method: Gusset plate bolted to column and base plate using clip angles Brace pinned to gusset plate
In the above examples, we loaded the Default connection properties and set Rule group to Default.
Create 2 or 3 parts that meet to form a corner, and 1 to 10 braces Use the following tabs in the dialog box to define the properties of the parts this component creates: Tab
Picture
Contents Dimensions that define the position and shape of the gusset plate; workpoint location.
See also Modifying gusset plate shape (p. 285) Specifying work point location (58, 59, 60) (p. 302)
261
Gusset
Properties of gusset and connection plates, and angle profiles.
Dimensioning parts (p. 27) Defining materials (p. 30) Defining gusset plate type (p. 286) Modifying gusset plate shape (p. 285) Defining wraparound gusset plates (58, 59, 60) (p. 287) Defining chamfer dimensions (p. 288)
Brace conn
Options to notch and cut braces, seal plate properties.
Notching brace flange (60) (p. 294) Cutting braces (60) (p. 295)
General
General tab (p. 12)
262
Gussetbolt1
Options for the first part picked: weld or bolt clip angle to gusset plate and first part picked, bolt group properties for clip angle bolts. Options for the second part picked: weld or bolt clip angle to gusset plate and second part picked, bolt group properties for clip angle bolts. Bolt group properties for the bolts that connect the first brace picked to the gusset plate. Bolt group properties for the bolts that connect the second and subsequent braces picked to the gusset plate. Option to create and bolt clip angle to the ends, or on either side of the braces; bolt group properties. Information used in structural analysis.
Gussetbolt2
Bracebolts1
Bracebolts2
Anglebolts
Analysis
Picking order
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.
The first part that forms the corner First brace Second and subsequent braces The second part that forms the corner To wrap the gusset plate around the column where two beams and a column meet, pick the column. (optional) Click the middle mouse button to create the component
263
Corner wrapped gusset (63)

Bolts 1 to 10 braces to a gusset plate where 2 parts meet to form a corner, using clip angles and connection plates. Welds the gusset plate to one of the parts that form the corner.
W, U, C Gusset plate Connection platebetween the gusset plate and the brace web Shear tab between the gusset plate and the brace flange Filler plate between the connection plate and the brace web (optional) Shim plates (optional) Clip angles The Getting Started (p. 5) chapter introduces the concept of using components to automatically connect parts and create model objects.
Use for
Situation
Description Brace profile: W Framing type: Column and extended end plate Connection method: Gusset plate welded to extended end plate Braces bolted to gusset using clip angles on flanges and connection plates on webs
264
Brace profile: W Framing type: Column and extended end plate Connection method: Gusset plate welded to extended end plate Braces bolted to gusset using clip angles on flanges
Brace profile: W Framing type: Column and extended end plate Connection method: Gusset plate welded to extended end plate Braces bolted to gusset using connection plates on webs
Create 2 parts that form a corner, and 1 to 10 braces. Use the following tabs in the dialog box to define the properties of the parts this component creates: Tab
Picture Gusset
Contents Dimensions that define gusset plate shape. Gusset plate properties, brace notch properties, weld options.
See also Modifying gusset plate shape (p. 285) Dimensioning parts (p. 27) Defining materials (p. 30) Defining gusset plate type (p. 286) Defining gusset plate position on the brace (p. 289)
265
Brace conn
Properties of connection, filler and shim plates; options to create clip angles or shear tabs, filler and shim plates.
Dimensioning parts (p. 27) Defining materials (p. 30) Creating filler plates (58, 61, 62, 63) (p. 297) Creating clip angles or shear tabs (58, 61, 62, 63) (p. 296) Creating shim plates (58, 61, 62, 63) (p. 298)
General
Connection properties, AutoDefaults and AutoConnection rule groups. Bolt group properties for the bolts in the connection plate that connects the first brace picked to the gusset plate. Bolt group properties for the bolts in the connection plates that connect the second and subsequent braces picked to the gusset plate. Bolt group properties for the bolts connecting clip angles to the first brace picked. Bolt group properties for the bolts connecting clip angles to the second and subsequent braces picked. Information used in structural analysis.
General tab (p. 12)
Bracebolts1
Bracebolts2
Angle bolts 1
Angle bolts 2
Analysis
Picking order
1. 2.
The first part that forms the corner First brace
266
3. 4. 5.
Second and subsequent braces The second part that forms the corner Click the middle mouse button to create the component
Bent gusset (140)

Connects braces in different planes to one or more beams or columns that are in different planes. Creates a gusset plate that is bent along two bending lines. Seals tube or hollow profile braces.
Braces: L Gusset plate Seal plates The Getting Started (p. 5) chapter introduces the concept of using components to automatically connect parts and create model objects.
Use for
Situation
Description
Beams or columns that are in the same plane. Create one or more beams and columns, and 1 to 10 braces.
267
Defining properties
Picture
Contents Dimensions that define gusset plate shape, clearance between braces, cut options for ends of braces. Gusset plate properties, brace notch properties, weld options. Option to cut corner of gusset plate for single brace connections.
Gusset
Defining gusset plate properties (p. 285) Defining the bend line in skewed connections (140) (p. 289) Defining bolts and welds (p. 30)
Brace conn
Bolt group properties of the bolts connecting the gusset plate to the first beam or column picked. Connection properties, AutoDefaults and AutoConnection rule groups. Bolt group properties for the bolts that connect the first brace picked to the gusset plate. Bolt group properties for the bolts that connect the second and subsequent braces picked to the gusset plate. Options to create filler plates and to bolt braces to both gusset plate and the first or second beam or column picked. Information used in structural analysis.
General
General tab (p. 12)
Bracebolts1
Plates
Analysis
Picking order
1. 2. 3. 4.
Beam or column in the first plane First brace Second and subsequent braces in the first plane Braces in planes 2 and 3
268
5. 6.
The beam or column in the second plane Click the middle mouse button to create the component
Heavy brace (165)

Connects a single brace to a gusset plate where 2 parts meet to form a corner.
Profiles
Columns and beams: H, RHS, tube Braces: W
Parts created
Gusset plate Connection plates Rib plates Filler plates Stiffeners The Getting Started (p. 5) chapter introduces the concept of using components to automatically connect parts and create model objects.
Use for
Situation Rib plates
Description Column or beam profile: RHS, tube, I Brace profile: H Framing type: Column and beam Connection method: Gusset plate welded column Brace web bolted to gusset using connection plate
Sloped or skewed beams Create 2 parts that meet to form a corner, and one brace.
269
Defining properties
Picture
Contents Dimensions of gusset and rib plate, clearance between plate and brace. Properties of stiffeners and gusset, flange, web, rib, flange filler and web filler plates.
See also Dimensioning parts (p. 27) Defining materials (p. 30) Dimensioning parts (p. 27) Defining materials (p. 30) Defining plate sizes in marketsizes.dat (165, Japan) (p. 299)
Parts
Gusset General
Gusset plate chamfers, gap between gusset and brace. Connection properties, AutoDefaults and AutoConnection rule groups. Dimensions that define the size and location of rib plates, option to create ribs of equal length. Dimensions of stiffener plates. Bolt group properties for the bolts fastening the web connection plate to the gusset plate. Bolt group properties for the bolts fastening the flange connection plate to the gusset plate. Information used in structural analysis. Analysis properties of components Defining bolts and welds (p. 30) General tab (p. 12)
Ribs
Defining rib plate dimensions (165) (p. 299)
Stiffeners Web bolts
Flange bolts
Analysis
Picking order
1. 2. 3.
First part that forms the corner First brace Second and subsequent braces
270
4. 5.
Second part that forms the corner Click the middle mouse button to create the component
6.4 Windbracing connections

Use the following components to automatically create windbracing: Component Windbracing (1) (p. 271) Image Description Connects a single brace to a beam or column, using a connection plate, round plates, a threaded rod, and nuts.
Windbrace connection (110) (p. 273)
Bolts braces to a gusset plate. Welds or bolts the gusset plate to the main part. Braces can be: Located in the same work plane as the beam or column, or skewed On the same side of the beam or column, or on each side
Windbracing (1)
Connects a single hollow brace to a beam or column, using a connection plate, threaded rod, and nuts. Welds round plates to the connection plate and bolts it to the beam or column. Tekla Structures creates the threaded rod using the Detailing > Part add command. This means that the rod and brace are treated as a single part when you use commands like Delete, Move or Copy.
271
Brace: RHS, tube Connection plate Round plates (2) Filler plate Threaded rod Nuts on rod (2) The Getting Started (p. 5) chapter introduces the concept of using components to automatically connect parts and create model objects.
Use for
Situation
Description Column or beam profile: H Brace profile: RHS
Before you start
Create a beam or column and one brace.
272
Defining properties
Use the following tabs in the dialog box to define the properties of the parts this component creates:
Tab Picture Contents See also
Dimensions that define the size and position of the connection and round plates. Properties of all plates, nuts, and washers. Dimensioning parts (p. 27) Defining materials (p. 30) Defining part thickness (1) (p. 301)
Parts
Brace conn
Properties of the hole in the beam or column and the slot in the connection plate, position of round plates, rod dimensions. Connection properties, AutoDefaults and AutoConnection rule groups. Bolt group properties for the bolts that fasten the connection plate to the beam or column. Information used in structural analysis.
Defining hole type (1) (p. 302)
General
General tab (p. 12)
Bolts
Analysis
Picking order
1. 2.
Beam or column Brace
Windbrace connection (110)

Connects 1 to 10 braces to a beam or column by bolting them to a gusset plate, and welding or bolting the gusset plate to the beam or column. The braces can be: Located in the same work plane as the beam or column, or skewed On the same side of the beam or column, or on each side
273
Braces: L OR One gusset plate on each side of the beam or column, if the braces are located on either side of the beam or column. The plates are welded in the shop to create a folded gusset plate. The Getting Started (p. 5) chapter introduces the concept of using components to automatically connect parts and create model objects. One gusset plate, if the braces are located on the same side of the beam or column
Use for
Situation
Description Two gusset plates (welded in the shop to form a folded plate) Brace profile: L Connection method: Braces bolted directly to gusset plate
Column or beam profile: L Brace profile: L Connection method: Gusset plate welded column Braces web bolted to gusset plate. No stiffeners.
Before you start
274
Defining properties
Picture
Contents Dimensions that define gusset plate shape; brace clearances and cut options for ends of braces. Gusset plate properties, brace notch properties, weld options.
Gusset
Dimensioning parts (p. 27) Defining materials (p. 30) Modifying gusset plate shape (p. 285) Defining gusset plate type (p. 286) Defining gusset plate position on the brace (p. 289) Creating tongue plates (20, 22, 56) (p. 293) Creating an orientation hole in the gusset plate (110) (p. 290) Dimensioning holes in drawings (110, 140) (p. 302)
Gusset conn
Bolt group properties of the bolts connecting the gusset plate to the beam or column. Connection properties, AutoDefaults and AutoConnection rule groups. Bolt group properties for the bolts that connect the braces to the upper, or only gusset plate. Bolt group properties for the bolts that connect the braces to the lower gusset plate.
General
Bracebolts1
Bracebolts2
275
Brace conn
Option to create filler plates between the braces and the gusset plate; option to bolt the braces to the beam or column, as well as the gusset plate. Information used in structural analysis.
Double-bolting braces (110) (p. 295)
Analysis
Picking order
1. 2. 3. 4.
6.5 Bracing connection elements

Use the following components to create individual bracing elements, such as stiffeners and gusset plates. You can then use these elements to connect bracing to one or more parts, or in custom components. Component Standard gusset (1065) (p. 277) Image Description Creates a gusset plate and welds it to the beam or column web. Automatically creates a stiffener on each end of the gusset plate.
Gusset stiffeners (171) (p. 279)
Creates stiffener plates and welds them to an existing gusset plate and a beam or column. Options to chamfer the gusset plate and stiffeners. Creates a tube brace between two points using a tube crushed between bolts.
Crushed tube in points (S46) (p. 281)
276
Gusset tube in points (S47) (p. 281)
Creates a tube brace between two points that you pick, using a circular hollow section with 2 Tees at each end.
Crushed tube in bolts (S48) (p. 283)
Creates a tube brace using a tube crushed between two existing bolts.
Gusset tube in bolts (S49) (p. 284)
Creates a tube brace between two bolts, with tees at both ends.
Standard gusset (1065)

Creates a gusset plate and welds it to the beam or column web. Automatically creates a stiffener on each end of the gusset plate.
Profiles
Beam or column: H, W, C This component creates the gusset plate using the dimensions you specify on the Parts tab, not the geometry of the plate.
Parts created
Gusset plate Stiffener plates (2) To create braces and connect them to the gusset plate, use Gusset tube in points (S47) (p. 281), Crushed tube in bolts (S48) (p. 283), or Gusset tube in bolts (S49) (p. 284).
Before you start
Create a beam, and a point on the beam to indicate the position of the gusset plate.
277
Use for
Situation
Description Connection method: Gusset plate welded to the beam web
Defining properties
Picture
Contents Gusset and stiffener plate dimensions, clearance between plate and beam, number of bolts, bolt spacing. Gusset and stiffener plate properties.
See also
Parts
Dimensioning parts (p. 27) Defining materials (p. 30) Omitting stiffener plates (1065) (p. 300)
Parameters General
Position, offset, and rotation of the component. Connection properties, AutoDefaults and AutoConnection rule groups. Bolt properties of the bolts in the gusset plate, option to create single or multiple bolt groups. Information used in structural analysis.
General tab (p. 12)
Bolts
Analysis
Picking order
1. 2.
Beam Pick a point on the beam to indicate the location of the connection
278
Gusset stiffeners (171)

Creates 2 or 3 (default) stiffener plates and welds them to an existing gusset plate and a beam or column. Options to chamfer the gusset plate and stiffeners.
Beam or column: I, C, tube, RHS Stiffener plates The Getting Started (p. 5) chapter introduces the concept of using components to automatically connect parts and create model objects.
Before you start
Create a gusset plate and a beam or column To create a gusset plate, use the Standard gusset (1065) (p. 277) component or the Parts > Contour plate command.
Use for
Situation
Description 3 stiffeners welded to column flange and gusset plate.
Gusset stiffener that is not perpendicular to an I-beam.
279
Gusset stiffener for a pipe or bar. Notice that the stiffener does not have to be located on the centerline of the pipe or bar.
Chamfered gusset stiffener.
Defining properties
Picture
Contents Dimensions that indicate the location of the stiffener plates. Properties and shape of stiffeners, number of stiffeners.
See also
Parts
Dimensioning parts (p. 27) Defining materials (p. 30) Defining the number of stiffeners (171) (p. 300)
Parameters General
Shape and dimensions of stiffener chamfers. Connection properties, AutoDefaults and AutoConnection rule groups. Information used in structural analysis. General tab (p. 12)
Analysis
Picking order
1. 2.
Gusset plate Beam or column
280
Crushed tube in points (S46)

Creates a brace between two points that you pick, using a circular hollow section. Creates bolt groups at each end of the brace. You cannot modify the individual objects that this component creates.
Parts created Before you start
Tube brace Create 2 points. To adjust the rotation of the tees, change the work plane before you create the connection.
Defining properties
Picture Parts
Contents Dimensions that define the location of the bolts. Properties of the tube brace.
See also
Tube pos.
Options that affect the position, plane and class of the tube. Bolt group properties. Defining bolts and welds (p. 30)
&Bolts
Picking order
1. 2. 3.
Start point of the tube End point of the tube Click the middle mouse button to create the component
Gusset tube in points (S47)

Creates a brace between two points that you pick, using a circular hollow section with 2 Tees at each end. Seals tube.
281
You cannot modify the individual objects that this component creates.
Parts created
Tube Tees (4) End plate (2) The Getting Started (p. 5) chapter introduces the concept of using components to automatically connect parts and create model objects.
Before you start
Create two points. To adjust the rotation of the tees, change the work plane before you create the connection.
Defining properties
Picture Parts
Contents Properties of the tube, end plate, and tees
See also Dimensioning parts (p. 27) Defining materials (p. 30)
Tube pos.
Options that affect the position, plane and class of the tube. Bolt group properties. Defining bolts and welds (p. 30)
&Bolts
Picking order
1. 2. 3.
Start point of the tube End point of the tube Click the middle mouse button to create the component
282
Crushed tube in bolts (S48)

Creates a brace using a crushed tube between two existing bolts. You cannot modify the individual objects that this component creates.
Parts created
Tube The Getting Started (p. 5) chapter introduces the concept of using components to automatically connect parts and create model objects.
Create two bolts, either manually or using a detailing component (Standard gusset (1065) (p. 277)). Use the following tabs in the dialog box to define the properties of the parts this component creates: Tab
Picture Parts
Contents Dimensions that define the crushed end of the tube. Properties of the tube.
See also
Parameters
Options that affect the position, plane and class of the tube. Defining bolts and welds (p. 30)
&Bolts
Picking order
1. 2. 3. 4.
Work plane First bolt Second bolt Click the middle mouse button to create the component
283
Gusset tube in bolts (S49)

Creates a brace using a tube between two bolts, with a built-up T profile at both ends. Seals tube. You cannot modify the individual objects that this component creates.
Parts created
Tube Tees (2) End plate The Getting Started (p. 5) chapter introduces the concept of using components to automatically connect parts and create model objects.
Create 2 bolts on the plane where you want to create the brace. Use the following tabs in the dialog box to define the properties of the parts this component creates: Tab
Picture Parts
Contents Dimensions that define the end of the tube and the tees. Properties of the tube, end plate and Tees.
See also
Parameters Bolts&
General connection properties. Properties of bolts.
General tab (p. 12) Defining bolts and welds (p. 30)
Picking order
1. 2. 3.
First bolt Second bolt Click the middle mouse button to create the component
284
6.6 Defining gusset plate properties

This section explains how to define gusset plate properties for various bracing components. It contains the following topics: Modifying gusset plate shape (p. 285) Defining gusset plate type (p. 286) Selecting gusset plate connection material (11) (p. 287) Defining wraparound gusset plates (58, 59, 60) (p. 287) Defining gusset plate location (67) (p. 288) Defining gusset plate position on the brace (p. 289) Defining gusset plate position on the beam or column (11) (p. 289) Defining the bend line in skewed connections (140) (p. 289) Specifying gusset plate connection material (11, 20, 62) (p. 290) Creating an orientation hole in the gusset plate (110) (p. 290) Not all component dialog boxes contain all the properties listed in this section.
Modifying gusset plate shape

To change shape of a gusset plate, you need to change its dimensions. Bracing components automatically create gusset plates based on the dimensions in the joints.def file. To only modify the dimensions of the gusset plate for the connections you have selected, enter the new dimensions on the Picture tab. To modify the dimensions of the gusset plate for all connections that this component creates, edit the dimensions in the joints.def file. Tekla Structures uses values in the joints.def file to create this component.
285
Using the dialog box
To modify the shape of the gusset plate using the dialog box: 1. Go to the Picture tab and enter values in any of the following fields (this image is from Corner bolted gusset (57)):
Enter angles here.
Enter dimensions here.
2.
Click the Apply button to change any connections you have open.
Defining gusset plate type

To define the type of gusset plate to use, go to the Gusset tab. The default option is:
Optimizing plate weight
To optimize plate weight, select this option:
286
Picking order affects brace position
Optional. When you select the option to optimize plate weight, you can also choose to have the picking order affect the position of the braces. The default option is No:
To place the first brace picked closest to the first beam or column picked, select this option:
Selecting gusset plate connection material (11)

To select the connection material to use to connect the gusset plate to the beam or column, go to the Gusset tab. The default option is to weld the gusset plate directly to the beam or column:
There are also options to use clip angles or shear tabs.
Defining wraparound gusset plates (58, 59, 60)

If the gusset plate clashes with the column, Tekla Structures notches the gusset plate to wrap around the column. To specify the angle of the notch, go to the Gusset tab. The default is:
287
Notch chamfer type
To specify the chamfer type to use for the notch, go to the Gusset tab. The options are: Option Description No chamfer. Notch edges parallel to the edges of the gusset plate. Default.
Creates a rounded chamfer calculated as a quarter of a circle. Enter the diameter of the circle as the horizontal dimension of the chamfer. See Defining chamfer dimensions (p. 288). Creates a rounded chamfer calculated as a three-quarters of a circle. Enter the diameter of the circle as the horizontal dimension of the chamfer. See Defining chamfer dimensions (p. 288). The center point of the circle is the corner of the notch. Bevels the corner of the gusset plate.
Does not notch or chamfer the corner of the gusset plate.
Defining chamfer dimensions
To define the size of the notch chamfer, or the diameter of the circle used to calculate rounded chamfers, go to the Gusset tab and enter these dimensions:
Defining gusset plate location (67)

To specify the location of the gusset plate relative to the beam or column web, go to the Gusset tab. The default location is above the beam or column web:
288
Defining gusset plate position on the brace

To indicate where to locate the gusset plate on the brace, go to the Gusset tab. The default option is Middle:
Fine-tuning position
To fine-tune the position of a gusset plate, enter values for the following properties: Property Description Moves the gusset plate in the y direction.
Moves the gusset plate towards the connection.
Defining gusset plate position on the beam or column (11)

To indicate where to locate the gusset plate on the beam or column, go to the Gusset tab. The default option is parallel to the brace:
Defining the bend line in skewed connections (140)

To define the bend line in skewed connections, enter the following dimensions on the Gusset tab.
289
Specifying gusset plate connection material (11, 20, 62)

To specify what type of connection material to use to connect the gusset plate to the beam or column, go to the Gusset tab. The default option is to connect the gusset plate to directly to the flange of the beam or column:
You can also choose to use clip angles or fastener plates in various configurations.
Creating an orientation hole in the gusset plate (110)

You may need to create an orientation hole in the gusset plate to indicate the position of the plate when the connection is assembled in the shop, or during erection. To create an orientation hole in the gusset plate, go to the Gusset tab: The default option is no orientation hole:
To create the hole in the left or right of the gusset plate: Select one of the options in the listbox Enter the dimensions of the hole:
290
6.7 Defining brace connection properties

This section contains the following topics: Defining the brace connection (p. 291) Creating tongue plates (20, 22, 56) (p. 293) Notching the brace (22, 59) (p. 294) Cutting braces (60) (p. 295) Double-bolting braces (110) (p. 295) Creating clip angles or shear tabs (58, 61, 62, 63) (p. 296)
Defining the brace connection

Several component dialog boxes contain a Brace conn tab, where you can specify the options to use to connect the brace to the gusset plate. Some of the options are:
291
Option How many connection plates to use.
Description You can use one or two connection plates to connect the brace to the gusset plate. The default option is 1 plate:
If there are two connection plates, Tekla Structures creates an end plate to the ends of the connection plates.
You can specify the width of the end plate.
Notch the brace or cut the connection plate?
The default option is to notch the brace:
If you choose to cut the plate, you can specify the gap between the brace and the plate:
How to connect the brace to the connection plate.
The default option is to weld the brace:
You can also bolt the brace, or weld it and notch it around the nuts connecting it to the gusset plate:
292
Creating tongue plates (20, 22, 56)

To connect the brace to the gusset plate using a tongue plate and cover plate, go the Brace conn tab. By default, this component does not create a tongue plate:
With the default option, the Tongue plate and Cover plate fields are not available. They are grayed out. Select this option to create a tongue plate:
Notice that the Tongue plate and Cover plate fields are now available (they are not grayed out). Enter the properties of the plates.
Notching brace flange (11, 57)

Some components give you the option to notch the brace flange. You may want to do this: if the gusset plate collides with the brace flange to create slots in hollow braces. See Creating slots in hollow braces (11, 57) (p. 293) to connect hollow braces using clip angles. See Using clip angles to connect braces (11, 57) (p. 295)
To notch the flange or create a slot, go to the Gusset tab. The default option is not to notch:
Creating slots in hollow braces (11, 57)
To create a slot in a hollow brace, go to the Gusset tab: 1. 2. Define the position of the gusset plate as Middle. This is the default option. See Defining gusset plate position on the brace (p. 289). Select this option to create a slot in the brace and fasten the gusset plate to it using a bolt:
293
Notching brace flange (60)

Some components give you the option to notch the brace flange. You may want to do this: if the gusset plate collides with the brace flange to create slots in hollow braces
To notch the flange or create a slot, go to the Brace conn tab. The default option is not to notch:
Creating slots in hollow braces (60)
To create a slot in a hollow brace, go to the Brace conn tab: 1. 2. Define the position of the gusset plate as Middle. This is the default option. See Defining gusset plate position on the brace (p. 289). Select this option to create a slot in the brace and fasten the gusset plate to it using a bolt:
Notching the brace (22, 59)

To define the depth of the notch in the brace, go to the Picture tab: Depth of the notch in the brace
To prevent the connection plate from penetrating the hollow brace, enter a negative value for the depth of the notch.
294
Cutting braces (60)

To indicate whether to cut the braces, go to the Brace conn tab. The default is to cut the braces:
Double-bolting braces (110)

By default braces are bolted to the gusset plate. To also bolt braces to the first or second beam or column picked, go to the Brace conn tab. The options are: Option Description Only bolts braces to the gusset plate.
Bolts the first brace picked to both the gusset plate and the first beam or column picked.
Bolts the first and subsequent braces pickedto both the gusset plate and the first beam or column picked.
Using clip angles to connect braces (11, 57)

To attach the braces to the gusset plate using clip angles: 1. First, create a slot in the brace. To do this, go to the Gusset tab. The default option is:
295
To create a slot in the brace: Define the position of the gusset plate as Middle. See Defining chamfer dimensions (p. 288). Select this option to create the slot and fasten the gusset plate to the brace using a bolt:
2.
Go to the Angle bolts tab. The default option is not to create clip angles:
Creating clip angles or shear tabs (58, 61, 62, 63)

To attach the braces to the gusset plate using clip angles or shear tabs, and specify the number of clip angles to create, go to the Brace conn tab. The default option is to create two clip angles below the brace web:
6.8 Defining minor plate properties

As well as gusset plates, many bracing components create minor plates, including connection, filler, and shim plates. This section explains how to define the properties of some of these minor plates. It contains the following topics: Defining the number of connection plates (58, 61, 62, 63) (p. 297) Defining connection plate width (59) (p. 297) Creating filler plates (58, 61, 62, 63) (p. 297) Defining plate sizes in marketsizes.dat (165, Japan) (p. 299) Creating shim plates (58, 61, 62, 63) (p. 298) Defining plate sizes in marketsizes.dat (165, Japan) (p. 299) Defining rib plate dimensions (165) (p. 299) Creating rib plates (22, Japan) (p. 300) Omitting stiffener plates (1065) (p. 300) Defining the number of stiffeners (171) (p. 300)
296
Defining the number of connection plates (58, 61, 62, 63)

To define the position and number of connection plates to create between the brace web and the gusset plate, go to the Brace conn tab. The default option is one plate:
Defining connection plate width (59)

To define the width of the connection plate go to the Picture tab and indicate the distance from the edge of the brace to the edge of the connection plate: This dimension defines the width of the connection plate.
Creating filler plates (58, 61, 62, 63)

To create a filler plate between the connection plate and the brace web, go to the Brace conn tab. The default option is no filler plate:
To create a filler plate, select this option:
297
Creating filler plates (165)

If required, Heavy brace (165) automatically creates filler plates between the connection plate and the: brace flange brace web
The thickness of the filler plates depends on the gap between the connection plate and the brace flange or web, as follows: Gap (mm) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Flange filler plate thickness No plate 2.3 3.2 4.5 4.5 6.0 6.0 9.0 9.0 9 Web filler plate thickness No plate 1.6 1.6 2.3 2.3 3.2 3.2 4.5 4.5 4.5
Creating shim plates (58, 61, 62, 63)

To create and define shim plates, go to the Brace conn tab. The options are: Clearance. Enter 1mm or more to create shim plates.
Enter number of shim plates to create. Select No to omit shim plates.
298
Defining plate sizes in marketsizes.dat (165, Japan)

In the Japanese environment, Heavy brace gusset (165) takes the default thickness values for several plates from the marketsizes.dat file, located in the ../profil/ folder. This file lists the standard plate thicknesses available in specific material grades. Edit this file using any standard text editor, such as Notepad. Enter a value in the t field on the Parts tab to override the default value for any plate.
Example
In this example, the materialsizes.dat file lists the standard plate thicknesses available in material grade SS400. The DEFAULT line lists the thicknesses available in all other material grades # Market size (thickness) table # Specify the material as given in Tekla Structures material database # and after that the market sizes separated by commas SS400,1.6,2.3,3.2,4.5,6,9,12,16,19,22,25,28,32,38 DEFAULT,6,9,12,16,19,22,25,28,32,38
marketsizes.dat file
Defining rib plate dimensions (165)

Tekla Structures automatically calculates the following dimensions from the length of the rib plate and bolt group properties:
These dimensions are automatically calculated from the length of the rib plate and the bolt group properties.
To define the remaining dimensions, go to the Ribs tab.

299
Omitting stiffener plates (1065)

This component automatically creates stiffener plates at each end of the gusset plate. To omit one or both stiffener plates, go to the Parts tab and delete the values in the Front stiffener or Back stiffener fields.
Defining the number of stiffeners (171)

By default, this component creates 3 stiffeners. To omit a stiffener, go to the Parts tab, and enter 0 for in the t field for that stiffener:
To remove a stiffener, enter 0 in the t field.

Flipping stiffener plates
To flip stiffener plates, go to the Picture tab and set Flip stiffener directions to Yes.
Creating rib plates (22, Japan)

To create this type of connection: Cross plate
Cover plate
Go to the Rib plates tab and enter properties in the Cross plate and Cover plate fields.
300
6.9 Defining bolt and hole properties

This section contains the following topics: Brace bolt properties (11, 57) (p. 301) Defining part thickness (1) (p. 301) Defining hole type (1) (p. 302) Dimensioning holes in drawings (110, 140) (p. 302)
Brace bolt properties (11, 57)

To define the minimum distance from the connection plate bolts to the intersection point of the column and brace centerlines, go to the Bracebolts tabs:
The gap is measured parallel to each brace. If a brace is perpendicular to the column, the gap is measured from the column centerline to the nearest bolts:
Defining part thickness (1)

To define the thickness of the filler plate, washer, and nuts that this component creates, go to the Parts tab and enter the following dimensions: Enter the thickness of the following parts: Filler plate Washer Nut Extra nut
301
Defining hole type (1)

To define the type of hole to create in the beam or column for the rod, go to the Brace conn tab and select one of the options in the Create hole in primary field:
Partcut cuts a hole for the rod Bolt creates a bolt hole Partcut+bolthole cuts a hole for the rod and creates a bolt hole
Dimensioning holes in drawings (110, 140)

If a component creates a gusset plate that is skewed so that the gusset hole is not perpendicular to the gusset plate, hole dimensions in drawings may be wrong. To fix this, go to the Gusset tab and set the Create extra bolt holes to the gusset field to Yes. This creates an extra bolt hole that is perpendicular to the gusset plate.
6.10 Defining other properties

This section contains the following topics: Specifying work point location (58, 59, 60) (p. 302) Defining Tees (105) (p. 303)
Specifying work point location (58, 59, 60)

Tekla Structures uses the work point of a component to calculate check dimensions and part position dimensions in drawings. To change the position of the work point, go to the Picture tab. The default position is the point where the two main parts intersect:
302
Defining Tees (105)

There are several ways to create the tees at the end of the braces: On the Parts tab, specify a T profile to use. On the Parts tab, specify an I profile to use. The component creates the tee by cutting the I profile. You must specify where to cut the I profile, using the Tee depth field on the Parameters tab. To have Tekla Structures use two plates to create the tee, leave the Tee profile field on the Parts tab blank. You must enter t, b, and h dimensions for the tee flange and web. You can define the Tees for each brace separately.
303
304
Tower Components
Introduction
The Tekla Structures component catalog contains a variety of tower components to automatically create: Complete towers, and tower elements such as legs and bracing Brace to tower leg connections Brace to brace connections
It also includes several editing tools to modify tower bracing. To open the Component catalog, use the keyboard shortcut Crtl + F, or click the Search component icon on the component toolbar
Contents
The Tower components chapter contains the following topics: Tower elements (p. 306) Brace to tower leg connections (p. 313) Brace to brace connections (p. 320) Editing tools (p. 327)
See also
For general information about components and how to use them, see Basics (p. 5) and Using components (p. 22). Component catalog (p. 15) Custom Components (p. 549)
TEKLA STRUCTURES - DETAILING MANUAL Tower Components
305
7.1 Tower elements

Tekla Structures includes the following components that you can use to automatically create a complete tower, or structural elements, such as tower legs or bracing: Component Tower generation (S43) (p. 306) Icon Description Creates a complete tower.
Tower member (S63) (p. 308)
Creates tower legs.
Transmission tower cross arm (S65) (p. 310)
Creates cross arms using bent, angle-profile cleats.
Tower diagonal (S66) (p. 311)
Creates bracing panels.
Tower generation (S43)

Creates a complete tower, with a square or rectangular base.
Profiles
Tower legs: L Bracing: L, flat, U, twin
Parts created
Tower legs (4) Bracing panels (you define the quantity)
306
Use for
Situation
Description
Before you start
Check the current work plane, as it affects the position of the tower. For more information, read Position of the tower (S43, S63) (p. 332)
307
Defining properties
Use the following tabs in the component dialog box to define the properties of the parts this component creates: Tab
Picture
Contents Quantity of bracing panels, dimensions that define the location of cross braces on the tower legs. Part properties, profiles for legs and bracing.
See also Defining bracing panels (S43, S66) (p. 340)
Parts
Leg Parameters Tower Parameters
Quantity of profiles in each leg, lift length, option to tile profiles Options that define the type of bracing to create, class numbers of bracing. Options to use twin profiles for bracing.
Defining tower legs (S63) (p. 336) Defining bracing panels (S43, S66) (p. 340)
Twin Profiles Model Points
Creating construction points (S43, S66) (p. 333) Components that connect braces to tower legs. Defining bracing connections (S43, S66) (p. 340)
Joints
Picking order
Pick a point to indicate the position of the tower leg at the bottom left corner of the base of the tower.
Tower member (S63)

Creates the 4 legs of a tower, using angle profiles. The legs form a square or rectangular base.
Parts created
Legs (4) The Getting Started (p. 5) chapter introduces the concept of using components to automatically connect parts and create model objects.
308
Use for
Situation
Description
Check the current work plane, as it affects the position of the tower. For more information, read Position of the tower (S43, S63) (p. 332) Use the following tabs in the component dialog box to define the properties of the parts this component creates: Tab
Picture
Contents Properties of angle profiles, quantity of profiles in each leg, lift length, option to tile profiles. Gaps between angle profiles
See also Defining tower legs (S63) (p. 336) Creating sloping legs (S63) (p. 338) Pattern of angle profiles (S63) (p. 338)
Parts Parameters
Picking order
Pick a point to indicate the lower left corner of the tower.
309
Transmission tower cross arm (S65)

Creates cross arms using bent, angle-profile cleats.
Parts created
Bent, angle-profile cleats The Getting Started (p. 5) chapter introduces the concept of using components to automatically connect parts and create model objects.
Use for
Situation
Description
Twin-profile cross arms. Create 5 points. The 5th point must be in the center of the pattern, vertically:
310
Defining properties
Picture
Contents Dimensions that define the shape and size of the upper and lower cross arms. Part properties of the cross arms.
See also
Parts
Parameters
Layout of profiles
Layout of profiles (S65) (p. 339)
Picking order
The picking order depends on the location of the 5th point:
Tower diagonal (S66)

Creates bracing panels between 2 or 4 existing columns.
Bracing: L, flat, U, twin Horizontal braces Diagonal braces The Getting Started (p. 5) chapter introduces the concept of using components to automatically connect parts and create model objects.
311
Use for
Situation
Description
Create 2 or 4 tower legs. Use the following tabs in the component dialog box to define the properties of the parts this component creates: Tab
Picture
Contents Dimensions that define the location of diagonal braces, quantity of bracing panels. Part properties of the horizontal and diagonal braces.
See also Defining bracing panels (S43, S66) (p. 340) Dimensioning parts (p. 27) Defining materials (p. 30)
Parts
Parameters Twin Profiles Model Points
Options that define the type of bracing to create. Option to create twin-profile braces, position of twin profiles. Option to create construction points, construction point properties. Components to use to connect braces to tower legs.
Defining bracing panels (S43, S66) (p. 340)
Creating construction points (S43, S66) (p. 333) Defining bracing connections (S43, S66) (p. 340)
Joints
312
Picking order
1.
Pick the tower legs clockwise, starting with the top left leg:
2.
Click the middle mouse button to create the component
7.2 Brace to tower leg connections

Tekla Structures includes the following components to connect one or more braces to tower legs: Component Tower 1 diagonal (87) (p. 314) Tower 2 diagonal (89) (p. 315) Leg - 2 & 3 diagonals (177) (p. 317) Icon Description Bolts 1 diagonal brace to a tower leg. Bolts 2 diagonal braces to a tower leg. Bolts 2 diagonal braces and 1 horizontal brace (optional) to a tower leg. No gusset plate.
Leg - 1 diagonal (178) (p. 319)
Bolts 1 diagonal brace directly to the outside or inside face of a tower leg. No gusset plate.
313
Tower 1 diagonal (87)

Bolts 1 diagonal brace to a tower leg.
Brace and tower leg: L The Getting Started (p. 5) chapter introduces the concept of using components to automatically connect parts and create model objects.
Use for
Situation
More information
Before you start
Create a tower leg and a brace.
314
Defining properties
Picture
Contents Option to create bolts, Location of bolts.
See also About bolt gage lines (p. 344) Creating bolts (89) (p. 348)
Parts Bolts General
Option to cut vertical leg of brace, dimensions of cut. Bolt properties Connection properties, AutoDefaults and AutoConnection rule groups. Option to cut horizontal leg of brace, dimensions of cut. Information used in structural analysis
Cutting braces (87, 89) (p. 341) Defining bolts and welds (p. 30) General tab (p. 12)
Extra cuts Check Analysis
Picking order
1. 2.
Tower leg Brace
Tower 2 diagonal (89)

Bolts 2 diagonal braces to a tower leg.
Parts created
315
Use for
Situation
More information
Braces that clash. Create a tower leg and 2 diagonal braces.
316
Defining properties
Use the following tabs in the component dialog box to define the properties of this component: Tab
Picture
Contents Bolt gages that define the location of bolts that connect all parts. Bolt gages that define the location of bolts in the bolt groups that connect: 1st brace to the tower leg 2nd brace to the tower leg
See also About bolt gage lines (p. 344) Creating bolts (89) (p. 348)
Picture2
Parts
Dimensions that define the cuts in the vertical legs of the diagonal braces. Connection properties, AutoDefaults and AutoConnection rule groups. Dimensions that define the cuts in the horizontal leg of the first brace picked. Dimensions that define the cuts in the horizontal leg of the second brace picked. Bolt properties.
Cutting braces (87, 89) (p. 341) General tab (p. 12)
General
Cuts d.1
Cutting braces (87, 89) (p. 341)
Cuts d.2
Bolts Check Analysis
Defining bolts and welds (p. 30) Analysis properties of components
Picking order
1. 2. 3. 4.
Tower leg First brace Second brace Click the middle mouse button to create the component
Leg - 2 & 3 diagonals (177)

Bolts 2 diagonal braces and 1 horizontal brace (optional) to a tower leg. Does not create a gusset plate.
Profiles
Tower leg and braces: L

317
Parts created
Filler plates (optional) The Getting Started (p. 5) chapter introduces the concept of using components to automatically connect parts and create model objects.
Use for
Situation
More information
Before you start
Create the following parts Tower leg 1 diagonal brace to the outside of the tower leg 1 diagonal brace to the inside of the tower leg 1 horizontal brace (optional)
318
Defining properties
Picture
Contents Edge distances, dimensions that define the cut in the diagonal brace on the inside of the tower leg and the horizontal brace. Edge distances that define the location of bolt groups. Bolt properties, dimensions that define the location of bolts, and bolt pattern of bolt groups. Connection properties, AutoDefaults and AutoConnection rule groups. Option to create filler plates, filler plate properties. Option to use UDL with AutoDefaults, reaction forces. Information used in structural analysis
See also
Parameters Bolts
General
Plates Design Analysis
Defining filler plates (177) (p. 351) Reaction forces and UDL Analysis properties of components
Picking order
1. 2. 3. 4. 5.
Tower leg Diagonal brace on the inside of the tower leg Diagonal brace on the outside of the tower leg Horizontal brace (optional) Click the middle mouse button to create the component
Leg - 1 diagonal (178)

Bolts 1 diagonal brace directly to the outside or inside face of a tower leg.
Brace and tower leg: L The Getting Started (p. 5) chapter introduces the concept of using components to automatically connect parts and create model objects.
319
Use for
Situation
More information
Create a tower leg and a diagonal brace. Use the following tabs in the component dialog box to define the properties of the parts this component creates: Tab
Picture Parameters Bolts General
Contents Dimensions that define how the brace is cut. Bolt gage lines that define the positions of bolts. Quantity of bolts, bolt properties. Connection properties, AutoDefaults and AutoConnection rule groups. Option to use UDL with AutoDefaults, reaction forces. Information used in structural analysis
See also
About bolt gage lines (p. 344) Defining bolts and welds (p. 30) General tab (p. 12)
Design Analysis
Reaction forces and UDL Analysis properties of components
Picking order
1. 2.
Tower leg Diagonal brace
7.3 Brace to brace connections

Component Bolted gusset brace (167) (p. 321) Icon Description Bolts 2 diagonal braces to 2 horizontal braces, using a gusset plate.
320
Bolted bridge brace (169) (p. 322) Bolted Brace (181) (p. 324) Bolted Plate Brace (182) (p. 326)
Bolts 2 horizontal braces and 1 diagonal brace to a bridge plate or angle profile. Bolts 1 diagonal brace to 1 or 2 horizontal braces. Bolts 1 diagonal brace to 1 or 2 horizontal braces, using a plate.
Bolted gusset brace (167)

Bolts 2 diagonal braces to 2 horizontal braces, using a gusset plate.
Parts created
Gusset plate The Getting Started (p. 5) chapter introduces the concept of using components to automatically connect parts and create model objects.
Use for
Situation
Description Rectangular gusset plate.
Braces connect to different faces of chamfered gusset plate.
Before you start
Create 2 diagonal braces and 2 horizontal braces.
321
Defining properties
Picture Parts
Contents Dimensions that define bolt locations. Properties of gusset plate.
See also About bolt gage lines (p. 344) Dimensioning parts (p. 27) Defining materials (p. 30)
Parameters
Properties of bolts in horizontal braces, option to chamfer gusset plate. Connection properties, AutoDefaults and AutoConnection rule groups. Information used in structural analysis General tab (p. 12)
General
Analysis
Picking order
1. 2. 3. 4. 5.
First diagonal brace Second diagonal brace First horizontal brace Second horizontal brace Click the middle mouse button to create the component
Bolted bridge brace (169)

Bolts 2 horizontal braces and 1 diagonal brace to a bridge plate or angle profile. Cuts the diagonal brace.
Parts created
Bridge plate or angle profile The Getting Started (p. 5) chapter introduces the concept of using components to automatically connect parts and create model objects.
322
Use for
Situation
More information
Twin-profile diagonal braces
Angle profile used as a bridge
Do not use for
Braces on different planes, or braces that clash.

Bolted bridge brace (69) does not cut the horizontal braces.
Before you start
Create 2 horizontal braces and 1 diagonal brace (single or twin profile).
323
Defining properties
Use the following tabs in the component dialog box to define the properties of the component: Tab
Picture
Contents Dimensions that define bolt locations and the clearance between the bridge and horizontal braces. Part properties of the bridge.
See also
Parts
Parameters
Properties of bolts in horizontal braces, bridge cut options.
Picking order
1. 2. 3. 4. 5.
First horizontal brace Second horizontal brace Diagonal brace If the diagonal brace is a twin profile, pick the second profile Click the middle mouse button to create the component 2 1
Bolted Brace (181)

Bolts 1 diagonal brace to 1 or 2 horizontal braces.
Parts created
324
Use for
Situation
More information
Braces that are not in the same plane. Create 1 diagonal brace and 1 or 2 horizontal braces. The braces can be built-up beams. Use the following tabs in the component dialog box to define the properties of this component: Tab
Picture
Contents Dimensions that define the position of bolts. Clearance between braces. Bolt and cut options for horizontal braces.
See also Defining bolt gage lines (87) (p. 346) Cutting braces (181, 182) (p. 342)
Parameters
Picking order
1. 2. 3.
First horizontal brace Diagonal brace Second horizontal brace (optional)
325
1 3
Bolted Plate Brace (182)

Bolts 1 diagonal brace to 1 or 2 horizontal braces, using a plate. Connects the diagonal brace to the inside or outside face of the horizontal brace.
Parts created
Plate Filler plate(s) The Getting Started (p. 5) chapter introduces the concept of using components to automatically connect parts and create model objects.
Use for
Situation
More information
Braces that are not in the same plane. Create 1 diagonal brace, and 1 or 2 horizontal braces.
326
Defining properties
Picture
Contents Dimensions that define the location of bolts, clearance between horizontal braces. The properties of the plate and optional filler plate.
See also About bolt gage lines (p. 344) Cutting braces (181, 182) (p. 342) Dimensioning parts (p. 27) Defining materials (p. 30)
Parts
Parameters
Shape of cut in braces, bolt options, plate options.
Defining filler plates (182) (p. 352) Creating bolts (182) (p. 349)
Picking order
1. 2. 3. 4.
Horizontal brace to which to bolt the diagonal brace Diagonal brace Second horizontal brace (optional) Click the middle mouse button to create the component 2 1
7.4 Editing tools

Use the following components to modify tower bracing: Component Open/Close angle ends (1050) (p. 328) Icon Description Simulates the opening or closing of one end of an angle profile.
327
Open/Close angle (1051) (p. 330) Autoposition (S67) (p. 331)
Simulates the opening or closing of an inner portion of an angle profile. Adjusts the position of braces connected to a tower leg. Cuts braces.
Open/Close angle ends (1050)

Simulates the opening or closing of one end of an angle profile by cutting and bending the profile. Use this component to create detail drawings that indicate where to open or close angle profiles used in tower bracing. In the shop, the angle profile is machined, not cut.
Parts created
328
Use for
Situation
More information
To open or close the inner portion of an angle profile, use Open/Close angle (1051) (p. 330). Create an angle profile Create a point to locate the component Set the work plane parallel to the outer face of the leg of the angle profile that you want to bend:
Set the work plane parallel to the outer face of the leg of the angle profile.
329
Defining properties
Use the following tab in the Open/Close angle ends (1050) dialog box to define the properties of the component: Tab
Parameters
Contents Which leg to open or close, location of cut, bend angle.
More information Adjusting length of leg to open or close (1050, 1051) (p. 334)
Picking order
1. 2.
Angle profile A point on the angle profile
Open/Close angle (1051)

Simulates the opening or closing of an inner portion of an angle profile by cutting and bending the profile. Use this component to create detail drawings that indicate where to open or close angle profiles used in tower bracing. In the shop, the angle profile is machined, not cut.
Parts created
Use for
Situation
More information
330
To open or close one end of an angle profile, use Open/Close angle ends (1050) (p. 328). Create a point to locate the component Set the work plane parallel to the outer face of the leg of the angle profile that you want to bend:
Set the work plane parallel to the outer face of the leg of the angle profile.
Defining properties
Use the following tabs in the component dialog box to define the properties of the component: Tab
Parameters
Contents
More information
Which leg to open or close, loca- Adjusting length of leg tion of cut, bend angle. to open or close (1050, 1051) (p. 334)
Picking order
1. 2.
Angle profile A point on the angle profile
Autoposition (S67)
Adjusts the position of 1 or 2 braces connected to a tower leg. Cuts braces. Use Autoposition (S67) when you have completed all other work on a model. Changing the model may override the adjustments you make using this component.
Parts created Before you start
Create 1 or 2 braces and connect them to a tower leg.
331
Defining properties
Use the following tab in the component dialog box to adjust the braces and create cuts: Tab
Picture
Contents
See also Moving and cutting braces (S67) (p. 343)
Picking order
1. 2. 3. 4.
Tower leg First brace Second brace (optional) Click the middle mouse button
7.5 Defining general properties

This section contains the following topics: Position of the tower (S43, S63) (p. 332) Creating construction points (S43, S66) (p. 333) Adjusting length of leg to open or close (1050, 1051) (p. 334)
Position of the tower (S43, S63)

Tekla Structures creates the tower along the z axis of the current work plane. If the tower has a rectangular base, the longest side of the base runs parallel to the x axis:
332
Base of tower Top of tower
Tekla Structures creates the tower along the z axis

See also
Defining the work area and shifting the work plane in the Modeling manual.
Creating construction points (S43, S66)

Construction points are points that you can pick to attach components to parts. For example, you might create construction points on tower legs to use to connect bracing to the legs. To create construction points on tower legs or braces, go to the Model Points tab. For each type of brace: Select the location of the points. For example, select Before to create points on the outer face of a brace; Enter the distance between the points, followed by the quantity of points. For example, enter 400*4 to create 4 points, 400mm apart. Select the location of the points
Enter the distance between points and the quantity of points

See also
Specifying points in the Modeling manual.
333
Adjusting length of leg to open or close (1050, 1051)

To adjust the length of leg to open or close, go to the Parameters tab and enter one of the following dimensions: Field
External length of the portion to be opened/closed Internal length of the portion to be opened/closed
Description Measured from the point you pick to create the component towards the start of the part reference line Measured from the point you pick to create the component towards the end of the part reference line
7.6 Defining tower leg properties

This section explains how to define the properties of tower legs. It contains the following topics: Defining tower legs (S43) (p. 334) Defining tower legs (S63) (p. 336) Layout of profiles (S65) (p. 339)
Defining tower legs (S43)

Tower legs are constructed using angle profiles.
334
Creating sloping legs (S43)

To define the slope of the tower legs, go to the Leg Parameters tab and enter the x and y dimensions of the base and top of the tower:
Base y
Top y
Top x
Base x
Type and quantity of angle profiles (S43)

To specify the angle profiles to use for the tower legs: 1. 2. Go to the Parts tab and enter the profiles you want to use in the Profile 1, Profile 2, etc. fields. You can specify up to 8 profile types. Go to the Profiles to be used field on the Leg Parameters tab and enter the quantity of each profile type to use for the legs:
335
Go to the Parts tab to define the profiles to use for the legs.
Go to the Profiles to be used field on the Leg Parameters tab. Here we are using 6 lifts of Profile 1 to create the tower leg.
Defining tower legs (S63)

Tower legs are constructed using angle profiles.
Type and quantity of angle profiles (S63)

To define the type and quantity of angle profiles to use:
336
1. 2.
Go to the Picture tab. Use fields 1 to 8 to define the angle profiles you want to use. In the Profiles for part field, enter the quantity of each profile type to use for each leg. For example, enter 6*1 to create tower legs each made up of 6 lifts with the profile type you defined in field 1. On the illustration, enter the quantity and length of the lifts that make up each leg: Enter 6*6000 to create tower legs using 6 lifts, each 6000 long.
3.
4.
To tile specific leg lifts, enter the numbers of the lifts to tile in the Parts to be tiled field, counting from the bottom of the leg. For example, enter 3 5 to tile lifts 3 and 5.
337
Creating sloping legs (S63)

To create sloping tower legs, go to the illustration on the Parts tab and enter the x and y dimensions of the base and top sections of the tower:
Dimensions of top of tower
Dimensions of base of tower
Pattern of angle profiles (S63)

To define the quantity of angle profiles that form each leg, in cross section, use the graphic option on the Parts tab. The default option is one angle profile:
338
Splicing legs (S63)

To enable the erector to splice tower legs, go to the Parameters tab and set the cut back distance between the angle profiles:
Layout of profiles (S65)

The options are: Option
Inside
Layout
Outside
339
7.7 Defining tower bracing properties

This section explains how to define the properties of tower bracing. It contains the following topics: Defining bracing panels (S43, S66) (p. 340) Defining bracing connections (S43, S66) (p. 340) Cutting braces (87, 89) (p. 341) Cutting braces (177) (p. 342) Cutting braces (181, 182) (p. 342) Moving and cutting braces (S67) (p. 343)
Defining bracing panels (S43, S66)

To define the quantity of bracing panels to create between each pair of tower legs, enter a number in the Number of Diagonals field on the Picture tab. To define the layout of the bracing panels, go to the Tower Parameters tab and select an option in the Type of Diagonal dropdown list. The default layout is cross bracing:
You can also create diagonal bracing, in various layouts.
Defining bracing connections (S43, S66)

To specify the components to use to connect braces to the tower legs, go to the Joints tab. You can use different components to connect the left and right diagonal braces, and the horizontal braces. You cannot use custom components to connect the braces to the tower legs.
To define each connection, on the Joints tab: Select a component from the dropdown list, or To select a component that is not on the dropdown list,, select Custom and enter the component number.
You can also use a predefined set of properties for the component:
340
Enter the number of the component to use. Here we are using Fitting (13)
Indicate the predefined set of properties to use.
Cutting braces (87, 89)

To define the cuts in the legs of the braces, go to: Horizontal legs: Parts tab Vertical legs: Extra cuts tab (87), Cuts d.1 and Cuts d.2 tab (89)
These tab pages contain options to cut the legs of the braces, and the dimensions of the cut. This is how they appear on the Parts tab: Incremental value for the angle of the cut. If you enter 2, the actual angle can be 2, 4, 8, etc.
Cut dimensions
Clearance to heel of tower leg Cut options
341
Use the Always cut option to cut the braces and create the clearance to the heel of the tower leg. This option overrides the bolt edge distances on the Picture tab.
Cutting braces (177)

Leg - 2 & 3 diagonals (177) automatically cuts the braces according to the bolt edge distances specified for each brace on the Picture tab.
Cutting braces (181, 182)

Tekla Structures automatically: Miters the end of the horizontal brace, or braces and Cuts the end of the diagonal brace, according to the bolt edge distance.
To specify these dimensions, go to the Picture tab: Clearance between horizontal braces
Bolt edge distance To define the shape of the cut, use the following fields:
Switch for shape of horiz. braces cut on the Parameters tab (181). Switch to manage brace cut shape on the Parameters tab (182).
342
Moving and cutting braces (S67)

To move the ends of braces: Define the bolt gage lines for the braces Define the bolt gage line for the tower leg
Indicate which brace (s) to move Enter the distance to move the point(s) where the gage lines intersect
To cut the braces: Enter the distance from the end of the brace(s) to the edge of the tower leg
Select Yes to cut the brace(s)
To move bolt groups Enter the distance from the first bolt in the group to the end of the brace
343
7.8 Defining bolt properties

This section explains how to define the properties of bolts in tower components. It contains the following topics:
See also
About bolt gage lines (p. 344) Editing default gage lines (p. 347) Creating bolts (87) (p. 347) Creating bolts (89) (p. 348) Creating bolts (178) (p. 348) Creating bolts (181) (p. 349) Creating bolts (182) (p. 349) Bolt location (87, 89) (p. 349)
About bolt gage lines

Several components use gage lines that you can use to: Define the location of bolts on a brace Adjust the position of individual bolts Remove bolts
For example, Leg 1 - diagonal (178) uses gage lines. Gage lines specify several dimensions:
344
Distance between bolts, horizontally
Distance from the center of the bolt to the edge of the brace
Distance between bolts, vertically
To use a default set of gage lines: Ensure that the gauge_lines.dat file is in the profile folder of the environment your are using, Leave all the fields blank on the Parameters tab. To learn how to change the default gage lines, see Editing default gage lines (p. 347).
See also
Bolt location (87, 89) (p. 349)
345
Defining bolt gage lines (87)

To define bolt gage lines for Tower 1 diagonal (87) , go to the Picture tab and enter the following dimensions: Location of gage lines Bolt edge distance
To learn how to create bolts, see Bolt location (87, 89) (p. 349).
Defining bolt gage lines (89)

To define bolt gage lines for each bolt group in Tower 2 diagonal (89), go to the following tab pages: Bolt group Connects all parts Connects first and second brace picked to the tower leg Tab
Picture Picture 2
346
For example, on the Picture tab, enter the following dimensions: Location of gage lines Gage line 1(second brace picked) Bolt edge distances
Gage line 1 (first brace picked) To learn how to create bolts, see Bolt location (87, 89) (p. 349).
Editing default gage lines

To change the default gage lines for all components that use them, edit the file gauge_lines. dat, with any text editor (e.g. Notepad). The file is located in the system folder.
Creating bolts (87)

This component creates a single bolt group that connects the brace to the tower leg. To create bolts, you need to: Define the bolt gage lines and edge distances. See About bolt gage lines (p. 344) Create bolts, and specify the location of individual bolts. See Bolt location (87, 89) (p. 349)
347
This component does not create any bolts by default. So you must define the bolts to use.
Creating bolts (89)

This component creates several bolt groups:
Bolt group that connects all parts
Bolt group that connects the first brace picked to the tower leg
Bolt group that connects the second brace picked to the tower leg. (component 89 only). Tower leg. For each bolt group, you need to: Define the bolt gage lines and edge distances. See About bolt gage lines (p. 344) Create bolts, and specify the location of individual bolts. See Bolt location (87, 89) (p. 349) This component does not create any bolts by default. So you must define the bolts to use.
Creating bolts (178)

To create bolts, go to the Parameters tab and define the bolt gage lines. See Defining bolt gage lines (87) (p. 346). This component does not create any bolts by default, so you must define the bolts to use.
348

By default, this component creates one bolt at the intersection of the main bolt gages of the horizontal brace and the diagonal brace. To create a second bolt: 1. 2. Go to the Picture tab and define the main and secondary bolt gages for the braces: Go to the Parameters tab. Select one of the options in the Switch for common bolt dropdown list. The default option is None.

By default, Tekla Structures creates the following bolts: One bolt where the main bolt gages of the braces intersect, which connects all the braces to the plate. To create a second bolt, go to the Parameters tab. Select one of the options in the Switch for common bolt dropdown list. The default option is None. A bolt on the main bolt gage line of each brace, which connects the brace to the plate.
Bolt location (87, 89)

Use the fields at the bottom of the Picture tab pages to create bolts in each bolt group, use the fields at the bottom of the Picture tab page(s): Bolt group Connects all parts Connects first and second brace picked to the tower leg Tab
Picture Picture 2
Enter 0 to create a bolt on the intersection of gage lines Enter 1 or more to move the bolt along the gage line, away from the end of the brace, on either the first or second diagonal brace picked:
349
First brace picked
Second brace picked (component 89 only)
Creates bolt at intersection of gage lines
Moves bolt 30mm along the gage line, away from the end of the brace
To move a bolt towards the edge of the brace, enter a negative number, e.g. -10.
7.9 Defining connection material

This section explains how to define the properties of connection material in tower components. It contains the following topics: Defining filler plates (177) (p. 351) Defining filler plates (182) (p. 352)
350
Defining filler plates (177)

If necessary, Leg - 2 & 3 diagonals (177) automatically creates filler plates in the gaps between the braces and the tower leg. Plate 1: Between the first Plate 2: Between the second diagonal brace picked diagonal brace picked and the horizontal brace and the tower leg Horizontal brace First diagonal brace picked Second diagonal brace picked Tower leg Plate 3: Between the hori- Plate 4: Between the first zontal brace and the tower horizontal brace picked and the tower leg leg
To specify the properties of each filler plate, use the fields on the Plates tab. To remove a filler plate, go to the illustration and clear the checkbox against it: To remove a plate, clear its checkbox. Here we are removing plates 1 and 2.
351
Defining filler plates (182)

If the diagonal brace connects to the inside of the horizontal brace, Tekla Structures creates one or more filler plates to fill the gap between the diagonal brace and the plate: Diagonal brace
Filler plate
Plate
To replace the filler plate with a ring or square washer, go to the Parameters tab and select an option in the Switch to manage what kind of filler plate list box.
352
Automated Reinforcement Layout

This chapter explains how to create reinforcement using the automated tools available in Tekla Structures. This chapter is aimed at concrete detailers and designers. This chapter contains the following topics: Automated reinforcement layout tools (p. 353) Double-tee beam (51) (p. 355) Inverted-tee beam (52) (p. 363) Ledge beam (53) (p. 378) Rectangular beam (54) (p. 393) Ledge spandrel (55) (p. 406) Rectangular spandrel (56) (p. 418) Columns (57) (p. 429) Topping (58) (p. 440) Wash (59) (p. 443) Hollowcore beam (60) (p. 446) Post-tensioning (61) (p. 450) Edge and corner reinforcement (62) (p. 453) U Bar of concrete slab (63) (p. 454)
Introduction Audience Topics
8.1 Automated reinforcement layout tools

Tekla Structures includes the following components that you can use to automatically create reinforcement layouts for double-tees, beams, and columns:
TEKLA STRUCTURES - DETAILING MANUAL Automated Reinforcement Layout
353
Component Double-tee beam (51) (p. 355) Inverted-tee beam (52) (p. 363) Ledge beam (53) (p. 378) Rectangular beam (54) (p. 393) Ledge spandrel (55) (p. 406) Rectangular spandrel (56) (p. 418) Columns (57) (p. 429) Hollowcore beam (60) (p. 446) Post-tensioning (61) (p. 450) Edge and corner reinforcement (62) (p. 453) U Bar of concrete slab (63) (p. 454)
Icon
Description Creates reinforcement in double-tee beams. Creates reinforcement in inverted-tee beams. Creates reinforcement in ledge beams. Creates reinforcement in rectangular beams. Creates reinforcement in ledge spandrels. Creates reinforcement in rectangular spandrels. Creates reinforcement in columns. Creates hollow core reinforcement. Creates post-tensioning profiles. Creates edge and corner reinforcement for concrete slabs. Creates U bar reinforcement for concrete slabs.
354
8.2 Double-tee beam (51)

Creates typical flexural, shear, and flange reinforcement for a double-tee beam.
Reinforcement created
Prestress straight or depressed strands for flexural reinforcement in doubletee stems Mild longitudinal bars for flexural reinforcement in double-tee stems Mesh for shear reinforcement in double-tee stems Stirrups in double-tee stems Reinforcement mesh in the double-tee flange Transverse and longitudinal mild reinforcing bar in the ends and sides of the double-tee flange Reinforcement around openings and notches in the double-tee flange
Use for
Situation Straight and depressed prestress strands Varying strand pattern and strand number To define longitudinal reinforcement in the stems When you want reinforcement mesh in the stems When you want stirrups in the stems To use reinforcement mesh in the flange To create reinforcement for openings and notches in the flange
More information
355
Before you start
Create the concrete double-tee beam. Calculate the required area and quantity of strands and other reinforcement. Define other reinforcement properties, such as debonding and pull values.
Defining properties
Use the following tabs in the Double-tee beam automated reinforcement layout (51) dialog box to define the properties of the objects that this component creates: Tab
Strand Template
Contents The allowable grid points for strands within the stem cross section. The actual strand definitions. The vertical profile for strands in the stem. Definitions for additional mild steel reinforcement in the beam stems. Reinforcement may be defined with a variety of parametric forms. Definitions for the mesh to be used in each beam stem. Mesh can run the full length of the beam, or be placed in short sections at either end of the beam. Mesh size, spacing, clearances, and length are all entered here. Definitions for the bent bar reinforcement in each stem, including stirrup shape, bar size, end clearance, number of bars, and bar spacing in five zones along the length of the beam.
See also Strand template (p. 357) Strand pattern (p. 359) Strand profile (p. 359) Basic reinforcement properties (p. 117)
Strand Pattern Strand Profile Longitudinal Bars
Stem Mesh
Stem Stirrups
Stem stirrups (p. 360)
356
Tab
Flange
Contents Definitions for the mesh and mild steel transverse and longitudinal reinforcement to be used in the top flange of the beam, including bar size, clearances, and spacing. Mesh can run the full length of the flange, or be placed in short sections at either end. Definitions for supplemental reinforcement to be added around any openings and notches in the flange of the beam. Name, class, and numbering properties of the strands, stirrups, and mesh bars.
Notches and openings
Notch/opening (p. 361)
Attributes
Strand template
You can specify the number and arrangement of vertical strand planes in each stem, along with the vertical distances between grid points in each plane. Strands are defined by their row and column number within the grid, but the template allows for a mixture of regular and irregular grid points with respect to the vertical axis.
357
Use the following options to define the strand pattern: Option Description
Single
Double
Double staggered
Triple
Triple staggered
Use the field Grid spacing along Y to define a list of distances between successive grid points. For regularly spaced points, you may use a multiplier value, for example, 4*6.
358
Strand pattern
You place strands in the stem by defining the grid points from the strand template for each end of the strand element. You also define size, and other reinforcement properties for the strands here. A row of data on this tab can be thought of as a group. All the strands defined in one group share the same properties and start and stop rows. A group may also refer to a list of columns in the strand template, letting you use one group definition to create a set of strands.
Strand profile
Strands may be straight (though not necessarily horizontal), or depressed, using one or two control points. Note that all strands in each stem will use the same general profile. Use the following options to define the strand profile: Option Description
Straight
1-pt depressed
359
Option
Description
2-pt depressed variable
2-pt depressed fixed
You specify the depress positions A and B as either a fixed distance or as a percentage of the member length.
Stem stirrups
Use the following options to define the stem stirrups: Option Description
No stirrup
360
Option
Description
Open U with legs
180-degree closed stirrups
Notch/opening
Use the following options to define the notches and openings: Situation
Corner notch
Diagonal
Square
361
Situation
Side/end notch
Diagonal
Square
Opening
362
8.3 Inverted-tee beam (52)

Creates typical flexural, shear, and ledge reinforcement for an inverted-tee beam.
Prestress straight or depressed strands for flexural reinforcement in the inverted tee stem Mild longitudinal bars for flexural reinforcement Mesh for shear reinforcement in the beam stem Stirrups for shear reinforcement in the beam stem Reinforcement mesh in the inverted-tee ledges Stirrups for shear reinforcement in the inverted-tee ledges Mild reinforcement in the top of the beam that will be used later to create a composite member Mild reinforcement in the ends of the beam
363
Use for
Situation Straight and depressed prestress strands Varying strand pattern and strand number To define longitudinal reinforcement in the stem When you want reinforcement mesh in the stem When you want stirrups in the beam stem To use reinforcement mesh in the beam ledges To use stirrups in the beam ledges To define reinforcement for composite members To add mild reinforcement to the beam ends
Before you start
More information
Create the concrete inverted-tee beam. Calculate the required area and quantity of strands and other reinforcement. Define other reinforcement properties, such as debonding and pull values.
Defining properties
Use the following tabs in the Inverted-tee beam automated reinforcement layout (52) dialog box to define the properties of the objects that this component creates: Tab
Strand template
Contents The allowable grid points for strands within the beam cross section. The actual strand definitions. The vertical profile for strands in the beam. Definitions for additional mild steel reinforcement in the beam. Reinforcement may be defined with a variety of parametric forms. Definition for the mesh to be used in the beam stem. Mesh can run the full length of the beam, or be placed in short sections at either end of the beam. Mesh size, spacing, clearances, and length are all entered here.
Strand pattern Strand profile Longitudinal rebar
Stem mesh
364
Tab
Stem stirrups
Contents Definitions for the bent bar reinforcement in the beam stem, including stirrup shape, bar size, end clearance, number of bars, and bar spacing in five zones along the length of the beam. Definition for the mesh to be used to reinforce the beam ledges. Mesh runs the full length of the beam. Mesh size, spacing, and clearances are all entered here. Definitions for the bent bar reinforcement in the beam ledges, including stirrup shape, bar size, end clearance, number of bars, and bar spacing in five zones along the length of the beam. Definitions for the bent bar reinforcement added to the top of the beam stem for subsequent creation of composite elements. Bar size, embedment, projection, cover, end clearance, number of bars, and bar spacing in three zones along the length of the beam are all defined here. Definitions for the bent bar reinforcement in the beam ends, including position, orientation, bar size and length, cover, and end clearance. Up to 6 horizontal and 6 vertical bars may be defined. Name, class, and numbering properties of the strands, stirrups, and mesh bars.
See also Stem stirrups (p. 372)
Ledge mesh
Ledge rebar
Ledge rebar (p. 374)
Composite
End rebar
Attributes

365
Strand template
You can specify the arrangement of vertical strand planes in the beam, along with the vertical distances between grid points in each plane. Strands are defined by their row and column number within the grid, but the template allows for a mixture of regular and irregular grid points with respect to both the horizontal and vertical axes. Use the X- and Y-Axis Grid Definition fields to define a list of distances between successive planes and grid points. For regularly spaced points, you may use a multiplier value, for example, 4*6.
Strand pattern
You place strands in the beam by defining the grid points from the strand template for each end of the strand element. You also define size, and other reinforcement properties for the strands here. A row of data on this tab can be thought of as a group. All the strands defined in one group share the same properties and start and stop rows. A group may also refer to a list of columns in the strand template, letting you use one group definition to create a set of strands.
Strand profile
Strands may be straight (though not necessarily horizontal), or depressed, using one or two control points. Note that all strands use the same general profile.
366
Use the following options to define the strand profile: Option Description
Straight
1-pt depressed
367
Longitudinal rebar
This tab allows you to define any longitudinal reinforcement for the member. Up to 10 reinforcing bar definitions may be defined.
For each longitudinal reinforcing bar you can: Specify the minimum clear end distance for C and D. Select the reinforcing bar size. Select the reinforcing bar grade. Specify the horizontal location, Xloc, of the reinforcing bar. Specify the vertical location, Yloc, of the reinforcing bar.
368
Select a value from the Length Definition drop-down combo-box to define the end constraints of the reinforcing bar within the member length. Depending on the your choice, additional information is then entered in the L, C, or D fields. There are five choices: Full Length - The reinforcing bar extends the full length of the member (minus the minimum clear end distance on each end). The L, C, and D fields are disabled. Centered - You can specify a fixed length, L for the reinforcing bar which the component will center in the length of the member. The C and D fields are disabled. Known L, C - You can specify a fixed length, L for the reinforcing bar and a distance C from the start of the member. The D field is disabled. Known L, D - You can specify a fixed length, L for the reinforcing bar and a distance D from the end of the member. The C field is disabled Known C, D - You can specify a distance C from the start of the member and a distance D from the end of the member. The L field is disabled. Values for L, C, and D all take the natural geometry of the beam ends (skewed and/or battered) into account. Notches in the end of a beam, though they will naturally clip any bar they intersect, will not affect the L, C, and D values.
Specify the relative location for longitudinal bars using the following icons:
369
Top and bottom left: Top and bottom right: Top and bottom left and right: Top left: Top right: Top left and right: Bottom left: Bottom right: Bottom left and right:
370
Stem mesh
This tab allows you to define mesh reinforcement in the member stem.
Select the mesh size. Select the mesh grade. Specify the right side clear cover, C1. Specify the left side clear cover, C2. Specify the bottom clear cover, C3. Specify the top clear cover, C4. Specify the left and right end distances, d1 and d2, to the first wire.
371
Specify whether the mesh is continuous over the full length of the member or is used only at the spandrel end(s). If Yes is selected from the list, the mesh extends the full length of the member (less the d1 and d2 end distances and the L1/L2 fields are disabled). If No is selected from the list, mesh can be defined at each end using the L1 and L2 fields. If any stem holes are present, the component should trim the mesh around the hole using the top cover (C3) dimension as a clearance.
Stem stirrups
Use the following options to define the stem stirrups in inverted-tee beams: Option Description
No stirrup
90-degree closed stirrup
372
Option
Description
U-Bar pairs
135-degree open stirrup
Ledge mesh
This tab allows you to define ledge mesh reinforcement in the member.
Select the mesh size. Select the mesh grade.

373
Specify the mesh right side cover, C1. Specify the mesh left side cover, C2. Specify the mesh bottom cover, C3. Specify the mesh top cover, C4. Specify the left end distance to first wire, d1. Specify the right end distance to first wire, d2.
Mesh extends the full length of the spandrel, less the d1 and d2 end dimensions.
Ledge rebar
Use the following options to define the ledge stirrups in inverted-tee beams: Option Description
No stirrup
Bent U-bar stirrup
Bent U-Bar pairs
90-degree stirrup
135-degree stirrup
374
Composite
This tab allows you to define reinforcement that will be used later to create a composite member component.
Select the reinforcing bar size. Select the reinforcing bar grade. Specify the reinforcing bar embedment, A. Specify the reinforcing bar projection, B. Specify the side cover, C1. Specify the left end distance, d1, and right end distance, d2, from the end of the beam to the centerline of the first reinforcing bar. Specify the quantity, X, and spacing, S1, of the first group of reinforcing bar at the left end. Specify the quantity, Y, and spacing, S2, of the first group of reinforcing bar at the right end. Specify the maximum reinforcing bar spacing, S3, to be used between the end groups.
375
End rebar
This tab allows you to define reinforcement at the ends of the member.
Specify up to 6 horizontal and 6 vertical end U-bars. Specify the clearance for the horizontal U-bars.
For each horizontal U-bar: Specify the height, Ht, of the horizontal U-bar. Select the reinforcing bar size and grade. Specify the reinforcing bar side cover, C1. Specify the reinforcing bar leg length. Specify the end clearance for the vertical U-bars.
For each vertical U-bar:

376
Specify the horizontal location, X loc, of the vertical U-bar. Select the reinforcing bar size and grade.
Specify the reinforcing bar top cover, C2. Specify the reinforcing bar bottom cover,C3. Specify the reinforcing bar leg length.
Attributes
This tab lets you define the general attribute information for the reinforcement created by the component.
For each attribute: Specify the Serie value. Specify the Starting Number for the category. Enter the category name. Enter the Class number
377
8.4 Ledge beam (53)

Creates typical flexural, shear, and ledge reinforcement for a ledge beam.
Prestress straight or depressed strands for flexural reinforcement in the beam stem Mild longitudinal bars for flexural reinforcement Mesh for shear reinforcement in the beam stem Stirrups for shear reinforcement in the beam stem Reinforcement mesh in the beam ledge Stirrups for shear reinforcement in the beam ledge Mild reinforcement in the top of the beam that will be used later to create a composite member Mild reinforcement in the ends of the beam
378
Use for
Situation Straight and depressed prestress strands Varying strand pattern and strand number To define longitudinal reinforcement in the stem When you want reinforcement mesh in the stem When you want stirrups in the beam stem To use reinforcement mesh in the beam ledge To use stirrups in the beam ledge To define reinforcement for composite members To add mild reinforcement to the beam ends
Before you start
More information
Create the concrete ledge beam. Calculate the required area and quantity of strands and other reinforcement. Define other reinforcement properties, such as debonding and pull values.
Defining properties
Use the following tabs in the Ledge beam automated reinforcement layout (53) dialog box to define the properties of the objects that this component creates: Tab
Strand template
Contents The allowable grid points for strands within the beam cross section. The actual strand definitions. The vertical profile for strands in the beam. Definitions for additional mild steel reinforcement in the beam. Reinforcement may be defined with a variety of parametric forms. Definition for the mesh to be used in the beam stem. Mesh can run the full length of the beam, or be placed in short sections at either end of the beam. Mesh size, spacing, clearances, and length are all entered here.
Stem mesh
379
Tab
Stem stirrups
Contents Definitions for the bent bar reinforcement in the beam stem, including stirrup shape, bar size, end clearance, number of bars, and bar spacing in five zones along the length of the beam. Definition for the mesh to be used to reinforce the beam ledge. Mesh runs the full length of the beam. Mesh size, spacing, and clearances are all entered here. Definitions for the bent bar reinforcement in the beam ledge, including stirrup shape, bar size, end clearance, number of bars, and bar spacing in five zones along the length of the beam. Definitions for the bent bar reinforcement added to the top of the beam stem for subsequent creation of composite elements. Bar size, embedment, projection, cover, end clearance, number of bars, and bar spacing in three zones along the length of the beam are all defined here. Definitions for the bent bar reinforcement in the beam ends, including position, orientation, bar size and length, cover, and end clearance. Up to 6 horizontal and 6 vertical bars may be defined. Name, class, and numbering properties of the strands, stirrups, and mesh bars.
See also Stem stirrups (p. 387)
Ledge mesh
Ledge rebar
Ledge rebar (p. 389)
Composite
End rebar
Attributes
380
Strand template
You can specify the arrangement of vertical strand planes in the beam, along with the vertical distances between grid points in each plane. Strands are defined by their row and column number within the grid, but the template allows for a mixture of regular and irregular grid points with respect to both the horizontal and vertical axes. Use the X- and Y-Axis Grid Definition fields to define a list of distances between successive planes and grid points. For regularly spaced points, you may use a multiplier value, for example, 4*6.
Strand pattern
Strand profile
381
Straight
1-pt depressed
Longitudinal rebar
382
For each longitudinal reinforcing bar, you can. Specify the minimum clear end distance for C and D. Select the reinforcing bar size. Select the reinforcing bar grade. Specify the horizontal location, Xloc, of the reinforcing bar. Specify the vertical location, Yloc, of the reinforcing bar.
383
Select a value from the Length Definition drop-down combo-box to define the end constraints of the reinforcing bar within the member length. Depending on the your choice, additional information is then entered in the L, C, or D fields. There are five choices: Full Length - The reinforcing bar extends the full length of the member (minus the minimum clear end distance on each end). The L, C, and D fields are disabled. Centered - You can specify a fixed length, L for the reinforcing bar which the component will center in the length of the member. The C and D fields are disabled. Known L, C - You can specify a fixed length, L for the reinforcing bar and a distance C from the start of the member. The D field is disabled. Known L, D - You can specify a fixed length, L for the reinforcing bar and a distance D from the end of the member. The C field is disabled Known C, D - You can specify a distance C from the start of the member and a distance D from the end of the member. The L field is disabled. Values for L, C, and D all take the natural geometry of the beam ends (skewed and/or battered) into account. Notches in the end of a beam, though they will naturally clip any bar they intersect, will not affect the L, C, and D values.
384
385
Stem mesh
This tab allows you to define mesh reinforcement in the member stem.
Select the mesh size. Select the mesh grade. Specify the right side clear cover, C1. Specify the left side clear cover, C2. Specify the bottom clear cover, C3. Specify the top clear cover, C4. Specify the left and right end distances, d1 and d2, to the first wire. Specify whether the mesh is continuous over the full length of the member or is used only at the spandrel end(s). If Yes is selected from the list, the mesh extends the full length of the member (less the d1 and d2 end distances and the L1/L2 fields are disabled). If No is selected from the list, mesh can be defined at each end using the L1 and L2 fields. If any stem holes are present, the component should trim the mesh around the hole using the top cover (C3) dimension as a clearance.
386
Stem stirrups
Use the following options to define the stem stirrups in ledge beams: Option Description
No stirrup
U-Bar pairs
387
Ledge mesh
Select the mesh size. Select the mesh grade. Specify the mesh right side cover, C1. Specify the mesh left side cover, C2. Specify the mesh bottom cover, C3. Specify the mesh top cover, C4. Specify the left end distance to first wire, d1. Specify the right end distance to first wire, d2.
388
Ledge rebar
Use the following options to define the ledge reinforcing bars in ledge beams: Option Description
No stirrup
Bent U-bar stirrup
Bent U-Bar pairs
90-degree stirrup
135-degree stirrup
389
Composite
Select the reinforcing bar size. Select the reinforcing bar grade. Specify the reinforcing bar embedment, A. Specify the reinforcing bar projection, B. Specify the side cover, C1. Specify the left end distance, d1, and right end distance,d2, from the end of the beam to the centerline of the first reinforcing bar. Specify the quantity, X, and spacing, S1, of the first group of reinforcing bar at the left end. Specify the quantity, Y, and spacing, S2, of the first group of reinforcing bar at the right end. Specify the maximum reinforcing bar spacing, S3, to be used between the end groups.
390
End rebar
Specify up to 6 horizontal and 6 vertical end U-bars. Specify the end clearance for the horizontal U-bars.
For each vertical U-bar: Specify the horizontal location, X loc, of the vertical U-bar. Select the reinforcing bar size and grade.
391
Attributes
392
8.5 Rectangular beam (54)

Creates typical flexural and shear reinforcement for a rectangular beam.
Prestress straight or depressed strands for flexural reinforcement in the beam Mild longitudinal bars for flexural reinforcement Mesh for shear reinforcement in the beam Stirrups for shear reinforcement in the beam Mild reinforcement in the top of the beam that will be used later to create a composite member Mild reinforcement in the ends of the beam
Use for
Situation Straight and depressed prestress strands Varying strand pattern and strand number To define longitudinal reinforcement in the beam When you want reinforcement mesh in the beam When you want stirrups in the beam To define reinforcement for composite members To add mild reinforcement to the beam ends
Before you start
More information
Create the concrete rectangular beam. Calculate the required area and quantity of strands and other reinforcement. Define other reinforcement properties, such as debonding and pull values.
393
Defining properties
Use the following tabs in the Rectangular beam automated reinforcement layout (54) dialog box to define the properties of the objects that this component creates: Tab
Strand template
Contents The allowable grid points for strands within the beam cross section. The actual strand definitions. The vertical profile for strands in the beam. Definitions for additional mild steel reinforcement in the beam. Reinforcement may be defined with a variety of parametric forms. Definition for the mesh to be used in the beam. Mesh can run the full length of the beam, or be placed in short sections at either end of the beam. Mesh size, spacing, clearances, and length are all entered here. Definitions for the bent bar reinforcement in the beam, including stirrup shape, bar size, end clearance, number of bars, and bar spacing in five zones along the length of the beam. Definitions for the bent bar reinforcement added to the top of the beam for subsequent creation of composite elements. Bar size, embedment, projection, cover, end clearance, number of bars, and bar spacing in three zones along the length of the beam are all defined here.
See also Strand template (p. 395) Strand pattern (p. 396) Strand profile (p. 396) Longitudinal rebar (p. 421)
Stem mesh
Stem mesh (p. 425)
Stem stirrups
Composite
394
Tab
End rebar
Contents Definitions for the bent bar reinforcement in the beam ends, including position, orientation, bar size and length, cover, and end clearance. Up to 6 horizontal and 6 vertical bars may be defined. Name, class, and numbering properties of the strands, stirrups, and mesh bars.
Attributes
Strand template
You can specify the arrangement of vertical strand planes in the beam, along with the vertical distances between grid points in each plane. Strands are defined by their row and column number within the grid, but the template allows for a mixture of regular and irregular grid points with respect to both the horizontal and vertical axes. Use the fields Grid spacing along X and Grid spacing along Y to define a list of distances between successive planes and grid points. For regularly spaced points, you may use a multiplier value, for example, 4*6.
395
Strand pattern
Strand profile
Strands may be straight (though not necessarily horizontal), or depressed, using one or two control points. Note that all strands use the same general profile. Use the following options to define the strand profile: Option Description
Straight
1-pt depressed
396
Option
Description
Longitudinal rebar
397
Select a value from the Length Definition drop-down combo-box to define the end constraints of the reinforcing bar within the member length. Depending on your choice, additional information is then entered in the L, C, or D fields. There are five choices: Full Length - The reinforcing bar extends the full length of the member (minus the minimum clear end distance on each end). The L, C, and D fields are disabled. Centered - You can specify a fixed length, L for the reinforcing bar which the component will center in the length of the member. The C and D fields are disabled. Known L, C - You can specify a fixed length, L for the reinforcing bar and a distance C from the start of the member. The D field is disabled. Known L, D - You can specify a fixed length, L for the reinforcing bar and a distance D from the end of the member. The C field is disabled Known C, D - You can specify a distance C from the start of the member and a distance D from the end of the member. The L field is disabled. Values for L, C, and D all take the natural geometry of the beam ends (skewed and/or battered) into account. Notches in the end of a beam, though they will naturally clip any bar they intersect, will not affect the L, C, and D values.
398
399
Stem mesh
This tab allows you to define mesh reinforcement in the stem of the beam.
400
Stem stirrups
Use the following options to define the stem stirrups in ledge beams: Option Description
No stirrup
401
Option
Description
U-Bar pairs
Composite
402
Select the reinforcing bar size. Select the reinforcing bar grade. Specify the reinforcing bar embedment, A. Specify the reinforcing bar projection, B. Specify the side cover, C1. Specify the left end distance, d1, and right end distance, d2, from the end of the beam to the centerline of the first reinforcing bar. Specify the quantity, X, and spacing, S1, of the first group of reinforcing bar at the left end. Specify the quantity, Y, and spacing, S2, of the first group of reinforcing bar at the right end. Specify the maximum reinforcing bar spacing, S3, to be used between the end groups.
403
End rebar

404
Attributes
405
8.6 Ledge spandrel (55)

Creates typical flexural, shear, and ledge reinforcement for a ledge spandrel.
Prestress straight or depressed strands for flexural reinforcement in the spandrel stem Mild longitudinal bars for flexural reinforcement Mesh for shear reinforcement in the spandrel stem Stirrups for shear reinforcement in the spandrel stem Reinforcement mesh in the spandrel ledge Stirrups for shear reinforcement in the spandrel ledge Mild reinforcement in the ends of the spandrel
Use for
Situation Straight and depressed prestress strands Varying strand pattern and strand number To define longitudinal reinforcement in the stem When you want reinforcement mesh in the stem When you want stirrups in the spandrel stem To use reinforcement mesh in the spandrel ledge To use stirrups in the spandrel ledge To add mild reinforcement to the spandrel ends
More information
406
Before you start
Create the concrete ledge spandrel. Calculate the required area and quantity of strands and other reinforcement. Define other reinforcement properties, such as debonding and pull values.
Defining properties
Use the following tabs in the Ledge spandrel automated reinforcement layout (55) dialog box to define the properties of the objects that this component creates: Tab
Strand Template
Contents The allowable grid points for strands within the spandrel cross section. The actual strand definitions. The vertical profile for strands in the spandrel. Definitions for additional mild steel reinforcement in the spandrel. Reinforcement may be defined with a variety of parametric forms. Definition for the mesh to be used in the spandrel stem. Mesh can run the full length of the spandrel, or be placed in short sections at either end. Mesh size, spacing, clearances, and length are all entered here. Definitions for the bent bar reinforcement in the spandrel stem, including stirrup shape, bar size, end clearance, number of bars, and bar spacing in eight zones along the length of the spandrel. Definition for the mesh to be used to reinforce the spandrel ledge. Mesh runs the full length of the spandrel. Mesh size, spacing, and clearances are all entered here.
Strand Pattern Strand Profile Longitudinal Rebar
Stem Mesh
Stem Stirrups
Ledge Mesh
407
Tab
Ledge Stirrups
Contents Definitions for the bent bar reinforcement in the spandrel ledge, including stirrup shape, bar size, end clearance, number of bars, and bar spacing in eight zones along the length of the spandrel. Definitions for the bent bar reinforcement in the spandrel ends, including position, orientation, bar size and length, cover, and end clearance. Up to 6 horizontal bars may be defined. Name, class, and numbering properties of the strands, stirrups, and mesh bars.
See also Ledge rebar (p. 416)
End Rebar
Attributes
408
Strand template
You can specify the arrangement of vertical strand planes in the spandrel, along with the vertical distances between grid points in each plane. Strands are defined by their row and column number within the grid, but the template allows for a mixture of regular and irregular grid points with respect to both the horizontal and vertical axes. Use the Grid spacing along X and Grid spacing along Y fields to define a list of distances between successive planes and grid points. For regularly spaced points, you may use a multiplier value, for example, 4*6.
Strand pattern
You place strands in the spandrel by defining the grid points from the strand template for each end of the strand element. You also define size, and other reinforcement properties for the strands here. A row of data on this tab can be thought of as a group. All the strands defined in one group share the same properties and start and stop rows. A group may also refer to a list of columns in the strand template, letting you use one group definition to create a set of strands.
Strand profile
409
Straight
1-pt depressed
410
Longitudinal rebar
411
For each longitudinal reinforcing bar you can: Specify the minimum clear end distance for C and D. Select the reinforcing bar size. Select the reinforcing bar grade. Specify the horizontal location, Xloc, of the reinforcing bar. Specify the vertical location, Yloc, of the reinforcing bar. Select a value from the Length Definition list box to define the end constraints of the reinforcing bar within the member length. Depending on your choice, additional information is then entered in the L, C, or D fields. There are five choices: Full Length - The reinforcing bar extends the full length of the member (minus the minimum clear end distance on each end). The L, C, and D fields are disabled. Centered - You can specify a fixed length, L for the reinforcing bar which the component will center in the length of the member. The C and D fields are disabled. Known L, C - You can specify a fixed length, L for the reinforcing bar and a distance C from the start of the member. The D field is disabled. Known L, D - You can specify a fixed length, L for the reinforcing bar and a distance D from the end of the member. The C field is disabled Known C, D - You can specify a distance C from the start of the member and a distance D from the end of the member. The L field is disabled. Values for L, C, and D all take the natural geometry of the beam ends (skewed and/or battered) into account. Notches in the end of a beam, though they will naturally clip any bar they intersect, will not affect the L, C, and D values. Specify the relative location for longitudinal bars using the following icons:
412
Stem mesh
This tab allows you to define mesh reinforcement in the stem of the spandrel. Select the mesh size. Select the mesh grade. Specify the right side clear cover, C1. Specify the left side clear cover, C2. Specify the bottom clear cover, C3. Specify the top clear cover, C4. Specify the left and right end distances, d1 and d2, to the first wire. Specify whether the mesh is continuous over the full length of the member or is used only at the spandrel end(s). If Yes is selected from the list, the mesh extends the full length of the member (less the d1 and d2 end distances and the L1/L2 fields are disabled). If No is selected from the list, mesh can be defined at each end using the L1 and L2 fields. If any stem holes are present, the component should trim the mesh around the hole using the top cover (C3) dimension as a clearance.
413
Stem stirrups
Stirrups are defined in groups, and a row of data on this tab represents the definition for a group. All the stirrups defined in one group share the same properties, including stirrup type. Clear cover definitions apply to all groups. The following stirrup types may be used in ledge spandrels: Option Description
Lapped pair
Fixed pair
Open U
414
Ledge mesh
Select the mesh size. Select the mesh grade. Specify the mesh right side cover, C1. Specify the mesh left side cover, C2. Specify the mesh bottom cover, C3. Specify the mesh top cover, C4. Specify the left end distance to first wire, d1. Specify the right end distance to first wire, d2.
415
Ledge rebar
Ledge stirrups are defined in groups, using the same concept as stem stirrups. The following ledge stirrup types may be used: Option Description
Bent U-bar stirrup
Bent U-Bar pairs
90-degree stirrup
135-degree stirrup
End rebar
416
For each vertical U-bar: Specify the horizontal location, X loc, of the vertical U-bar. Select the reinforcing bar size and grade. Specify the reinforcing bar top cover, C2. Specify the reinforcing bar bottom cover,C3. Specify the reinforcing bar leg length.
Attributes
417
8.7 Rectangular spandrel (56)

Creates typical flexural and shear reinforcement for a rectangular spandrel.
Prestress straight or depressed strands for flexural reinforcement in the spandrel Mild longitudinal bars for flexural reinforcement Mesh for shear reinforcement in the spandrel Stirrups for shear reinforcement in the spandrel Mild reinforcement in the ends of the spandrel
Use for
Situation Straight and depressed prestress strands Varying strand pattern and strand number To define longitudinal reinforcement in the spandrel When you want reinforcement mesh in the spandrel When you want stirrups in the spandrel To add mild reinforcement to the spandrel ends
Before you start
More information
Create the concrete rectangular spandrel. Calculate the required area and quantity of strands and other reinforcement. Define other reinforcement properties, such as debonding and pull values.
418
Defining properties
Use the following tabs in the Rectangular spandrel automated reinforcement layout (56) dialog box to define the properties of the objects that this component creates: Tab
Strand Template
Contents The allowable grid points for strands within the spandrel cross section. The actual strand definitions. The vertical profile for strands in the spandrel. Definitions for additional mild steel reinforcement in the spandrel. Reinforcement may be defined with a variety of parametric forms. Definition for the mesh to be used in the spandrel. Mesh can run the full length of the spandrel, or be placed in short sections at either end. Mesh size, spacing, clearances, and length are all entered here. Definitions for the bent bar reinforcement in the spandrel, including stirrup shape, bar size, end clearance, number of bars, and bar spacing in eight zones along the length of the spandrel. Definitions for the bent bar reinforcement in the spandrel ends, including position, orientation, bar size and length, cover, and end clearance. Up to 6 horizontal bars may be defined. Name, class, and numbering properties of the strands, stirrups, and mesh bars.
See also Strand template (p. 420) Strand pattern (p. 420) Strand profile (p. 420) Longitudinal rebar (p. 421)
Strand Pattern Strand Profile Longitudinal Rebar
Stem Mesh
Stem mesh (p. 425)
Stem Stirrups
End Rebar
End rebar (p. 428)
Attributes
Attributes (p. 429)
419
Strand template
You can specify the arrangement of vertical strand planes in the spandrel, along with the vertical distances between grid points in each plane. Strands are defined by their row and column number within the grid, but the template allows for a mixture of regular and irregular grid points with respect to both the horizontal and vertical axes. Use the X- and Y-Axis Grid Definition fields to define a list of distances between successive planes and grid points. For regularly spaced points, you may use a multiplier value, for example, 4*6.
Strand pattern
You place strands in the spandrel by defining the grid points from the strand template for each end of the strand element. You also define size, and other reinforcement properties for the strands here. A row of data on this tab can be thought of as a group. All the strands defined in one group share the same properties and start and stop rows. A group may also refer to a list of columns in the strand template, letting you use one group definition to create a set of strands.
Strand profile
420
Straight
1-pt depressed
You specify the depress positions A and B as either a fixed distance or as a percentage of the member length. If no specific value is given the Ht shall be calculated as Minimum. So the strand will be straight unless it needs to be depressed because of the above strand going below the straight position.
Longitudinal rebar
421
422
Select a value from the Length Definition list box to define the end constraints of the reinforcing bar within the member length. Depending on your choice, additional information is then entered in the L, C, or D fields. There are five choices: Full Length - The reinforcing bar extends the full length of the member (minus the minimum clear end distance on each end). The L, C, and D fields are disabled. Centered - You can specify a fixed length, L for the reinforcing bar which the component will center in the length of the member. The C and D fields are disabled. Known L, C - You can specify a fixed length, L for the reinforcing bar and a distance C from the start of the member. The D field is disabled. Known L, D - You can specify a fixed length, L for the reinforcing bar and a distance D from the end of the member. The C field is disabled Known C, D - You can specify a distance C from the start of the member and a distance D from the end of the member. The L field is disabled. Values for L, C, and D all take the natural geometry of the beam ends (skewed and/or battered) into account. Notches in the end of a beam, though they will naturally clip any bar they intersect, will not affect the L, C, and D values.
423
424
Stem mesh
This tab allows you to define mesh reinforcement in the stem of the spandrel.
425
Stem stirrups
Stirrups are defined in groups, and a row of data on this tab represents the definition for a group. All the stirrups defined in one group share the same properties, including stirrup type. Clear cover definitions apply to all groups. Use the following options to define the stem stirrups in rectangular spandrels: Option Description
U-Bar lapped pairs
426
Option
Description
U-Bar fixed pairs
Open U stirrup
427
End rebar

428
Attributes
8.8 Columns (57)

Creates typical longitudinal and tie reinforcement for a column.
Prestress strands for longitudinal reinforcement in a column Mild longitudinal bars for longitudinal reinforcement in a column Reinforcement for composite rectangular columns
429
Use for
Situation To define longitudinal prestress reinforcement size and location To define longitudinal mild reinforcement size and extent To define tie size and spacings
Before you start
More information
Create the column. Calculate the required area and quantity of strands and other reinforcement. Define other reinforcement properties.
430
Defining properties
Use the following tabs in the Column layout dialog box to define the properties of the objects that this component creates: Tab
Strand reinforcement
Contents A description of the geometric layout of pre-stress strands in the column, as well as other attributes of the strands The definition of the longitudinal reinforcement to be used in the primary section of the column. The definition of the ties used in the primary section of the column, including size, shape, geometry, and spacing. The definition of the longitudinal bar and ties to be used in the secondary section(s) of the column. The definition of the reinforcement parametrics for circular columns. The definition ofthe general properties for the reinforcement created by the component.
See also Strand reinforcement (p. 432)
Longitudinal rebar
Longitudinal rebar (p. 433)
Primary ties
Primary ties (p. 435)
Secondary reinforcement
Secondary reinforcement (p. 438)
Circular column
Circular column (p. 439) Attributes (p. 440)
Attributes
431
Strand reinforcement
This tab lets you define the strand reinforcement in the primary section of the column. Up to 8 strands may be defined.
Select the size of the strand at each location. Select the grade of strand at each location. Specify the pull for each strand. Specify strand-centerline-to-surface dimension, de. For corner strands 1-4, this distance defines the strand centerline position relative to both adjacent column faces. For strands 5-8, the strand is located on the face centerline, offset from the face by distance de.
432
Longitudinal rebar
This tab lets you define the longitudinal reinforcement in the primary section of the column. Longitudinal bars are presumed to run the entire length of the column (less the End Clearance distance at each end of the member). Standard longitudinal reinforcement configurations are provided in a convenient drop-down, and up to 12 bars may be defined.
Select the desired reinforcement pattern from the drop-down combobox. There are 10 predefined patterns to choose from.
4 Bar Symmetrical
6 Bar X-X
433
6 Bar Y-Y
8 Bar Symmetrical
8 Bar X-X
8 Bar Y-Y
10 Bar X-X
10 Bar Y-Y
12 Bar X-X
12 Bar Y-Y
Specify the reinforcing bar-centerline-to-surface dimension, de. This value is used to locate most of the bars in each pattern. Specify the dimension, d1, which is used in only the 10- and 12-bar patterns to locate off-axis bars. This value should default to the half the appropriate primary section dimension less de, divided by 2. Specify the end clear distance for both ends of the longitudinal reinforcing bars. Select the size of the bar at each bar location. Select the grade of bar at each bar location.

434
Primary ties
This tab lets you define the reinforcing ties in the primary section of the column. Primary ties are distributed along the entire length of the column. Standard tie configurations are provided in a convenient list.
First select the desired tie reinforcement pattern from the list box. There are 16 predefined patterns to choose from. The longitudinal reinforcing bar selection will affect which of these patterns can be used. The component will verify that the primary tie configuration correlates with the primary longitudinal reinforcement configuration. Furthermore, the location or stirrup in section may depend on the location of longitudinal bars (e.g. 8-bar X-X).
4 Bar Symmetrical
6/10 Bar X-X (A)
435
6/10 Bar X-X (B)
6/10 Bar Y-Y (A)
6/10 Bar Y-Y (B)
8 Bar Symmetrical (A)
8 Bar Symmetrical (B)
8 Bar Symmetrical (C)
8 Bar X-X (A)
8 Bar X-X (B)
8 Bar Y-Y (A)
8 Bar Y-Y (B)
436
12 Bar X-X (A)
12 Bar X-X (B)
12 Bar Y-Y (A)
12 Bar Y-Y (B)
Select the size of the tie bar. Select the grade of the tie bar. Select the tie hook type. The options are 90 and 135. Specify the minimum clear cover, c1. The component must verify that with the clear cover specified the tie properly fits around the longitudinal reinforcing bar with the locations specified in previous tab. Specify the distance, d1, to the centerline of the first tie from the top and bottom. Often there are anchor bolt pockets at the bottom of columns. The component should interpret the d1 distance to be above those pockets. Specify the quantity, X, and spacing, s1, of the first group of ties at top and bottom. Then specify the maximum spacing, s2, of primary ties throughout the length of the column.
437
Secondary reinforcement
This tab allows you to define longitudinal and tie reinforcement in the secondary section(s) of the column. The component will automatically determine these sections from the column geometry.
Select the bar size for the secondary longitudinal bars. Enter the grade for the secondary longitudinal bars. Specify the minimum clear cover, c2, from the secondary longitudinal bars to the column face. Specify the end clear distance from the top and bottom of each secondary section to the ends of the secondary longitudinal bars. Select the bar size for the secondary ties. Enter the grade for the secondary ties. Select the secondary tie hook type. The options are 90 and 135. Specify the distance, d1, to first and second secondary ties from the top and bottom of the secondary section.
438
Circular column
This tab allows you to define the reinforcement parametrics for circular columns. The component will only create reinforcement in constant diameter members. Tapered columns and circular columns with ledges are not supported.
First specify the desired number of main bars in the column, from 412. Select the size of the main bar. Select the grade of the main bar. Select the size of the tie bar. Select the grade of the tie bar. Specify the tie clear cover, c1. Specify the tie lap dimension. Specify the top end distance, d1, from the centerline of the first tie to the top of the column. Specify the bottom end distance, d2, from the centerline of the last tie to the bottom of the column. Often there are anchor bolt pockets at the bottom of columns. The component should interpret the d2 distance to be above those pockets.
439
Specify the quantity, X, and spacing, s1, of the first group of ties at top and bottom. Specify the maximum spacing, s2, of primary ties throughout the length of the column.
Attributes
This tab allows you to define the general attribute information for the reinforcement created by the component.
For each category: Specify the Serie value. Specify the Start number for the category. Enter the category name. Enter the Class number Minimum cut size: Define the minimum length of the boundary of cut/hole, to be considered as cut in this field. The default value is 200 mm.
8.9 Topping (58)

Use the Topping (58) component to model typical toppings along with their typical reinforcement.
440
Defining properties
Use the following tabs in the Topping (58) dialog box to define the properties of the objects that this component creates: Tab
Topping
Contents Method of topping, configuration of elevation/thickness of topping, mesh to be created in the topping. Thickness of topping at each point selected while defining polygonal area for topping. The required mesh and concrete attributes.
See also Topping (p. 441)
Advanced
Advanced (p. 442)
Attributes
Topping
441
Option
Elevation is specified
Description Select the method to use to specifiy the elevation of the exterior boundary surface of the topping:
Absolute elevation, EL: you can to specify the top surface elevation relative to elevation 0-0. Relative thickness, H: you can
specify the top surface as a uniform thickness above the underlying precast floor units.
Use control points: Tekla Struc-
tures uses the polygon input points as the actual 3 dimensional nodes of the top surface of the toppings. Use this option to place a topping over any sloped surface.
Elevation value
Enter an appropriate value based on the choice picked in the list box above. This input box is grayed out if you have selected the Use control points option. Specify whether the topping is integral with the underlying precast unit (monolithic) or poured on site. Specify the concrete strength for the topping, from the material catalog. Select the mesh reinforcement from the mesh catalog.
Topping configuration
Concrete material Reinforcing mesh
Advanced
Use the options on this tab to alter the elevation of any individual node:
Control point indexes: you can specify one control point or multiple control
point indexes simultaneously.

Elevation: You can overwrite Elevation (thickness at individual con-
trol points.
442
8.10 Wash (59)

Use the Wash (59) component to model typical washes along with their typical reinforcement.
Defining properties
Use the following tabs in the Wash (59) dialog box to define the properties of the objects that this component creates: Tab
Wash
Contents Method of wash, configuration of the elevation/thickness and size of wash, recess depth, mesh to be created in the wash. Thickness of wash at each point selected while defining the exterior and interior boundary. The required mesh and concrete attributes.
See also Wash (p. 444)
Advanced
Advanced (p. 445)
Attributes
443
Wash
Specify the wash step dimensions, D1 and D2, to define the top elevation of the internal boundary relative to the surface of the precast floor units. Note that D1 and/or D2 can be zero (0.00).
444
Option
Elevation is specified
Description Select the method to use to specifiy the elevation of the exterior boundary surface of the wash:
Absolute elevation, EL: you can to specify the top surface elevation relative to elevation 0-0. Relative thickness, H: you can
specify the top surface as a uniform thickness above the underlying precast floor units.
Use control points: Tekla Struc-
tures uses the polygon input points as the actual 3 dimensional nodes of the top surface of the wash. Use this option to place a wash over any sloped surface.
Elevation value
Enter an appropriate value based on the choice picked in the list box above. This input box is grayed out if you have selected the Use control points option. Specify whether the wash is integral with the underlying precast unit (monolithic) or poured on site. Specify the concrete strength for the wash from the material catalog. Select the mesh reinforcement from the mesh catalog.
Topping configuration
Concrete material Reinforcing mesh
Advanced
Use the options on this tab to alter the elevation of any individual node:
Exterior control point indexes: you can specify one control point or
multiple control point indexes simultaneously.

Elevation: you can specify the actual elevation/ thickness (thickness at individual control points). Interior control point indexes: you can specify one control point or multiple control point indexes simultaneously. 445
D1: you can change the thickness at each interior control point. D2: you can change the recess depth at individual control point.
8.11 Hollowcore beam (60)

The Hollowcore Automated Reinforcement Generator (HC-ARG) component enables Tekla Structures to accurately model all typical hollowcore reinforcement. Use the tabs in the component dialog box to load a previously saved HC (Hollowcore) reinforcement scheme, or new reinforcement scheme.
446
Defining properties
Use the following tabs in the Hollowcore beam (60) dialog box to define the properties of the objects that this component creates: Tab
Strand template
Contents The allowable grid points for strands within the stem cross section. You can specify the number and arrangement of vertical strand planes in each stem, along with the vertical distances between grid points in each plane. Strands are defined by their row and column number within the grid, but the template allows for a mixture of regular and irregular grid points with respect to the vertical axis. The actual strand definitions. You place strands in the stem by defining the grid points from the strand template for each end of the strand element. You also define size, and other reinforcement properties for the strands. Strands, Store strand code, Strand code, Create strand at voids.
See also Strand template (p. 447)
Strand pattern
Strand pattern (p. 448)
Attributes
Attributes (p. 449)
Strand template
Creates strands located at specific grid positions.
Grid Spacing along X: Hollowcore reinforcement created
Use grid spacing to define grid spacing values for the X axis, separating values with commas or spaces. Multiplier values may be applied to define a repeating series of values, e.g., 8*2 indicates 8 holes with a 2 unit spacing. First value is the distance from the left edge of the plank; each successive value is the distance to the next grid point.
Grid Spacing along Y:
447
Use grid spacing to define grid spacing values for the X axis, separating values with commas or spaces. First value is the distance from the bottom edge of the beam; each successive value is the distance to the next grid point.
Strand pattern
Creates the vertical row number for the strand.
Hollowcore strand pattern created
Use grid spacing to specify grid spacing values for the X-axis, separating values with commas. Enter one or more column numbers and/or column ranges in the strand template at which strand should be generated. Select strand size generated for this strand group. Select strand grade generated for this strand group. Specify strand pull for the strand group.
448
Attributes
Specify properties for strands, store strand codes, strand code, and create strand at voids.
Hollowcore basic reinforcement properties
Strands Specify all appropriate information in this tab. This can be in the reinforcement mark definition. Store strand code With option Store strand code you may choose to store (or not) a user-defined textual attribute TS_STRAND_CODE to part. Strand code In field Strand code you may enter a string template for the value of the above mentioned user-defined attribute. The default template is the total number of created strands. The template may contain any text and the predefined fields for:
449
%NUMBERS is the numbers of created strands with different sizes and/or grades e.g. 10 (for one size & grade) or 6+4 (if two sizes and/or grades has been used). %SIZES sizes of the strands e.g 1/2 or 1/2 + 3/8. %GRADES grades of strands.
Create strand at voids The option Yes will show the strands even though the voids are present. The option No will not show the strand
if void is present at any location along the strand path.
8.12 Post-tensioning (61)

The Post-tensioning (61) component enables Tekla Structures to accurately model most post-tensioning profiles and attributes. Use the tabs in the component dialog box to load a previously saved PT (post-tensioning) tendon scheme, or a new tendon scheme.
450
Defining properties
Use the following tabs in the Post-tensioning (61) dialog box to define the properties of the objects that this component creates: Tab
Tendon properties
Contents Tendon size, Grade, Number of tendons, Spacing between tendons, Rotation angle, Grouted system. Tendon profile, Start point offset A1, End point offset A2, Sway drape D, Bend radius R, Width W, Centerline Offset, Loop count. Enter the tendon properties.
See also Tendon properties (p. 451)
Tendon profile
Tendon profile (p. 452)
Attributes
Tendon properties
Use the options on this tab to define the following properties: Option
Tendon size and grade Number of tendons Spacing between tendons, S Rotation angle
Description Select the tendon size and grade from the catalog of available options. Enter the number of tendons in the group. If you have specified more than one tendon, input the spacing (S) between tendons. Specify the rotation angle of tendon/tendon group around the input points from the default plane. The default plane is the plane which is parallel to thestrong axisof the part. Specify whether the tendon is to be a grouted system or a non-grouted system. This option defines whether Tekla Structures uses the strand in determining the ultimate capacity. Furthermore, you can input custom or vendor specific post-tensioning information, including unique and/or multiple tendon systems, grease thickness, jacket material, jacket thickness, and jacket diameter.
Grouted system
451
Tendon profile
You have the following options: Option Description
Straight
Parabolic
Straight one point
Loop
452
Depending on the profile selected, you can input the required fields below:
Start point offset A1 End point offset A2 Sway drape D Bend radius R Width W Centerline Offset Loop count
8.13 Edge and corner reinforcement (62)

Automatically generates edge and corner reinforcement for concrete slabs.
Reinforcements
Precast concrete panels (both solid and sandwhich) For cast-in-situ slabs (both vertical and horizontal) The Getting Started (p. 5) chapter introduces the concept of using components to automatically connect parts and create model objects.
Use for
Situation How the edge and corner reinforcements would be created when applied to an already created concrete slab complete with its main and secondary reinforcements. The slabs main reinforcement can be create via existing components of slab reinforcement components (e.g. Pilecap reinforcement (76), Pad footing (77), Slab bars (18), Reinforcement mesh array in area (89). The slabs main reinforcement can be created manually via existing reinforcement tool bars (e.g. single bar, group bars or mesh).
Before you start
More information
This tool does not include the slab main reinforcement, just the edge and corner reinforcement. The crack width and deflection requirements need to be resolved in the Analysis & Design using SLS.
Defining properties
Use the following tabs in the Edge and corner reinforcement(62) dialog box to define the properties of the objects that this component creates:
453
Tab
Picture Edge Bars
Contents Select the corner type for each corner separately. Specify the edge bar properties, overlap lengths, number of reinforcing bars, concrete cover for top (C1), bottom (C2) and side (C3). Specify the diagonal bar properties, overlap lengths, number of reinforcing bars, concrete cover for top (C1), bottom (C2) and side (C3). Specify the U bar properties. The U shaped dimensions are governed by the concrete cover thicknesses and diameter of the U bar. You can control the leg lengths with the parameters L1 and L2.
See also
Diag Bar
U Bars
This component will analyze the actual geometry associated with the slab to determine the information about corners and edges. Then it will use this information as well as the parameteric data you enter to define and create edge and corner reinforcement. If you subsequently change the slab geometry (directly or indirectly) in Tekla Structures, the component will re-analyze the geometry, and if practical, generate the applied edge and corner reinforcement appropriate to the changes in the geometry.
8.14 U Bar of concrete slab (63)

Automatically generates U bars reinforcement for concrete slabs.
Reinforcements
Precast concrete RC slabs and PC panels (both solid and sandwich) For cast-in-situ slabs (both vertical and horizontal). The Getting Started (p. 5) chapter introduces the concept of using components to automatically connect parts and create model objects.
454
Use for
To create U bars to an already created concrete slab complete with its main and secondary reinforcement. Create the slabs main reinforcement with existing slab reinforcement components (e.g. Pilecap reinforcement (76), Pad footing (77), Slab bars (18), Reinforcement mesh array in area (89) manually with the tools on the Concrete toolbar (e.g. single bar, bar groups or mesh).
Existing components must be created previously in order to use this reinforcement tool. Use the U bars tab to define the properties of the objects that this component creates: Tab
U bars
Contents Generate automatically U bar reinforcement for concrete slabs
See also U bars (p. 456) Basic reinforcement properties (p. 117)
455
U bars
Use to define U bar properties.
Use the options on this tab to specify Prefix value. Starting number. Name. Class number. Reinforcing bar size and grade:
456
Option
Description U Bar UB1
U Bar UB2
Bending radius. Top concrete cover. Bottom concrete cover. Side concrete cover. Top leg length. Bottom leg length. End dist Creation method Number of bars Target spacing value Exact spacing values
457
458
CS Components
Topics
This chapter contains the following topics: 3D cut (10) (p. 461) Anchor (10) (p. 462) Wall teeth (12) (p. 470) Column-beam (14) (p. 478) Opening in wall (40) (p. 480) Parts at beam (82) (p. 486) Rebar in beam (90) (p. 491) Concrete console (110) (p. 509) Concrete console (111) (p. 519) Concrete beam-beam (112) (p. 525) Inbedded detail (1008) (p. 534) Precast foundation block (1028) (p. 538) Border rebar (93) (p. 542)
TEKLA STRUCTURES - DETAILING MANUAL CS Components
459
9.1 Component reference list

Component 3D cut (10) (p. 461) Icon Description Creates a 3D cut.
Anchor (10) (p. 462)
Connects two concrete parts, for example two walls or a column to a wall, using anchor embeds and L-profiles. Wall teeth connection between two concrete parts. Connection between concrete column and concrete beam. Creates an opening in a concrete wall. Additionally the component can add insulation. Component to add max. three parts or cuts to a concrete part. Component to add reinforcement bars to concrete parts. Console conenction between a concrete column and one concrete beam. Console conenction between a concrete column and one or two concrete beam(s).
Wall teeth (12) (p. 470)
Column-beam (14) (p. 478) Opening in wall (40) (p. 480) Parts at beam (82) (p. 486) Rebar in beam (90) (p. 491) Concrete console (110) (p. 509) Concrete console (111) (p. 519) Concrete beam-beam (112) (p. 525) Inbedded detail (1008) (p. 534) Precast foundation block (1028) (p. 538) Border rebar (93) (p. 542)
460
Component to add embeds to concrete parts. Component to create a complete precast foundation block. Component to create hairpin rebars in concrete walls and panels.
9.2 3D cut (10)

The 3D cut (10) component creates a 3D cut to a concrete part. The cutplane is determined by picking three points on the (concrete) part edges. The cut direction can be set. Also an cut offset can be set.
Use for
Situation
More information This component creates a cut through 3 points. The side to be removed can be defined.
Before you start
Before applying the macro, create the following part: Concrete part (panel, column, strip footing)
Defining properties
The component contains only 1 tab, named Picture. Tab

Picture
Content Defining the cut direction. Possibly set an cutplane offset.
See also Picture (p. 461)
Picking order
1. 2.
Concrete part 3 points to determine the cut plane.
Picture
On the Picture tab the following can be set:
Definition of the cut

Cut right The parts right side from the cut plane will be removed. Cut left The parts left side from the cut plane will be removed.
461
Fit plane The removed part is shortest part (from fit plane to parts end). No cut No cut is applied.
Offset
An offset can be applied for the cutplane. The offset distance is always perpendicular to the cutplane.
No Offset
Offset set to 50 mm
Explode macro
Possibility to explode the macro or let the component intact. If you do not have to make modifications to the macro after applying it, you can opt for exploding it. If future modifications are needed, let the macro intact.
9.3 Anchor (10)

The Anchor (10) component connects two concrete parts, e.g. two walls or a column to a wall. The concrete parts are connected by a connection profile and anchor bolts.
Parts created Use for Do not use for Before you start
No new parts are created. Cuts and fittings are applied to the column and wall. Connections between a concrete wall and concrete columns.
Before applying the component, create the following parts: Two walls/panels or a column and a panel/wall.
462
Defining properties
Use the following tabs in component dialog box Tekla Structures Anchor (10) to define the component properties: Tab
Picture
Content Defining number of anchors, anchor edge distance and plate inbed offset. Defining anchors profiles and position of the anchors. Tab to define the connection profile. Tab for defining the anchor bolts. Tab to define how primary and secondary parts are connected.
Anchors Connection profile General Bolts Cuts
Anchors (p. 463) Conn profile (p. 465)
Bolts (p. 467) Cuts (p. 468)
Picture
On the Picture tab you can define the number of anchors. The anchor distance is determined automatically. The fields in the left part can be used for defining an offset for the anchor inbed plates.
Anchors
On the Anchors tab you can define the anchor bolts profiles and positions.
463
1 2 3
Feature Anchor panel 1
Description Profile for anchor inbed in panel Picklist to define the side the anchors in panels should be created. Oprtions are: None, left, right, both sides.
Default value
Anchor column Profile for anchor inbed in column
Picklist to define the side the anchors in column should be created. Oprtions are: None, left, right, both sides. Part position number. Material grade. Part name. Part class. Part comment in user defined attributes. Picklist to define how anchor inbeds are connected to panels Middle System default System default BLANK System default BLANK
Pos_No Material Name Class Comment 3
Anchor panel: Anchor reference in plane for the Position in plane 2nd picked part. Options are: Middle, Right, Left
464
Feature Anchor panel: Rotation
Description Anchor roration for the 2nd picked part. Options are: Default, Front, Top, Back, Below
Default value
Anchor panel: Anchor reference in depth for the Position in depth 2nd picked part. Options are: Middle, Front, Behind Anchor column: Anchor reference in plane for the 1st Position in plane picked part. Options are: Middle, Right, Left Anchor column: Anchor roration for the 1st picked Rotation part. Options are: Default, Front, Top, Back, Below Anchor column: Anchor reference in depth for the 1st Middle Position in depth picked part. Options are: Middle, Front, Behind Anchors cut Parameter to define if a cut-out for Yes the anchor inbeds should be created or not.
Conn profile
On this tab the connection profile is defined. The connection profile can be a library profile or a folded plate profile. There are multiple options for positioning and rotation the profile.
465
Feature L Profile
Description
Default value
Input field for defing the connection L100*10 profile. Only used when option Connection profile as (below) is set to "Libr profile".
Pos_No Material Name Class Comment Pos_No Rotation Add to
Part position number. Material grade. Part name. Part class. Part comment in user defined attributes. Part position number. L-Profile rotation.
System default System default BLANK System default BLANK System default
Position in plane L-Profile reference in plane. Position in depth L-Profile reference in depth. Picklist to define to which profile the Nothing connection profile should be attached. Also Loose part is possible. Picklist options are: Default Nothing Weld to panel Weld to column Part Add to panel Part Add to column BLANK
Connection pro- Picklist to define the profile type. file as Options are: right flange left flange thickness Library profile Folded plate
Right flange size of folded plate. Right flange size of folded plate. Folded plate thickness.
466
Bolts
The Bolts tab is used to define the bolt anchors. Extra length, protruding from the nut Select anchor components: nuts, washers and bolt Anchor distance from L-prof edges
Slot hole dimensions
Picklist to define which objects are connected by the anchor. Options are: No bolt, Only LProfile or both L-Profile and anchor inbed
Anchor vertical offset.
467
Feature Bolt Size Bolt Standard
Description Available sizes are defined in the bolt assembly database Defines the standard of the bolts generated inside the component. Available standards are defined in the bolt assembly database. Gap between bolt and hole.
Default value 16 mm
Tolerance Thread in mat.
Yes Defines whether or not the thread may be within the bolted parts when using bolts with a shaft. This has no effect when using full-threaded bolts. Where the anchorbolts should be fixed. Site
Site/workshop
Cuts
The Cuts tab can be used to define the cuts for the panels. Also panel-extension and clearance between panels can be defined.
B
2 3 4
D E
A 1. 2. 3. 4. Secondary panel extension distance. Clearance between the two concrete panels. Applying a main part inside cut. Panel thickness will be descreased. Applying a main part outside cut. Panel thickness will be descreased.
B - Picklist for defining how the secondary panel should be cut.
468
Picklist options are: Picklist item Description Same as Default option. Secondary part will be cut to the first edge of primary part. Example
Secondary part will be cut to center of primary part.
Secondary part will be cut to outer edge of primary part.
C - Picklist for defining secondary part cut reference.
469
Picklist options are: Picklist item Description Reference is main part. Secondary part will be adjusted to the main part using a Fit command. Example
Reference is main part. Secondary part will be adjusted to the main part using a Line Cut command Reference is main part. Just like previous options, but now the longest part of the panel will be removed using a Line Cut command. Reference is parts working points. No Fitting or Line Cut will eb applied.
D - Picklist for defining how the primary panel should be cut. Similar to B. For details, see B - Picklist for defining how the secondary panel should be cut. (p. 468) E - Picklist for defining primary part cut reference. For details, see C - Picklist for defining secondary part cut reference. (p. 469)
9.4 Wall teeth (12)

The Wall teeth (12) component connects two perpendicular concrete panels with a teeth connection. The number of teeth can be set. Injection tubes and connection rods can be added to the connection.
Parts created
Teeth connection (2 or 3 teeth) between 2 existing panels. Possibly injection tubes and/or connection bars are added.
470
Use for
Situation
More information 2 teeth connection between two panels. The teeth-height can be modified. Also the clearance between the teeth can be set. The panels must be perpendicular orientated.
3 teeth connection between two panels. The teeth-height can be modified. Also the clearance between the teeth can be set. The panels must be perpendicular orientated.
Concrete panels which are not perpendicular. Before applying the component, create the following parts: Two panels, perpendicular orientated to each other.
Defining properties
Use the following tabs in component dialog box Tekla Structures Wall teeth (12) to define the properties of the objects: Tab
Picture Parts General Cut sec Cut Prim Configuration
Content Setting number of teeth, teeth dimensions and teeth clearance. Properties of injection tubes and connection rods.
See also Picture (p. 472) Parts (p. 474)
Cut sec (p. 476) Cut prim (p. 477) Configuration (p. 477)
471
Picture
The Wallteeth connection has two main connection types: A (two teeth) and B (three teeth). Teeth dimensions can de set for both types on the Picture tab.
In the picklist you can set the general connection type. The options are: Type Standard A 2 teeth bottom top Example Description Same as Type A 2 teeth bottom top
472
Type A 2 teeth top bottom
Example
Description
B 3 teeth bottom top
B 3 teeth top bottom
None
473
Parts
The injection tubes and connection rods are defined on the Parts tab.
The addition of injection tubes and connection bars can be set separately.
Injection tubes
Placing of the injection tubes can be defined per tooth, and the following placing options are available: Option No action Negative volume Yes Description No injection tube (gain) will be created. A negative volume is created using a part cut. A gain is created, but no partcut is created. (Gain and concrete wall will collide.) Yes + partcut A gain is created. A partcut is added. The default part cut size is the same size as the gain profile. Yes + weld A gain is created. The gain is welded to the main part. No part cut is applied, so the gain and concrete wall will collide.
474
Option Yes + weld + partcut
Description A gain is created. The gain is welded to the main part. Also a part cut is applied, so the gain and concrete wall do not collide.
Yes + part add
A gain is created. The gain is glued to the main part using a part add. No part cut is applied, so the gain and concrete wall will collide. A gain is created. The gain is glued to the main part using a part add. Also a part cut is applied, so the gain and concrete wall will not collide.
Yes + part add + partcut
Yes + Cast unit
A gain is created. The gain is attache to the main part using a Cast Unit command. No part cut is applied, s A gain is created. The gain is attache to the main part using a Cast Unit command. Also a part cut is applied, so the gain and concrete wall will not collide.
Yes + Cast unit + partcut
Connection bar
In the section Connection bar, the connection bar profile can be defined. For the placing of the connection bar, following options are available: Option Default Description This option creates a connection bar. The bar is welded to the main concrete part. This option is the same as option Yes + Weld 1". No connection bar will be inserted. A connection bar is created. The dimensions of the bar can be defined in the picture below on the tab. A connection bar is created and welded to the main concrete part. A connection bar is created and welded to the secondary concrete part. A connection bar is created. The bar is glued to the main concrete wall using a Part Add.
No action Yes
Yes + Weld 1 Yes + Weld 2 Yes + Part Add 1
475
Option Yes + Part Add 2
Description A connection bar is created. The bar is glued to the secondary concrete wall using a Part Add.
Yes + Castunit 1 Yes + Castunit 2
Cut sec
On this tab you can define the way the secondary concrete wall is cut. By default the component creates a 2-tooth connection. There are three options:
You can also define a fixed offset value for the cut. If the concrete walls are not perpendicularly orientated , but positioned in a non 90-degree angle, you can define the way the secondary part is fitted to the main part.
476
Cut prim
On this tab you can define the way the primary concrete wall is cut. There are three options. You can also define a fixed offset value for the cut.
If the concrete walls are not perpendicularly orientated , but positioned in a non 90-degree angle, you can define the way the main part is fitted to the secondary part.
Configuration
This tab contains only one option: Print info. The picklist has two options: Yes and No. If Yes is chosen, the component creates extra colored profiles. This can help to set up the component and gives more clearness in component orientation. If No is chosen, the extra colored profile are omitted.
477
The colored Print Info-profiles have effect on numbering! Because they are profiles, they will receive part- and/or assembly numbers!
9.5 Column-beam (14)

The Column-beam (14) component creates a connection between a concrete column and a concrete wall/panel.
Parts created
No new parts are created. Cuts and fittings are applied to the column and wall.
Connections between a concrete wall and concrete columns.
Before applying the component, create the following parts: One wall/panel and a column. The column is placed on the walls end.
478
Defining properties
Use the following tabs in component dialog box Tekla Structures Column-beam (14) to define the components properties: Tab
Picture Column General
Content Defining clearance between parts and defining cut methods.
See also Picture (p. 479) Column (p. 480)
Picture
On the Picture tab you can define clearances between column and beam. Also some additional cut-options are available.
Also some additional cut-options are available. See picture below for examples.
479
Column
On the Column tab you can define the top of the column. From the picklist you can choose wether the top should be parallel to the beam or perpendicular to the column. Also offsets can bedefined. See examples below.
9.6 Opening in wall (40)

The Opening in wall (40) component can create an opening in a concrete wall. The size and position of the opening can be adjusted in many ways. Another feature of this component is the possiblilty to create aan insulation panel in the concrete wall.
Objects created
Opening in wall. The shape can be both square and circular. Possibly an insulation can be added in the wall.
Use for 480

Before applying the component, create the wall. Use the following tabs in component dialog box Tekla Structures Opening in wall (40) to define the components properties: Tab
Picture
Content Defining shape and size of the opening. Also horizontal and vertical position can be defined. Defining insulation thickness. Also insulation offset and creation of partcut for insulation can be set.
Insulation
Insulation (p. 485)
Parameters
Defining to add insulation to the assembly
Parameters (p. 486)
Picture
The Picture tab contains a large number of setting to define the shape and size of the opening.
Type
First you can define the type of the opening. The options are: Opening Opening no rabbet Opening with rabbet Opening only outside Opening only inside
Opening
Opening with rabbet
Opening only outside
481
Horizontal position
The horizontal reference point for creating the opening can be selected from a picklist. In the table below are the available options. Option Point is left side opening Description The opening is created on the left side from the component insertion point.
Point is middle side opening
The middle of the opening is created from the component insertion point.
Point is right side opening
The opening is created on the right side from the component insertion point.
Start panel
The opening is created from the startpoint of the wall.
End panel
The opening is created from the endpoint of the wall.
Middle panel = left opening
The center of the wall is referencepoint. The opening is created to the left side.
482
Option Middle panel = middle opening
Description The center of the wall is referencepoint. The opening is also created from the middle.
Middle panel = right opening
The center of the wall is referencepoint. The opening is created to the right side.
Vertical
The horizontal reference point for creating the opening can be selected from a picklist. In the table below are the available options. Option Pos point bottom opening Description The opening is created on the left side from the component insertion point.
Point is middle opening
The middle of the opening is created from the component insertion point.
Pos point top opening
The opening is created on the right side from the component insertion point.
483
Option Bottom panel
Description The opening is created from the startpoint of the wall.
Top panel
The opening is created from the endpoint of the wall.
Middle panel = bottom opening
The center of the wall is referencepoint. The opening is created to the left side.
Middle panel = middle opening
The center of the wall is referencepoint. The opening is also created from the middle.
Middle panel = top opening
The center of the wall is referencepoint. The opening is created to the right side.
Horizontal offset, vertical offset

The opening can be moved vertically and horizontally by using these two offset value fields.
Rabbet - side
With this picture picklist you can define the side where the rabbet is created.
484
Cut - rotation
With this picture-picklist you can define the rotation of the cut.
Shape of the opening

With the picklist you can choose the general shape of the opening in the wall. The default shape is a rectangular opening. The other shape is the circular shape.
Insulation
On this tab you can add insulation to the wall. The thickness of the insulation can be defined. The maximum dimensions can be adjusted with the Offset value fields.
485
You can choose to create a partcut in the wall for the insulation. The option Cut opening size can be used to define if the insulation should be cut at the opening in the wall.
Parameters
This tab contains only one option: create assembly panel insulation. Possiblilty to weld the insulation to the panel to get an assembly. Three options available: Default, Yes and No. Default-option is same as Yes-option.
9.7 Parts at beam (82)

The Parts at beam (82) component adds (concrete) profiles or cuts to a beam. The position, offsets and rotation of the added parts and cuts can be defined in several ways.
Parts created
The component can add a maximum of three parts (or cuts) to a concrete part. The added parts can be created by weld, part-add and cast unit. Situation where you have to add profiles or cuts to a concrete part.
Before applying the component, create the following parts: Concrete part (column, beam, panel or slab)
Defining properties
Use the following tabs in component dialog box Tekla Structures Parts at beam (82) to define the properties of the components: Tab
Parts Parts Parts Configuration
Content Properties for 1st added part/cut Properties for 2nd added part/cut Properties for 3rd added part/cut Define creating of Print Info
See also Parts (p. 487)
Configuration (p. 491)
486
Parts
The three Parts tabs are identical. All tabs can create one additional profile or cut to the beam. This means the component can create a maximum of three parts.
Profile
On this tab the profile can be defined which will be added to the concrete part or used for the cut.
487
Below the Value Field there is a picklist which defines the connection type. 8 options are available: Picklist item Example
488
Picklist item
Example
Offset from endpoints

By default the parts/cuts are applied between the concrete parts endpoints. These fields can be used to define a possible offset.
489
Positioning parts
Beside the common positioning options Position in plane, Rotation and Position in depth, four extra picklists are added for advanced positioning of the created parts and cuts. Choose side where new parts/ cuts are created. 6 Sides are available Picklist to define the alignment of the new parts/cuts. Picklist contains three options: Left, centre and Right
Picklist to swap end points of created parts/cuts. Useful for asymetrical shapes
Picklist to define if existing cuts should be taken into accounct for the new parts should
490
Configuration
Print info
The Print Info-picklist has two options: Yes and No. If Yes is chosen, the component creates extra colored profiles. This can help to set up the component and gives more clearness in component orientation. If No is chosen, the extra colored profile are omitted.
The colored Print Info-profiles have effect on numbering! Because they are profiles, they will receive part- and/or assembly numbers!
9.8 Rebar in beam (90)

The Rebar in beam (90) component adds reinforcement bars to concrete beams.
Parts created
Complete reinforcement structure: stirrups and perpendicular rebars are created in the concrete part.
491
Use for
Situation
More information Rebars in concrete beam.
Rebars in a concrete column.
Use this component to add reinforcement bars to a concrete part. Before the component can be created, you need to create a concrete part first.
492
Defining properties
Use the following tabs in component dialog box Tekla Structures Rebar in beam (90) to define the properties of the components: Tab
Primary bottom bars
Content The properties of the lower reinforcing bars are defined on this tab. Grade, diameter and extended ways of defining the shape of the bars can be defined. The properties of the upper reinforcing bars are defined on this tab. Horizontal rebars, left side. Horizontal rebars, right side. Stirrups in first section of the concrete part. Defining the stirrup spacing in the first section of the concrete part. Stirrups in second section of the concrete part. Useful when part contains part cut(s). Defining the stirrup spacing in the second section of the concrete part. Stirrups in thrid section of the concrete part. Useful when part contains part cut(s). Defining the stirrup spacing in the third section of the concrete part. Tab for defining comment, name, class,prefix and startnumbers for the various rebar profiles. Defining the bending radius. There are three options: (1) Fixed diameter, (2) From configuration file and (3) Relative from diameter.
See also Primary bottom bars (p. 494)
Primary top bars
Primary top bars (p. 499) Side left (p. 500) Side right (p. 501) Stirrups (p. 501) Stirrup spacing (p. 504) Stirrups 2 (p. 506)
Side left Side right Stirrups Stirrup spacing
Stirrups 2
Stirrup spacing 2
Stirrup spacing 2 (p. 506) Stirrups 3 (p. 507)
Stirrups 3
Stirrup spacing 3
Stirrup spacing 3 (p. 507) Advanced (p. 507)
Advanced
Configuration
Configuration (p. 508)
493
Primary bottom bars

On this tab the bottom main reinforcing bars are defined.
Grade
Input field for defining the grade of the main bottom reinforcing bars. This field cooperates with the Size-field.
Size
This field defines the size (diameter) of the main bottom reinforcing bars. Pressing the Browse-button right of the field will open the Select Reinforcing Bar dialog box. In the dialog box you can select the grade and the accompanying diameter. NOTE: Selecting a size will override the value in the Grade-field above.
End conditions left

Picklist to define the rebars end condition on the left side. The options are: Picklist item Default Example
90 Degree
135 Degree
180
-180
-135
494
Picklist item -90
Example
-45
45
End conditions right

Same as End conditions left (p. 494), but now for the right side of the bottom main rebars.
Bend lengths left

Defines the length of the left end-extension.
Bend lengths right

Defines the length of the right end-extension.
Bar not to create

Picklist to define which rebar should not be created. The options are: Picklist Item
_O_O_O_O_O_ _._O_O_O_._ _O_O_O_O_._ _._O_O_O_._
Example
495
Creation method
This field defines the way the rebars are created. There are three options: Option
No rebars Number of bars By spacing
Description No bottom rebars are created. A fixed numer of bars is created. The spacing between the bars is automatically calculated. A accompanying field becomes active. The entered value is the fixed spacing for the rebars. The number of rebars is calculated automatically.
Positioning and distances

In the right upper side of this tab a picture and some picklists are displayed. These fields and lists are to define the position and de rebar distances. The distance fields are used for defining the size of the rebars. The picklists are for positioning. Below some examples for the positioning rebars on the left side: Picklist item Decription The part edge is normative for positioning the rebar. The concrete parts reference point is normative for positioning the rebar. The picked poition is normative. Example
The edge of the top part cut is normative for positioning the rebar. The edge of the bottom part cut is normative for positioning the rebar.
496
Picklist item
Decription The centerline of the concrete part is normative for positioning the rebar.
Example
Shape and pattern

The picklists and input fields are used to define the rebar shape, rebar pattern and rebar distribution.
A C
A B E D
In the left bottom side of the tab, some picklists are available for defining the shape and distribution of the bottom rebars. A - Shape of rebar These picklists define the common shape of the rebars on both ends of the concrete part. For some shapes distances can be entered (B). B - Distance fields These distance fields only apply for two rebar shapes (A).
497
C - Rebar pattern Picklist for defining the rebar pattern. The picklist contains 6 options:
D - Consider part cuts in longitudinal direction This picklist defines if part cuts in the concrete part should be taken into account when positioning the rebars. Picklist item Example
498
E - Consider part cuts in vertical direction These picklists contain options for defining if rebar shape should consider the partcuts in vertical direction. For both top side and bottom side the placing can be defined. Examples: Picklist item Example
Primary top bars

This tab defines the top rebars in the concrete part. The picklists and input fields are similar to the Primary bottom bars tab. See Primary bottom bars (p. 494). Example of Primary top bars:
499
Side left
The rebars which can be created with the Side left tab are placed in longitudinal direction (just as the Primary bars), but now the bends are created horizontally. The options on this tab (defining rebar shape, dimensions, number of bars and rebar distribution) are similar to the options on the Primary bottom bars tab. See Primary bottom bars (p. 494). Examples of rebars which can be created with this tab:
500
Side right
Similar to the Side left tab, but now the reference is the parts right side. For more information about the options on this tab, see Primary bottom bars (p. 494).
Stirrups
The Stirrups tab is used to define the dimensions of the stirrups. In the picture below, the options are grouped.
B A
501
Section A - Stirrup dimensions The options in this group are the same as on the Primary bottom bars tab. For more information, see the following links: Grade (p. 494) Size (p. 494) End conditions left (p. 494) End conditions right (p. 495) Bend lengths left (p. 495) Bend lengths right (p. 495)
Section B - Stirrup dimensions One input field is available for defining a fixed distance from concrete parts bottom side to bottom side of stirrup. Note: this offset is normative. The input fields in the bottom side of this section are for defining the offset, width and height of the stirrups. Section C - Stirrup shape In this section the general shape of the stirrups is defined. First there is the Create stirrups option. This picklist has two options:
No stirrups - No stirrups are created Create stirrups - Stirrups are created
The general shape of the stirrup can be defined. You can choose a shape from the picklist: Picklist item Description No stirrups are created Example
U-shape stirrups
502
Picklist item
Description C-shape inside
Example
Closed box
Closed box overlap
Divided stirrup
Divided stirrups overlap
Double U-shape
503
Picklist item
Description Single U-shape left
Example
Single U-shape right
Stirrup rotation The rotation of the stirrups can be set with below picklist. The picklist contains 4 options: each option will rotate the stirrup 90 degrees couterclockwise.
Stirrup spacing
This tab is used to define the distribution of the stirrups along the concrete part. You can define 6 zones for the distribution. For each zone you can set a number of stirrups. The distance between the stirrups can be defined in two ways: Fixed spacing between each stirrup. Distance between outer stirrups. (Spacing is then calculated from this distance divided by the number of stirrups).
504
Examples: Picklist item Example
Stirrup reference
The reference for the stirrups can be defined with the picklists. For both ends the reference can be set. See Positioning and distances (p. 496) for more information.
Omit stirrups
This picklist allows you to omit stirrups.
505
The picklist has four options: Picklist item Example
Stirrups 2
This tab can be used if the shape of the concrete part is not uniform. For example, if a part cut is applied, you may need different stirrups on that area. This tab can be used to define a second group of stirrups. See Stirrups (p. 501) for more information. Stirrups 2 Stirrups
Stirrup spacing 2
This tab defines the spacing of the second group of stirrups.
506
For the options on this tab, see Stirrups (p. 501).
Stirrups 3
This tab defines a thrid group of stirrups. You may need this tab in case the concrete part contains multiple part cuts. For each area, the properties of the stirrups can be configured. See Stirrups (p. 501) for more information. Example: Stirrups 2 Stirrups Stirrups 3
Stirrup spacing 3
This tab defines the spacing of the third group of stirrups. For the options on this tab, see Stirrups (p. 501).
Advanced
On this tab you can add extra information to the rebar profiles. The following information can be added: Comment Name Rebar profile Main bottom rebars Main top rebars Side left Side right Stirrups Default Name RB RB RB RB STIRRUP
507
Rebar profile Stirrups2 Stirrups3 Class
Default Name STIRRUP STIRRUP
If the Class fields are left blank, then the following default classes will be used: Rebar profile Main bottom rebars Main top rebars Side left Side right Stirrups Stirrups2 Stirrups3 Series If this field is left blank, the R-character will be used as default prefix for all rebar profiles. Start number If this field is left blank, Tekla Structtures will use 1 as default start number for all rebar profiles. Default Class 201 202 203 204 301 302 303
Configuration
On this tab you can define the bending radius for the rebar profiles. Also the general rotation of the complete reinforcement can be defined.
Bending radius
The bending radius can de set separately for de main rebars and the stirrups. Furthermore the radius can be set separately for the main bends and the hook-bends.
508
The bending radius can be determined in three ways: Picklist item rebar_database.inp Description The bending radius is determined from a configuration file rebar_database.inp. This file is located in the profil-folder. For this option the radius is calculated by multiplying the rebar diameter with the entered coefficient. Use this option to use a fixed value for the bending radius.
Relative to diameter
Bending radius
Rotation
The picklist determines the orientation of the complete rebar structure in the concrete part. The picklist contain 4 options, each item representents a 90 degree rotation.
9.9 Concrete console (110)

The Concrete console (110) component creates a connection between a concrete column and a concrete beam. A concrete console is created which is attached to the column. There a two ways of fixation of the beam: by using gains or by using anchor rods.
Parts created
Console Neoprene strip Steel plate between console and beam Anchor rods
Console connection between concrete column and a concrete beam.
Column and beam must be existing before applying the component.
509
Defining properties
Use the following tabs in component dialog box Tekla Structures Concrete console (110) to define the properties of the components: Tab
Picture Parts Parameters General Achor rods
Content Defining part dimensions Defining the properties of the created parts. Defining how parts are attached Defining the anchor rods.
See also Picture (p. 510) Parts (p. 513) Parameters (p. 514) Anchor rods (p. 518)
Picture
On the Picture tab you can set the dimensions of the console. You can also define the support distance in case of placing the beam on the column.
A C
Section A - the fields in this section are for dimensioning the console, defining the support length and possible beam cut.
510
Section B - picklist to define how the connection must be created in case of an inclined beam. The options are: Picklist item Example
511
Picklist item
Example
Section C - picklist to define the eccentricity of the console. The reference can be both the main part and the secondary part. Additionally an offset can be defined. The picklist options are: Picklist item Description Default setting. Reference is centre of column. If no offset value is applied, the console is placed symmetrically compared to column. Reference is column left side. If no offset value is entered, value 0 is used. Example
512
Picklist item
Description Reference is column right side. If no offset value is entered, value 0 is used. Reference is centre of beam. Reference is beam left side. If no offset value is entered, value 0 is used. Reference is beam right side. If no offset value is entered, value 0 is used.
Example
Parts
The Parts tab can be used for defining properties for parts created by the connection.
Console width
The console width can be defined here. If no value is entered, the width will be the same as the width of the beam.
Neoprene
A neoprene plate (for shock absorbing and sound-damping) can be created between the beam and the console. If a trapezium shaped neoprene block is used, the defined thickness will be the thickness on the column side.
Steel plate
An additional steel plate can be created. The plate will be welded to the column.
Anchor rods
Anchor rods profies can be defined here. The length and number of rods must be defined on the Anchor rods (p. 518) tab.
Washer
Washer profile can be defined here. Thickness of the washer must be defined on the Anchor rods (p. 518) tab.
513
Nut
Nut profile can be defined here. Nut heigth must be defined on the Anchor rods (p. 518) tab.
Tube top
A tubular imbed can be added for creating a round hole for the anchors. This tube top starts at the bottom level of the nut.
Tube bottom
Tubular imbed for the anchor. The height of the tubular profile can be modified on the Anchor rods (p. 518) tab.
Parameters
On the Parameters tab you define how the various profiles in the component are connected to each other.
Console to column
The way the column is attached to the column. There are 5 options: Picklist item Default Part add Description Same as Part Add. The console is attached to the column by a Part Add command. Disadvantage: when exploding the component, the console dimensions can not be changed anymore. The console is attached to the column by a weld command. The console is added to the column by a Cast Unit. The console is a loose part, i.e. not attached to any other profile in the component.
Weld By cast unit No action
514
Fitting to column
Picklist which define how the top of the column must be fitted. Picklist options are: Picklist item Default Perpendicular Parallel with top of beam Description Same as Perpendicular. The top of the column is fitted perpendicular The top of the column will be fitted parallel to the slope of the beam.
Neoprene to
This picklist defines to which profile the neoprene part is attached. It is also possible to make the neoprene part a loose part. Picklist options are: Picklist item Default Beam Column Loose Part Description Same as Beam option. Neoprene part is welded to the beam. Neoprene part is welded to the column. Neoprene part is a loose part.
On the right side of the picklist there is another picklist. In this list you can define how the neoprene part is connected to the column or the beam. The options are: by Part Add-command, by Weld-command and by Cast Unit-command.
Anchors to
This picklist defines to which profile the anchor rods are welded. It is also possible to make the neoprene part a loose part. Picklist options are: Picklist item Default Beam Column Loose Part Description Same as Column option. Anchors are welded to the beam. Anchors are welded to the column. Neoprene part is a loose part.
On the right side of the picklist there is another picklist. In this list you can define how the anchors are connected to the column or the beam. The options are: by Part Add-command, by Weld-command and by Cast Unit-command.
Weld washer and nut to anchor

Picklist to define if washers and nuts should be welded to the anchors or not.
515
Add steel plate to the column by

Picklist to define how the (possible) styeel plate should be attached to the column. The options in the picklist are: Picklist item Default Part add Weld By cast unit Description Same as Weld. Steel plate is attached to column by a Part Add. Steel plate is welded to column. The steel plate is added to the column by a Cast Unit.
Holes in neoprene
Picklist which defines how the holes in the neoprene part should be created. Picklist options are: Picklist item Default By bolt Partcut Without holes Description Same as Weld. The holes are created using the Bolt command The holes are created using the Partcut command. No holes are created in the neoprene part.
Diameter of holes in neoprene

Parameter to define the diameter of the holes in the neoprene part.
Holes in beam
Parameter to define the holetype for the holes in the beam. The picklist options are: Picklist item Default Circular Square // column Square // beam Description Same as Circular. Round holes in the concrete beam. Square holes are placed in the beam. The holes are created using the Partcut command. Square holes are placed in the beam.
516
Create console like

Parameter to define how the console should be created. The options are: Picklist item Default Contour plate Beam Description Same as Beam-option. Console is created with Contour plate command. Console is created with Beam command.
Tubes around anchors to beam

Parameter how the tubes around the anchors should be attached to the beam. The picklist options are: Picklist item Default Weld Cast Unit Description Same as Weld-option. The tubes are connected to the beam by a weld command. The tubes are connected to the beam by a Cast Unit command.
Column Cut-out
This picklist defines the column cut-out. Obviously this picklist only has effect in case where the beam rests partially on the column By default the cut is created from the full width of the column. The picklist options are: Picklist item Description Default setting. A full-width cut-out is created. Example
Column left side cut-out. The clearance between column and beam can be set.
517
Picklist item
Description Column right side cutout. The clearance between column and beam can be set.
Example
Both sides cut-out. The clearance between column and beam can be set on both sides individually.
Beam end cut-out / Beam bottom cut-out - Skew / Square

On the right bottom side of this tab are two more picklists: one for defining the beam end in case the beam and column are not aligned. For both picklist are 2 options available: parallel to column or perpendicular the beam.
Anchor rods
On this tab the anchors can be defind. The fields in the left picture on the tab are for defining anchor length, number of rods, rod distance and top offset. The two fields per hole at the top are for defining the hole diameter. For creating circular holes, you only have to enter a value in the upper field. The lower fields are only necessary if rectangular holes must be created. (See Holes in beam (p. 516)).
The picture and fields on the right upper side on the tab are for defining the dimesions for the Tube top (p. 514) profile and Tube bottom (p. 514) profile. Also the nut height and washer height can be defined here.
518
In the right bottom picklist the presence of anchor rods is defined. The options are: Picklist item Description Default setting. Anchor rods are created. Also holes for the anchors are created. Example
Anchor rods are created, but no holes are created.
Only holes are created. No anchors are created.
9.10 Concrete console (111)

The Concrete console (111) component creates a connection between a concrete column and one beam or (possibly) two concrete beams. A concrete console is created which is attached to the column. There are two ways of fixation of the beam: by using gains or by using anchor rods.
Use for Parts created
Console connection between concrete column and one or two concrete beam(s). Console Neoprene strip Steel plate between console and beam Anchor rods
Use for
Creating a beam support. Also useable in case of two beams.
519
Before applying the component, the concrete column and one or two concrete beams must exist. Use the following tabs in component dialog box Tekla Structures Concrete console (111) to define the properties of the components: Tab
Picture Parts Parameters General Achor rods
Content Defining part dimensions Defining the properties of the created parts. Defining how parts are attached Defining the anchor rods
See also Picture (p. 520) Parts (p. 521) Parameters (p. 522) Anchor rods (p. 525)
Picture
On this tab the dimensions are defined for the following parts: console neoprene height column cut-out
520
Parts
The Parts tab can be used for defining properties for parts created by the connection.
Console width
The console width can be defined here. If no value is entered, the width will be the same as the width of the beam.
Neoprene
Steel plate
Anchor rods
521
Washer
Nut
Tube top
Tube bottom
Parameters
Console to column
The way the column is attached to the column. There are 5 options: Picklist item Default Part add Description Same as Part Add. The console is attached to the column by a Part Add command. Disadvantage: when exploding the component, the console dimensions can not be changed anymore. The console is attached to the column by a weld command. The console is added to the column by a Cast Unit. The console is a loose part, i.e. not attached to any other profile in the component.
Weld By cast unit No action
522
Neoprene to
Anchors to

Add steel plate to the column by

Picklist to define how the (possible) styeel plate should be attached to the column. The options in the picklist are: Picklist item Default Part add Weld By cast unit Description Same as Weld. Steel plate is attached to column by a Part Add. Steel plate is welded to column. The steel plate is added to the column by a Cast Unit.
523
Holes in neoprene

Holes in beam
Create console like

Parameter to define how the console should be created. The options are: Picklist item Default Contour plate Beam Description Same as Beam-option. Console is created with Contour plate command. Console is created with Beam command.
524

Anchor rods
This tab is similar to the Anchor rods tab in the Concrete Console (110) component. For more information, see Anchor rods (p. 518).
9.11 Concrete beam-beam (112)

The Concrete beam-beam (112) component creates a connection between a main concrete beam and one or two secondary beams.
Parts created
Neoprene part Steel plate Anchor rods Connection part Reinforcement bars
525
Defining properties
Use the following tabs in component dialog box Tekla Structures Concrete beambeam (112) to define the properties of the component: Tab
Picture
Content Defining neoprene part dimensions, steel plate dimansions and clearances between the main and secondary part(s) Defining the part properties Defining how the parts are attached to each other Defining the anchor rods
Parts Parameters General Anchor rods Socket
Parts (p. 526) Parameters (p. 528)
Anchor rods (p. 533) Socket (p. 534)
Picture
The fields on this tab are used to define the clearance between the beams and dimensioning the neoprene part and the steel plate.
Parts
On the Parts tab you can define the properties for the created parts.
526
Neoprene
Steel plate
Anchor rods
Washer
Nut
Tube top
Tube bottom
527
Connection part
Parameter for defining the connection between the anchor rods and the socket rebars. If this field is left blank,a profile PD30*2 will be used.
Parameters
Neoprene to
528
Anchors to

Add steel plate to primary part by

Picklist to define how the (possible) steel plate should be attached to main beam. The options in the picklist are: Picklist item Default Part add Weld By cast unit Description Same as Weld. Steel plate is attached to main beam by a Part Add. Steel plate is welded to main beam. The steel plate is added to the main beam by a Cast Unit.
Holes in neoprene

529
Holes in beam

530
Fit secondaries perpendicular to

Parameter to define if the secondary beams should be fitted perpendicular to secondary beams or parallel to main beam. This option only has effect in case the main beam is not orientated perpendicular to the secondary beam(s). Picklist item Default Description Same as Primary-option. Example
Primary
Secondary beams are fitted parallel to the orientation of the main beam.
Secondary
Secondary beams are fitted perpendicular to the to the orientation of the secondary beams.
Create socket
Parameter to define if a socket should be created or not. The picklist options are: Picklist item Default No Yes, only connector Yes Description Same as No-option. No reinforcement bars nor connection parts are created. A connction part is created, rebars are not created. Both connection parts and rebars are created.
531
Connect socket to primary by

Parameter to define how the rebars are connected to the main beam. The options are: Picklist item Default Not Weld Cast Unit Description Same as Not-option. Reinforcement bars are not connected to the main beam. The rebars are connected to the main beam by a weld command. The rebars are connected to the main beam by a Cast Unit command.
Connect rod to connection part by

Parameter to define how the anchors are attached to the connection part. The options are: Picklist item Default Not Weld Part add Description Same as Not-option. Anchor rod bars are not attached to the connection part. The anchors are attached to the connection part by a weld command. The anchors are attached to the connection part by a Cast Unit command.
532
Anchor rods
This tab is similar to the Anchor rods tab for the Concrete console (110) component. For more information, see Anchor rods (p. 518).
Anchor rod orientation

Additional option on this tab is the option to define the orirentation of the anchor rod pattern. This option only has effect in case the main beam is not orientated perpendicular to the secondary beam(s). The picklist options are: Picklist item Primary Description Anchor rod pattern is orientation from the main concrete beam. Example
Secondary
Anchor rod pattern is orientation from the secondary concrete beams.
533
Socket
This tab is used to define the dimensions of the socket rebars. Also the rebar grade can be selected. To open the Select reinforcing bar dialog box, press the button right from the Grade field.
9.12 Inbedded detail (1008)

The Inbedded detail (1008) component can create inbeds in concrete parts.
Parts created Use for Do not use for Before you start
One or two inbeds Adding inbeds to concrete parts.
534
Defining properties
Use the following tabs in component dialog box Tekla Structures Inbedded detail (1008) to define the properties of the component: Tab
Picture Top part General Bottom part Parts Placement
Content
See also Picture (p. 535) Top part (p. 537) Bottom part (p. 537) Parts (p. 538)
Picture
On the Picture tab the following properties are defined:
C D
535
A - Notch dimensions The fields in this frame are used to define the notch. The general shape can be defined with the picklist. The options are: Picklist item Standard Description Same as Circle. If diameter field is left blank, a 60 mm diamter will be used. Example
Circle
A circular notch is created. Notch depth and diameter can be defined.
Square
A square notch is created. Width and length can be defined separately.
Half moon
A "half moon"-shaped notch is created. Width and length can be defined separately.
B - Defining Part name and UDA Information entered in the fields Fabricator Name, Type, Nomination, Article Number, Comment 1 and Comment 2 will be stored in the accompanying fields in the UDA of the inbed part. This information can be returned on drawings and in reports.
536
C - Defining Inbed class and rotation For both top part and bottom part, the part rotation can be set. The picklist contains four options: Front, Top, Back, Below. Switching to one lower option will rotate the inbed 90 degrees counterclockwise. A fixed rotation angle can also be defined. D - Defining how inbed is connected to concrete element With these picklist you define which inbeds (top, bottom or both) are created and how they are attached to the concrete part.
Top part
On this tab you can dimension the inbed top part. The top part can consist from 5 different parts. The profiles for these parts can be specified on the Parts (p. 538) tab.
Bottom part
On this tab you can dimension the inbed bottom part. The top part can consist from 4 different parts. The profiles for these parts can be specified on the Parts (p. 538) tab.
537
Parts
On this tab the inbed profiles are specified. Both top and bottom part are build up from multiple profiles. Profiles can be specified for each section.
9.13 Precast foundation block (1028)

The Precast foundation block (1028) component can create concrete foundation block. The block can be devided in three section. All three section can be dimiensioned separately. Possilbly an inbed and a regulator profile can be added.
Parts created
Foundation block Inbed Regulator profile
Use for
538
Use the following tabs in component dialog box Tekla Structures Precast foundation block (1028) to define the properties of the component: Tab
Picture Parts General
Content Dimensioning the foundation block. Defining the profiles
See also Picture (p. 540) Parts (p. 542)
539
Picture
On this tab the foundation block is dimensioned. The foundation block can be dimensioned in both front view and side view separately. The picklist in the centre-top of the tab defines the blocks reference.
540
Reference picklist
The picklist on the Picture tab can be used to define the components reference point. The picklist has three options: Picklist item Description Component insertion point is bottom side of foundation block. Note: The red part (extra plate under the block) is not taken into account. Component insertion point is bottom side of cut-out for the column. Example
Component insertion point is bottom side column.
541
Parts
On the Parts tab you can define the profiles for the foundation block, inbed and regulator. With picklists you can choose if regulator and/or inbed should be created or not and how those parts are attached to the foundation block.
B C
A - Defining the profiles for the 3 sections of the foundation block. Also the profiles for the regulator profile and the inbed can be defined here. B - Picklists to define wheter the regulator profile and inbed should be created or not. You can also specify how the part should be connected to the column. C - Specifying the dimension for the three section of the foundation block. ALso the column cut-out in the upper section can be defined here. D - Specifying the inbed dimensions.
9.14 Border rebar (93)

The Border rebar (93) component creates hairpin rebars in a concrete panel or wall.
Parts created Use for 542
Hairpin rebars. Use this component for creating hairpin rebars in a concrete panel.
Before applying the component, the following parts must be created: Concrete panel or wall
Defining properties
Use the following tabs in component dialog box Tekla Structures Border rebar (93) to define the properties of the component: Tab
Pins
Content The properties of the lower reinforcing bars are defined on this tab. Grade, diameter and extended ways of defining the shape of the bars can be defined Defining the profiles Stiffener properties Defining the Bolt pattern
See also Pins (p. 543)
Pin spacing Advanced Configuration
Pin spacing (p. 544) Advanced (p. 544) Configuration (p. 545)
Pins
On the Pins tab you can define the hairpin profile properties and the hairpin dimansions. Also the end conditions can be set.
For more information, see Primary bottom bars (p. 494).
543
Pin spacing
This tab is used to define the distribution of the hairpins along the concrete part. You can define 6 zones for the distribution. For each zone you can set a number of hairpins. The distance between the hairpins can be defined in two ways: Fixed spacing between each stirrup. Distance between outer hairpins. (Spacing is then calculated from this distance divided by the number of hairpins).
For more information about Pin Spacing, see Stirrup spacing (p. 504).
Advanced
On this tab you can define additional information to the hairpins.
The following information can be added: Comment Name Class Part Prefix Start number
544
Configuration
On this tab you can define
Extra rotation
This picklist allows you to rotate the hairpin rebars. There are three options: No Around X Around Y
Bending radius sec

Picklist to define how the bending radius should be calculated. For more information, see Bending radius (p. 508).
545
Detect outside geometry

This parameter can be used to detect part cuts in the concrete part. The search area is defined with two parameters:
Distance in material and a Position in plane picklist.
Use these parameters to define the reference for the rebars. See the examples below for more clarification: (The concrete panel has thickness 200 mm. The partcut depth is 100 mm.)
546
Draw geometry with profiles Picklist to define if geometry profiles should be created or not. These geometry profiles define the rebar insertion point, which is based on the values for Distance in material and can help setting up the rebar pattern.
Detect negative volume

If a negative volumne is applied to the concrete panel, you can define is this negative volume should be recognised or not.
547
In below example a Part Cut is added with depth of 110 mm. If the value field is set to 0, the rebars can not be placed correctly. If the value field is set equal or greater to the part cut depth (e.g. 110), the panel thickness will be recognised and the rebars are placed correctly.
Difference in thickness = 0
Difference in thickness = 110
Draw axis
The Draw axis-picklist has two options: Yes and No. If Yes is chosen, the component creates extra colored profiles. This can help to set up the component and gives more clearness in component orientation. If No is chosen, the extra colored profile are omitted.
548
10
Custom Components
Introduction
Tekla Structures contains a set of tools for defining intelligent connections, parts, seams, and details, called custom components. You can create your own components, similar to Tekla Structures standard components. Tekla Structures creates a dialog box for the custom component, which you can easily customize, if required. You can then use custom components in the same way as any standard Tekla Structures component.
You can also edit custom components to create parametric custom components that automatically adjust to changes in the model.
Audience
This chapter is aimed at people who know how to use Tekla Structures components.
TEKLA STRUCTURES - DETAILING MANUAL Custom Components
549
Contents
This chapter includes the following topics, which are the steps you follow to create custom components: Defining custom components (p. 550) Editing custom components (p. 559) Defining variables (p. 564) Functions to use in formulas (p. 574) Defining custom component properties (p. 584) Managing and using custom components (p. 596) Custom components reference (p. 610)
10.1 Defining custom components

Introduction
You can build custom components either by exploding and modifying an existing component, or by creating the component objects individually. You then define a custom component by picking the objects to include in the custom component, and specifying the information the user needs to input, for example, main part, secondary parts, or points they need to pick. You can now apply the custom component in a similar location in the model to where it was originally created. To create a parametric custom component, you need to do some more editing. For more information, see Editing custom components (p. 559). Use the Custom component wizard on the Detailing menu to define the properties of a new custom component. To browse a list of custom components, 1. 2. Press Ctrl + F to open the Component catalog. Select Search results > Custom.
Exploding components
Explode component is a very useful command to use when defining custom com-
ponents. It ungroups the objects in an existing component, you can then remove and modify parts and other objects in the component. To explode a component: 1. 2.
550
Click Detailing > Explode component. Select the component to explode.
3.
Tekla Structures ungroups the objects in the component.
Defining a custom component

You can define and save custom components in the component library. Before you can define a custom component, you need to create a sample component in the model containing all the necessary component objects, such as parts, fittings, bolts, etc. To quickly create a custom component, explode a similar existing component, then change it to suit your needs.
Use the Custom component wizard on the Detailing menu to define the properties of a new custom component. See the following example. Follow the steps in the custom component wizard. Some steps are different for different types of custom component.
Example
In the following example we will create a custom component based on an existing end plate component that we have exploded. To explode a component, select the component, right-click and select Explode component from the popup menu.
551
1.
Click Detailing > Define custom component to open the Custom component wizard dialog box.
2. 3. 4.
On the Type/Notes tab, set Type to Connection. Enter a Name for the custom component. On the Position and Advanced tabs, set the Position type and other properties for the custom component. Click Next.
552
5.
Select the objects to use in the custom component and click Next.
You can use area select to select the objects to include. Tekla Structures ignores the main part, secondary parts, grids and component symbols when you are selecting objects to include in the custom component.
553
6.
Select the main part and click Next.
7.
Select the secondary part(s). To pick several secondary part(s), hold down the Shift key while you pick the parts. Pay attention to the order in which you pick secondary parts. The custom component will use the same picking order when you use it in a model.
554
8.
Click Finish.
9.
Tekla Structures displays a component symbol for the new component.
You have now defined a simple custom component, which you can use in similar locations to where it was originally created. This component is not parametric and Tekla Structures does not adjust dimensions to suit any changes in the model. To create a parametric custom component, see Editing custom components (p. 559).
555
Custom component types

Custom component types are: Type
Connection
Description Creates connection objects and connects secondary part(s) to a main part. Component symbol is green.
Example Main part
Secondary part
Detail
Creates detail objects and connects them to a main part at a picked location. Component symbol is green. Main part
Seam
Creates seam objects and connects parts along a line picked with two points. Component symbol is green.
Main part
Secondary part
Part
Creates a group of objects which may contain connections and details. Gets no symbol, has same position properties as beams.
556
Custom component basic properties

Tekla Structures automatically creates each custom component with a set of basic properties, which we describe in this section. To view the properties of a custom component: 1. 2. 3.
Basic properties of custom connections, seams, and details
Press Ctrl + F to open the Component catalog. In the Search result listbox, select Custom. A list of custom components appears in the lower pane. Double-click a custom component on the list to open its properties dialog box.
Custom connections, seams, and details have the following basic properties: Field
Up direction Position in relation to secondary part
Description Rotates the component. The creation point of the component relative to the main part. Available for details by default. To use this property in connections and seams, select the Allow multiple
instances of connection between same parts
More information Up direction (p. 9) General tab (p. 12)
checkbox on the
Advanced tab when you
create the component.

Class
The class of the parts that the custom component creates. Identifies the connection. Tekla Structures can display this connection code in connection marks in drawings.
Part properties in the Modeling Manual
Connection code
Mark contents in the Drawing Manual
557
Field
AutoDefaults rule group AutoConnection rule group
Description The rule group used for setting the connection properties. The rule group Tekla Structures uses to select the connection.
More information Using AutoDefaults (p. 42) Using AutoConnection (p. 39)
Basic properties of custom parts
Custom parts have the following basic properties: Field

On plane Rotation At depth
Description Changes part location on work plane. Rotates part in steps of 90 degrees. Changes part location perpendicular to work plane.
More information Position on work plane Rotation Position depth
558
10.2 Editing custom components

Introduction
To make a simple custom component parametric, so that it adapts to changes in the model, you must edit it in the Custom component editor. Here you can build dependencies between component objects and model objects. For example, you could specify that the size of a stiffener depends on the size of the beam. So, if you change the size of the beam, the size of the stiffener also changes. You can also add distance variables, for example to specify the gap between a plate and a beam.
Custom component editor

Use the custom component editor to modify custom components and create intelligent, parametric custom components. First, create a custom component in the model.
Opening the editor
To open the custom component editor: 1. Select the custom component. Custom parts do not have a component symbol. To be able to select custom parts, select the Select component icon on the
Select switches toolbar.
2.
Click Detailing > Edit custom component. The Custom component editor opens. It shows the Custom component editor toolbar, the Custom component browser and four views of the custom component.
Custom component toolbar
The toolbar contains the following icons and list boxes: Icon/ List box Description Creates a distance Creates a reference distance Creates distances automatically Creates a construction plane
559
Icon/ List box
Description Creates a construction line
Plane types
Displays plane types you can use when defining distance variables. For more information, see Plane types in the Detailing manual.
Position types
Define the position (or origin) of the custom component, relative to the main part. For more information, see Position type in the Detailing manual. Shows all created variables Displays Custom component browser Saves the custom component with another name Saves and updates the existing component(s) in the model Closes the editor
Editing properties
You can add and edit many custom component properties: Editing task Create fields for material grade, profile, bolt size, and other properties that will be visible in the custom component dialog box. Define part dimensions, spacings, gaps, etc. that will be visible in the custom component dialog box. More information Creating parameter variables (p. 571)
Creating distance variables (p. 565)
560
Editing task Bind component objects to model objects so that component objects adjust for new beam size or profile. Create formulas to calculate values, for example for calculating bolt edge distance using bolt size.
Library component vs. model component
More information Creating distance variables (p. 565)
Creating parameters that use formulae (p. 573)
Use the custom component editor to modify custom component. You can open a custom component in the editor even if you have already used it in a model. When you have edited the custom component, you can choose to apply the changes to all copies of the custom component, or to save the component with a new name. To apply your changes to the library and to all copies of the custom component in the model, use the Copy component to library command. To save the edited custom component with a new name, use the Copy component to library with new name command and enter a new name for the custom component.Tekla Structures does not apply the changes to the other copies of the custom component in the model.
Closing the editor
To close the custom component editor: 1. 2. Click the Close icon Tekla Structures asks if you want to save the custom component with its original name. If you click Yes, Tekla Structures will overwrite the copies of the custom component in the library and the model.
See also Custom component browser (p. 562)
561
Custom component browser

The Custom component browser shows the contents of a custom component in a hierarchical, tree-like structure. The Custom component browser works with Custom component editor views. Click a part in the view and Tekla Structures highlights it in the browser. Or click a part in the browser to have Tekla Structures highlight it in the view. The Custom component browser contains the following information about a custom component:
Model objects, to which custom component is attached. The objects the custom component creates.
You can create links between custom component variables and component object properties.
562
You can create links between custom component parameter variables and component object properties. For example, variable "m" defines the material grade for all plates in your component. It appears as "Material = m" in the Custom component browser (see above illustration). "m" is also a field in the custom component dialog box. When a user enters a value in the "m" field in the dialog box for plates, Tekla Structures saves the value to the part properties in the model.
Popup menu
You can also use the popup menu in the Custom component browser to copy names, values, and references from primary and secondary parts in the component. Then use them in the Variables dialog box to define the properties of custom components.
Copies just the value the object currently has.
Copies the link to the property. Link is dynamic, so when the property later changes the reference reflects the change.
See also
Creating parameter variables (p. 571) Creating parameters that use formulae (p. 573)
563
10.3 Defining variables

Variables are the properties of a custom component. Some of them appear in the custom component dialog box, others are hidden and are only used in calculations. There are two types of variable: Variable type
Distance
Description Distance between two planes or between a point and a plane. Binds parts together or works as a variable reference distance. All other properties, including name, material grade, bolt size, etc. Also used in calculations.
See also Creating distance variables (p. 565) Creating reference distances (p. 568) Creating parameter variables (p. 571) Creating parameters that use formulae (p. 573)
Parameter
Viewing variables
To see all distance and parameter variables in a component, in the custom component editor, click the Display variables icon
The Variables dialog box appears:
564
The Component parameters category lists all distances and parameters that belong to the current custom component. The Model parameters category lists all distances and parameters in the current model.
When you select a distance variable from a list, Tekla Structures highlights it in the model. To delete the selected distance or parameter, click Delete. To add a new parameter variable, click Add.
Creating distance variables

Use distance variables to bind handles, fittings, cuts, etc. to planes, so that the custom component can adapt to different situations, such as different main profile shapes and sizes. You can create a distance variable from point to plane or from plane to plane. These distances can be visible or hidden. Use visible distances when you want the user to enter a distance value in the custom component dialog box. To simply bind objects to planes, use hidden distances. Use the automatic distances command to automatically create distances for the handles of picked components:
How
In this example we will create a distance variable that binds the upper edge of the end plate to the upper flange of the secondary part. Whenever you create this custom component in the model, the end plate will follow the upper flange, regardless of the profile or size the secondary part. To create the distance variable: 1. Select the object from which to measure the distance. This object will follow the plane to which you bind it. In this example, select the plates topmost reference point (magenta or yellow) Click the Create distance icon or right-click the reference point and select Bind to plane from the popup menu.
2.
565
3.
Move the mouse cursor over a view to see the available planes. Highlighted boundary plane
You can change plane types before selecting the plane.
You can also use Hide command if the plane is not accessible.
4.
To create the distance, click when the plane you want to use is highlighted. Tekla Structures draws a distance symbol in the views of the custom component editor. Tekla Structures displays a distance symbol in the custom component editor views. You can bind one object to a maximum of three planes. To end the command, right-click and select Interrupt. Distance object
5.
566
6.
Double-click the distance object. The Distance properties dialog box appears.
7.
Enter a descriptive Name for the distance. To test the distance variable, enter different values and click Modify to see the changes in the model.
8. 9.
Click Cancel. To hide or show the distance variable in the dialog box and to set the other properties, click to open the Variables dialog box. .
Limitations
You cannot pick points in secondary or primary parts. You cannot change an existing distance binding. You must delete the distance and then rebind it. To be able to select distances, select the Select distances icon on the Select switches toolbar.
567
Creating reference distances

Use reference distances to measure the distance between two points or a point and a plane. You can then use the reference distance in calculations, for example, to determine the spacing of rungs on a ladder. A reference distance changes as you move the objects it refers to. Tekla Structures displays reference distances in orange. You cannot move objects by changing their reference distances. To be able to select reference distances, select the Select distances icon on the Select switches toolbar. Example
In this example we will define several variables: distances, reference distances, and parameters, and use them in a custom component that creates a ladder with rungs spaced at set intervals, for any length of ladder. Here is how the variables appear in the Variables dialog box:
1. 2. 3.
Create a ladder frame with one rung 285 mm from the bottom of the frame. To make the ladder a custom component, select Detailing > Define custom component... and follow the steps in the Custom component wizard. Right-click the ladder and select Edit custom component... from the popup menu.
568
4.
In the Custom component editor, use the Array of objects (29) (p. 110) component to create the rest of the rungs. Use the Create distance tool to bind the bottom rung to the bottom of the ladder frame (D1 and D2 in the in the Variables dialog box).
5.
Use the Create reference distance tool to create a reference distance from a handle on the bottom rung to the plane at the top of the ladder. Select a rung handle On the Custom component editor toolbar, click the Create reference distance icon
Bind the handle to the horizontal plane at the top of the ladder frame.
This distance appears as D3 in the Variables dialog box. 6. 7. 8. 9. Go to the Variables dialog box. Add a parameter (P1) to define rung spacing. Give it the value 250. Add another parameter (P2) to define the distance from the bottom of the ladder to the first rung. Give it the value 285. Give the distances D1 and D2 the formula =P2. This forces both distances to be the value defined by P2. 285 in this case.
10. Add a new parameter (P3) to define the number of rungs. Give it the formula =(D3-P2)/P1. 11. We want the number of rungs to be an integer, so add a new parameter (P4) and give it the formula =ceil (15.52).This rounds P3 up to the nearest integer. 12. Add a new parameter (P5) to calculate the distance between the rungs. Give it the formula =(D3-P2)/P4. This formula subtracts the distance from the bottom of the ladder to the bottom rung from the reference distance (D3) and divides the result by the number of rungs (P4).
569
13. Go to the Custom component browser and link the following properties of the Array of objects (29) component to parameters P4 and P5, as shown below:
When you use this custom component to create a ladder in a model, Tekla Structures automatically calculates the correct spacing for the rungs.
570
Using magnetic construction planes

You can bind several objects at one time using magnetic construction planes. The objects directly on a magnetic plane will move with the plane. So you only need to create a distance variable for the plane and not for each object separately. As you can see from the example below, it is much easier and faster to use magnetic user planes than to bind handles with individual distance variables.
Example
Different methods of binding chamfers to the inner face of a flange:
Option 1: Control the stiffeners by using 4 magnetic construction planes one in each direction. Then you only bind each magnetic plane with one distance variable. Option 2: Bind each chamfer separately - a total of 32 bindings.
For more information on magnetic construction planes, read Construction planes in the online help. By default, the handles of contour plates are not visible. To show them, set the variable XS_DRAW_CHAMFERS_HANDLES to HANDLES.
Creating parameter variables

You can use parameter variables to set basic properties for objects that custom component creates, for example, name, material, profile, position number, etc.
Example
In this example we create a parameter variable "Weldsize" that sets all welds in a custom component to a given size: 1. 2. On the Custom component editor toolbar, click dialog box. Click the Add button. to open the Variables
571
3.
Enter following information:

Name = Weldsize Formula = Value = 0.0 Variable type = parameter Value type = length Visibility = Show (this makes Weldsize visible in the dialog box) Label in dialog box = WeldSize
4. 5.
Click OK button to close the dialog box. In the Custom component browser, click Component objects > Weld > General properties and right-click Size above line and select Add equation. Type after the equal sign "Weldsize". Repeat this step for all welds.
6. 7.
Click Save. Click Close icon to exit the Custom component editor.
Your custom component dialog box should now contain the field WeldSize. When anyone creates the component, all welds are of the size you enter in the WeldSize field.
572
Creating parameters that use formulae

This example shows how to create a hidden parameter variable that includes a formula to set weld size to half the thickness of the secondary part flange. This variable will not be visible in the custom component dialog box. When you create the component, Tekla Structures uses the thickness of the secondary part flange to calculate the size of the weld(s). 1. In the Custom component browser, click Input objects > Secondary parts > Part > Profile properties and right-click Flange thickness 1 and then select Copy reference. Tekla Structures copies the reference to secondary part flange thickness to the Windows Clipboard.
2. 3. 4.
In the Custom component editor toolbar, click dialog box. Click Add button. Set Variable name to w.
to open the Variables
573
5.
Click the Formula field, type =, then right-click and select Paste. Tekla Structures pastes the reference to flange thickness from the Clipboard. Now enter *0.5. Formula should now read: =fP(Flange thickness 1.1525)*0.5.
6.
Set other values:

Variable type = Parameter Value type =Length Visibility = Hide
7.
In the Custom component browser, click Component Objects > Weld > General properties and right-click Size above line and select Add equation. Type in after the equal sign "w". Click OK button to close the dialog box.
8.
10.4 Functions to use in formulas

This section lists all the functions you can use in formulas in custom components. Formulas always begin with the equals character (=). You can use the following functions in formulas:
574
Reference function (p. 575) Mathematical functions (p. 576) Statistical functions (p. 578) Data type conversions (p. 579) String operations (p. 580) Trigonometric functions (p. 581) Framing condition functions (p. 583)
Arithmetic operators
You can use the following arithmetic operators: Operator + * Description addition subtraction multiplication Multiplication is faster than division, so it is faster to use =D1*0.5 rather than =D1/2. / division Notes Use also to create strings of parameters.
Logical statement
You can use if-then-else statements to test a condition and set the value according to the result: =if (D1>200) then 20 else 10 endif You can also use the operators && (the logical AND operator) and || (the logical OR operator) inside the if statement. && - both conditions must be true || only one condition must be true
For example to use a value 6: =if (D1==200 && D2<40) then 6 else 0 endif D1 must be 200 and D2 must be less than 40. =if (D1==200 || D2<40) then 6 else 0 endif D1 must equal 200, or D2 must be less than 40.
Reference function
A reference function refers to the property of another object, such as the plate thickness of a secondary part. Tekla Structures refers to the object on the system level, so if the object property changes, so does the reference function value. fP(propertyname, ObjectId)
575
To ensure the function includes the correct parameters, cut and paste it from the Custom component browser: 1. 2. Right-click the property in the Custom component browser and select Copy
reference.
Right-click the Formula cell in the Variables dialog box and select Paste.
Note that template attribute and user-defined attribute names must be written inside double quotation marks: Name fTpl("template attribute", object ID) Description Returns the value of template attribute with given object ID. For a list of available template attributes, see Appendix F, Template fields in the System manual. fP("user-defined attribute", object ID) Returns the value of userdefined attribute with given object ID. fP("comment", 741) returns the user-defined attribute comment of object, whose ID is 741. Example fTpl("WEIGHT",6290) returns the weight of object, whose ID is 6290.
Mathematical functions
The mathematical functions are: Name fabs(parameter) Description Returns the absolute value of the specified parameter. Returns e raised to the specified power. Natural logarithm of the specified parameter (base number neper). Returns the logarithm of the specified parameter (base number 10). Example fabs(D1) returns 15 if D1 = -15 exp(D1) returns 7.39 if D1=2 ln(P2) returns 2.71 if P2=15 log(D1) returns 2 if D1=100
exp(power)
ln(parameter)
log(parameter)
576
Name sqrt(parameter)
Description Returns the square root of the specified parameter. Modulo
Example sqrt(D1) returns 4 if D1=16 mod(D1, 5) returns 1 if D1=16
mod(dividend, divider) pow(base number, power) hypot(side1,side2)
Returns base number raised to the specified power. hypotenuse side2
pow(D1, D2) returns 9 if D1=3 D2=2 hypot(D1, D2) returns 5
side1
if D1=3 D2=4
n!()
Factorial
n!(4) returns 24 (=1*2*3*4)
round(parameter, accuracy) fMarketSize(material, thickness, extrastep)
Round off according to given accuracy. Returns the next available market size for the material from the marketsize.dat file, based on the thickness you specify. Insert the material in the parentheses. For extrastep enter a number to define the increment to the next size (default is 0).
round(P1, 0.1) returns 10.600 if P1=10.567 fMarketSize("S235JR", 10, 0) See also Using market sizes in the System Manual.
577
Statistical functions
The statistical functions are. Name ceil() Description Example (P1=1.4 P2=2.3)
Returns the smallest whole num- ceil(P1) returns 2 ber greater than or equal to the specified parameter. Returns the largest whole number less than or equal to the specified parameter. Returns the smallest of specified parameters. Returns the largest of specified parameters. Sum of specified parameters Sum of squared parameters: (parameter1)2 + (parameter2)2 Average of parameters Average of squared parameters. floor(P1) returns 1
floor()
min() max() sum() sqsum() ave() sqave()
min(P1, P2) returns 1.4 max(P1, P2) returns 2.3 sum(P1, P2) returns 3.7 sqsum(P1, P2) returns 7.25 ave(P1, P2) returns 1.85 sqave(P1, P2) returns 3.625
578
Data type conversions

Conversion functions perform conversions between the three supported data types, integers, doubles and strings. Name int() Description Conversion to integer. This is useful especially for calculating profile dimensions: 100.0132222000 -> 100 Converts data to a double Converts data to string Converts imperial units to millimeters imp (1,1,1,2) meaning 1 foot 1 1/2 inches returns 342.90 mm imp(1,1,2) meaning 1 1/2 inches returns 38.10 mm imp(1,2) meaning 1/2 inches returns 12.70 mm imp(1) meaning 1 inch returns 25.40 mm vwu(value , unit) Converts the value to millimeters. The available units are: "ft" ("feet", "foot") "in" ("inch", "inches") "m" "cm" "mm" "rad" "deg" vwu(4.0, "in") returns 101.6 mm
double() string() imp()
579
String operations
Include string parameters inside double quotation marks within the argument list of string operations. Name match(parameter1 , parameter2) Description Returns 1 if parameters are equal and 0 if different. You can also use wildcards *, ?, and [ ] with the match function. Example (P1="PL100*10") match(P1, "PL100*10") returns 1 Accept all profiles starting with PFC: match(P4, "PFC*") Accept profiles starting with PFC, and height starts with 2,3,4 or 5: match(P4, "PFC[2345]*") Accept profiles starting with PFC, heights are 200,300,400 or 500 and width starts with 7: match(P4, "PFC[2345]00?7") length(parameter) Returns the number of characters in the parameter. Returns the order number (starting at zero) of the specified string and -1 if the specified string is not found from the parameter. Returns the n:th (starting at zero) character from the parameter. Sets the n:th (starting at zero) character to the specified character in the parameter. length(P1) returns 8
find(parameter, string)
find(P1, "*") returns 5
getat(parameter, n) setat(parameter, n, character)
getat(P1, 1) returns "L"
setat(P1, 0, "B") returns "BL100*10"
580
Name mid(string, n, x)
Description Returns x characters from the given string starting from n:th (starting at zero) character. If you leave out the last argument (x), returns the last part of the string. Reverses the given string.
Example (P1="PL100*10") mid(P1,2,3) returns "100"
reverse(string)
reverse(P1) returns "01*001LP"
When you handle strings in formulas, you must use quotation marks. For example, to define profile size PL100*10 with two variables P2=100 and P3=10 enter the formula as follows: ="PL"+P2+"*"+P3 Tekla Structures handles bolt spacings as strings. To define bolt spacing, select variable type to distance list and enter the formula like this: =P1+" "+P2 This results in 100 200, if P1=100 (length) and P2=200 (length).
Trigonometric functions
You can include trigonometric functions in the formulae. Be sure to include the unit using the following prefixes. If you do not include a prefix, Tekla Structures uses radians as the default unit: d is degree. For example sin (d180) r is radians (Default). For example sin (r3.14) or sin (3.14)
581
Name sin() cos() tan() asin() acos() atan() sinh() cosh() tanh() atan2(,)
Description Sine Cosine Tangent Inverse function of sin(), return value in radians Inverse function of cos(), return value in radians Inverse function of tan(), return value in radians Hyperbolical sine Hyperbolical cosine Hyperbolical tangent Returns the angle whose tangent is the quotient of two specified numbers. Return value in radians
582
Framing condition functions

The following functions return the skew, slope, and cant angle of the secondary beam relative to the primary part (column or beam). Name fAD("skew", ID) Description Returns the skewed angle of the secondary part, whose ID is given. Example fAD("skew", 12345) returns 45 where 12345 is the ID of the secondary part, which is in 45 degree angle to primary part. fAD("slope", 12345)
fAD("slope", ID)
Returns the sloped angle of the secondary part, whose ID is given.
fAD("cant", ID)
Returns the cant angle of rotated secondary part, whose ID is given.
fAD("cant", 12345)
Beam to column
Note that slope and skew are relative to a beam framing into a column.
Side view
Slope
Top view
Skew
Beam Column
Column
Beam
583
Beam to beam
If you are working with two beams, "slope" is actually the skew of the beam framing into the other beam, and the vertical slope of the beam relative to the primary is actually the "skew" angle.
Side view
Skew
Top view
Slope
Beam
Beam Beam
Beam
Limitations
These functions do not return positive and negative "slope" and "skew" values. So it is not possible to determine up or down "slope" and left or right "skew" with these functions. Maximum skew angle to return is 45 degrees.
10.5 Defining custom component properties

This section explains how to add different properties for custom components.
Adding an option to create parts

To include an option to create or not create parts in a custom component properties dialog box: 1. 2. 3. 4. In the Variables dialog box, add a new property Set the Value type to Yes/No, Set Visibility to Show Enter a Label to display in the custom component dialog box:
5.
In the custom component browser, link the property to a part:
584
6.
Save the custom component and exit the custom component editor.
When you open the custom component properties dialog box, you now have the option to create or not create the part:
Defining bolt size and standard

To add an option for selecting the bolt size in the custom component, you must add two options: Bolt size Bolt standard
They work together and cannot be used separately.

585
To define the bolt size and standard options,
1. 2. 3.
Click the Variables icon on the Custom Component editor toolbar to open the Variables dialog box. Click Add twice. Now you have two variables P1 and P2. In the Value Type field, select Bolt size for P1 and Bolt standard for P2. Tekla Structures automatically adds the extensions "_diameter" and "_screwdin" to the name of the variables. Do not change these extensions. Change P2_screwdin to P1_screwdin.The prefix must be the same, otherwise the variables do not work. Modify P1_diameter label to "Bolt size" and P1_screwdin label to"Bolt standard".
4. 5.
6.
In the custom component browser, link the parameters to the bolt:
586
7.
587
Defining bolt group location

To define the vertical distance from the secondary beam top flange to the first bolt, we add the following option to the custom component dialog box.
This option requires a distance that binds the bolt group handle to the secondary beam top flange and a parameter for inputting the value in the user interface. 1. Double-click bolts in the custom component editor view. The Bolt properties dialog box appears. Remove any dimensions from the Offset fields, then click Modify. Bolts will move to the same level with the first handle of the bolt group .
588
2.
Select the bolts, then select the top handle. Right click and select Bind to plane from the popup menu.
3.
Select the top flange of the secondary beam.
4.
A new distance parameter D1 appears in the Variables dialog box.
5.
Click Add to add a new parameter P1. In the Formula field, change the distance value. In the Label in dialog box field, enter a suitable label, for example: "Vertical distance to bolt". In the Formula field of D1, type in the equation "=-P1".
6.
7.
Replacing a subcomponent
Use the Name property in the Custom component browser to replace a subcomponent inside a custom component with another subcomponent.
589
In this example we have created a custom component that contains a pair of castin embeds as subcomponents (castin1 and castin2):
castin1
Then we will replace castin1 with castin2. To do this: 1. 2. 3. Select the custom component Right-click and select Edit custom component from the pop-up menu to open the custom component editor. In the Variables dialog box, add a new parameter. In the Formula field, enter the name of the subcomponent, castin1. Set Value type to Component name. Enter a name for the parameter in the Label in dialog box field and set Visibility to Show.
4.
In the Custom component browser, add the equation P1 for both subcomponents
590
The field Cast-in plate will appear in the dialog box of our custom component.
591
To change the subcomponent: 1. 2. 3. Click the browse button next to the name field. The Select component dialog box opens. Select the component to use (in our case castin2) and click OK. In the custom component dialog box, click Modify. Tekla Structures changes the component in the model.
castin2
Changing the properties file

Use the Attribute file property in the Custom component browser to use different properties files for sub-components in a custom component. To add the properties file field to the custom component dialog box: 1. 2. 3. Select the custom component Right-click and select Edit custom component from the pop-up menu to open the custom component editor. In the Variables dialog box, add a new parameter. In the Formula field, enter the name of the properties file (in our example, prop1). Set Value type to Text. Enter a name for the parameter (in our example, Properties file) in the Label in dialog box field and set Visibility to Show.
592
Remember to add the equation (in our example P2) for Attribute file in the Custom component browser.
To use another properties file, enter the file name in the Properties file field.
593
Defining meshes in custom components

You can include rectangular meshes and change the mesh in your custom components.
To define a rectangular mesh type in a custom component: 1. 2. 3. Create the mesh in the model or in the Custom component editor. See Reinforcement mesh in the online help for more information. In the Custom component editor, select the mesh, right-click, and select Properties... to open the Reinforcement properties dialog box. Click the Select button next to the Mesh: field to open the Select mesh dialog box:
4.
Copy the name of the mesh you want to use.
5.
on the Custom component editor toolbar to Click the Variables icon open the Variables dialog box.
594
6. 7. 8.
Click Add. In the Value Type field select the Text option. Paste the mesh you copied into the Formula field.
9.
In the Custom component browser, add "=P1" after Catalog name in Component > Component objects > Reinforcement mesh > General properties.
595
10. Click the Close editor icon to close the Custom Component editor. Tekla Structures prompts you to save your changes. Click Yes to save your changes. You have now defined the mesh in the Custom Component editor.
.
If the mesh is defined in the custom component, other mesh properties, for example, longitudinal diameters, override the properties defined in the mesh catalog, so do not use Catalog name and other mesh properties at the same time. To change the mesh in the custom component: 1. 2. 3. 4. Select the mesh in the 3d view. Right-click and select Properties.... Copy and paste another mesh into the Parameter 1 field (in our example, the
Mesh field).
Click Modify to save your changes.
10.6 Managing and using custom components

This section describes the custom component dialog box and explains how to use and manage custom components.
596
Custom component dialog box

Tekla Structures automatically creates a dialog box when you define a custom component. By default the dialog box has a General tab for connections, details, and seams and a Position tab for parts. Tekla Structures automatically creates tabs containing the parameters and distances you set to visible in the custom component editor. Tabs are named Parameter 1, Parameter 2, etc. Each tab can contain up to 25 fields. If you have more than 25 visible fields, Tekla Structures creates another tab. A typical custom component dialog box looks like this:
This information relates only to details.
597
For seams you can select whether to place a seam at the point you pick, or let Tekla Structures automatically place the seam.
To place the seam at the point you pick, select the Place to picked positions checkbox
To automatically place the seam, clear the Place to picked positions checkbox, and select one of the positioning options.
Tekla Structures creates an input file with the extension .inp for each dialog box in the model folder. You can modify the input file. See Customizing the dialog box (p. 598). If you modify the input file, then edit and save the custom component dialog box using the custom component editor, you will lose the changes you made to the input file.
Customizing the dialog box

To customize the dialog box that Tekla Structures creates for the custom component you need to modify the input file which defines the dialog box. The input file has the same name as the custom component and file extension inp. It is located in the model folder. This topic is for advanced users. Take care when modifying an input file. Errors may cause the dialog box to disappear.
The input file is a text file that you can edit using any text editor, for example Notepad. You can customize the dialog box by:
598
Changing the order of fields (p. 599)
Changing the location of fields (p. 600) Renaming tabs (p. 601) Adding more tabs (p. 602) Adding pictures (p. 603) Preventing modifications (p. 603) To use the modified custom component dialog box, save the input file, then close and restart Tekla Structures.
Changing the order of fields

To change the order of fields, in the input file, change the last number in the parameter definition, as shown below:
Change these numbers to change the order of fields (listed from to bottom of dialog box)
599
Changing the location of fields

To change the location of fields, in the input file, change the last number in the parameter definition. Enter three numbers to define the exact location of the field in the dialog box: the x coordinate, y coordinate, and length of field. The example below shows these values for the second field in the dialog box:
y = 25 x = 374 length = 160
600
Renaming tabs
To rename a tab, change the tab definition in the input file. You can rename any tab except the General tab. In the example below, you would change the text Parameters 1 to the new tab name (for example, Parts):
601
Adding more tabs

Each tab can contain 25 fields. If there are more than 25 visible fields, Tekla Structures creates another tab. You can also add tabs by modifying the input file. To add a second tab, edit the input file as shown below. Remember to adjust the location of the fields, if necessary.
Remember to adjust the field location.
The fourth tab is reserved for the General properties, so you cannot add your own parameter to it.
602
Adding pictures
Add images to make your custom component easier to use. First create the image and save it as a bitmap file (file extension bmp)in the C:\Tekla Structures\12.0\nt\bitmaps folder. To add the image to the custom component dialog box, edit the input file as shown below:
y = 100
x = 50
height = 75
width = 100
The first pixel in the top left corner of a bitmap must be the same color (gray) as the background of the dialog box.
Preventing modifications
Once the dialog box is ready, you can make the input file read-only to prevent accidental modifications. If the input file is not read-only, and someone else updates the custom component in the custom component editor, all your modifications to the input file will be lost. To make the input file read-only: 1. 2. 3. In Windows Explorer, browse to find the input file. Right-click the file and select Properties... . Select the Read-only checkbox.
603
When an input file is read-only, and you try to update the custom component, Tekla Structures displays a warning message saying that the *.inp file is readonly and changes to it will not be saved. You have the following options: Click Cancel to return to the custom component editor. Click Continue to skip updating the *.inp file, but make all the other updates.
Using a custom component

To use a custom component in a model: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Use the keystrokes Ctrl + F to open the Component catalog dialog box. In the Search results list box, select Custom. Tekla Structures lists all custom components in the bottom pane. Double-click a custom component in the list to open its properties dialog box.. Enter the properties you want to use and click Apply. Tekla Structures prompts you to pick the parts or points and parts needed to create the component.
Managing custom components

Use the Component catalog to manage custom components. To open the Component catalog, use: keystrokes Ctrl + F or the Find a component icon on a components toolbar
604
To find all custom components, select Custom in the Search result list box. All custom components have the Number -1.
To view the properties of a custom component, double-click its name.
Exporting and importing

You can export custom components to a file, and then import the file into another model.
Exporting
To export custom components to a file, 1. 2. 3. Select the custom components in the component catalog. Right-click and select Export.... The Export components dialog box opens. Enter a name for the file in the Selection field. By default, the file extension is .uel and the file is located in the current model folder.
Importing
To import custom components from a file, 1. 2. Right-click the list of custom components in the component catalog and select Import.... The Import components dialog box opens. Browse to find the exported file (*.uel), click the file name and then click OK. If the custom component contains sketched cross sections, you need to export and import both the sketches and the component.
To automatically import all *.uel files from a folder when creating a new model, use the variable XS_UEL_IMPORT_FOLDER.
605
After importing custom components, you can check from the Log file how many components were succesfully imported. To open the log file, click Tools > Display log file > Log file...
See also
Performing actions on custom components (p. 606)
Performing actions on custom components

Information regarding custom components is stored in the ComponentCatalog.txt file, located in the model folder. If the properties of the file are set to read-only, the following actions are not possible: adding to favorites adding to search results changing picture deleting the custom component editing keywords importing the custom component removing from search results
In these cases Tekla Structures displays a warning dialog box and the action is cancelled. To change the properties of the file: 1. 2. 3. In Windows Explorer, browse to find the file. Right-click the file and select Properties... . Clear the Read-only checkbox.
Using Excel with custom components

You can link Excel spreadsheets to custom components, for example, to check connections. For custom components, you need to add the property Use external design to the custom component dialog box: 1. Select the component, then right-click and select Edit custom component.
2. 3.
In the custom component editor, click box.
to open the Variables dialog
Click Add and enter the following information:
606
4.
Spreadsheet location
Save the component and close the custom component editor. The custom component dialog box now contains the Use external design property.
The template spreadsheets are located in folder ..\TeklaStructures\12.0\environments\country_independent\exceldesign.
By default, Tekla Structures searches for the spreadsheet in the following order:
Spreadsheet name
From the model folder: ../*your model*/exceldesign/ From folder defined with variable XS_EXTERNAL_EXCEL_DESIGN_PATH
The name of the file must be component_*component name*.xls. For example component_custom1.xls for a custom component named custom1. For more information on the required Excel files, file locations and how to perform the connection check with Excel, see Using Excel in connection design (p. 44).
Using ASCII files with custom component

You can use ASCII format files, to get default values from cold rolled files for custom components, for example. The format for reading files is following: fVF(filename, key value of row, column number) Key value for row is a unique text value (for example, HEA300). Column value is an index (integer) starting from 1.
Function returns value as text. User will define the correct type for parameter in editor.
607
Example
For example, in the custom component editor, add function fVF("Overlap.dat", "MET-202Z25", 4) in the Variables dialog box. The function gets the default value for bolt diameter 16.0 for profile MET202Z25, from the Overlap.dat file.
Key value of row
Column number
File search order
Tekla Structures searches for the files as system files in the following order: model project (set with variable XS_PROJECT) firm (set with variable XS_FIRM) system (set with variable XS_SYSTEM) environments/*your environment*/profil environments/*your environment*/profil/cr
608
10.7 Battering connection (13)

Use to fit the secondary part, for example, in a custom component, either square to the main part, or at an angle.
Use for
Situation
Description Secondary is fit square to the main part.
Secondary is fit to the main part at an angle.
Before you start Defining properties Picking order
Create two parts. To enter the angle and the distance between the parts, go to the Picture tab. 1. 2. Pick the main part Pick the secondary part.
609
10.8 Custom components reference

The following table lists the commands used to define, create, and manage custom components. For detailed instructions, see the online help. Command
Define custom component
Icon
Description Starts the custom component wizard which guides you through defining a custom component. Displays a list of distance and parameter variables. Displays the custom component browser that shows the contents of a custom component in a hierarchical, tree-like structure. The command to create distance variables. The command to create variable reference distancies. Automatically generates distance variables for custom component objects. Defines which planes can be selected. The command to create your own plane.
Display variables
Display custom component browser
Create distance
Create reference distance
Automatic distances
Plane types Construction plane
610
Connection Map
Introduction Contents
This appendix contains example illustrations of different connections, grouped according to their usage. This appendix is divided into the following sections: Beam to beam framing (p. 611) Beam to column framing (p. 620) Splice connections (p. 630) Joist connections (p. 634) Vertical member to beam (p. 635) Bracing connections (p. 637) Welded connections (p. 646) Details (p. 648)
Beam to beam framing

Shear tabs
Full depth shear plate - secondary beam cut short of primary member. Use connection Beam with stiffener (129) on toolbar 1.
XENGINEER DETAILING MANUAL Connection Map
611
Full depth shear plate -secondary member sloped and/or skewed. Use connection Beam with stiffener (129) on toolbar 1.
Simple shear tab to beam. Use connection Shear plate simple (146) on toolbar 1.
Simple shear tab to beam - bolt elimination option. Use connection Shear plate simple (146) on toolbar 1.
Simple shear tab to beam - skewed secondary member. Use connection Shear plate simple (146) on toolbar 1. Simple shear tab to beam - sloped (and skewed) secondary member. Bolts and plate oriented with secondary member. Use connection Shear plate simple (146) on toolbar 1. Simple shear tab to beam - sloped and skewed secondary member. Valley condition. Use connection Shear plate simple (146) on toolbar 1.
612
Simple shear tab to beam - sloped and skewed secondary member. Valley condition. Use connection Shear plate simple (146) on toolbar 1. Partial depth shear tab to top flange of beam - square or skewed, stiffener option. Use connection Welded to top flange (147) on toolbar 1. Partial depth shear tab to top flange of beam. Sloped/ square or skewed. Use connection Welded to top flange (147) on toolbar 1.
Partial depth shear tab to top flange of beam, secondary beam cut short of primary member. Square, sloped, skewed. Use connection Welded to top flange S (149) on toolbar 1. Full depth shear tab. Square, sloped, skewed. Use connection Full depth (184) on toolbar 1.
Full depth shear tab. Secondary beam cut short of primary member. Use connection Full depth S (185) on toolbar 1.
613
Full depth shear tab. Secondary beam cut short of primary member. Sloped secondary. Use connection Full depth S (185) on toolbar 1. Full depth shear tab. Secondary beam cut short of primary member. Sloped and skewed secondary (hip &valley). Use connection Full depth S (185) on toolbar 1. Full depth shear tab. Secondary beam cut short of primary member. Secondary offset. Bolt elimination option. Use connection Full depth S (185) on toolbar 1.
Clip angles
Clip angle connection single sided clip/double sided clip. Use connection Clip angle (141) on toolbar 1.
Clip angle connection single sided clip/double sided clip. Sloped secondary member. Various notching options. Use connection Clip angle (141) on toolbar 1.
614
Clip angle connection single sided clip/double sided clip. Weld prep option. Use connection Clip angle (141) on toolbar 1. Clip angle connection single sided clip/double sided clip. Sloped secondary member. Use connection Clip angle (141) on toolbar 1. Clip angle connection single sided clip/double sided clip. Two secondary members. Bolted/bolted, welded/bolted, welded/welded options. Use connection Two sided clip angle (143) on toolbar 1. Clip angle connection single sided clip/double sided clip. Two secondary members at differing heights. Use connection Two sided clip angle (143) on toolbar 1. Clip angle connection single sided clip/double sided clip. Two secondary members. Safety connection. Use connection Two sided clip angle (143) on toolbar 1. Clip angle connection single sided clip/double sided clip. Two secondary members. One sloped. Use connection Two sided clip angle (143) on toolbar 1.
615
End plates
End plate connection - level or sloped, square or skewed secondary member. Various notching options. Use connection End plate (144) on toolbar 1. End plate connection extended plate with or without haunches. Use connection End plate (144) on toolbar 1.
End plate connection two secondaries. Automatic notch for bolt clearance. Use connection Two sided end plate (142) on toolbar 1.
End plate connection two secondaries at differing heights. Use connection Two sided end plate (142) on toolbar 1.
End plate connection two secondaries. Square and /or skewed. Use connection Two sided end plate (142) on toolbar 1. End plate connection two secondaries. Safety connection. Use connection Two sided end plate (142) on toolbar 1.
616
End plate connection two secondaries. Level and/or sloped. Use connection Two sided end plate (142) on toolbar 1.
Bent plate
Bent plate connection skewed or square secondary, plate near side and far side. Use connection Bent plate (190) on toolbar 1. Bent plate connection skewed or square secondary, plate one side. Use connection Bent plate (190) on toolbar 1. Bent plate connection skewed or square secondary, plate one side. Various plate placing options. Use connection Bent plate (190) on toolbar 1. Bent plate connection skewed and sloped (Hip & Valley). Use connection Bent plate (190) on toolbar 1.
617
Bearing type
Beam to beam bearing connection. Options for 1,2,3, or 4 bolts. Use connection Seating (30) on toolbar 7. Beam to beam bearing connection. Spacer option. Use connection Seating (30) on toolbar 7. Beam to beam bearing connection. Brace support. Use connection Seating (30) on toolbar 7. Beam to beam bearing connection with stub column. Square, sloped and skewed conditions. Use connection Cross (4) on toolbar 7. Beam to beam bearing clamp type connection. Use connection Seating with nail (36) on toolbar 7. Beam to beam bearing purlin connection to single purlin. Use connection Purlin connections (93) on toolbar 7.
618
Beam to beam bearing purlin connection to two purlins. Use connection Purlin connections (93) on toolbar 7. Beam to beam bearing notched seating connection. Square and skewed conditions. Use connection Notched seating (9) on toolbar 7. Beam to beam bearing tube steel rails to primary member. Cope or hole bolt access options. Use connection Tube rail (113) on toolbar 7. Beam to beam bearing notched seat with angle. Use connection Rail joint (70) on toolbar 12. Beam to beam bearing rafter connection to two secondary members. Notching required. Use connection Rail joint (70) on toolbar 12. Beam to beam bearing rafter connection to two secondary members. Plate. Notching required. Use connection Rail joint (70) on toolbar 12. Beam to beam bearing rafter connection to two secondary members. Sloped/ level notching required. Use connection Rail joint (70) on toolbar 12.
619
Beam to beam full bearing rafter connection to two secondary members. Plate. Use connection Cold rolled overlap (1) on toolbar 13. Beam to beam full bearing rafter connection to two secondary members. Angle. Use connection Cold rolled overlap (1) on toolbar 13. Beam to beam full bearing rafter connection to two secondary members. Knee brace option. Use connection Cold rolled overlap (1) on toolbar 13.
Beam to column framing

Shear tabs
Simple shear tab to column flange. Use connection Shear plate simple (146) on toolbar 1.
Simple shear tab to edge/column flange. Use connection Shear plate simple (146) on toolbar 1.
620
Simple shear tab to column flange with seat angle options. Use connection Shear plate simple (146) on toolbar 1. Simple shear tab to column flange. Bolt elimination options. Use connection Shear plate simple (146) on toolbar 1. Shaped shear plate with column stiffeners. Use connection Column with stiffeners W (182) on toolbar 1. Shaped shear plate with column stiffeners. Sloped secondary. Use connection Column with stiffeners W (182) on toolbar 1. Shaped shear plate with column stiffeners. Bolts aligned with secondary member. Use connection Column with stiffeners W (182) on toolbar 1. Shaped shear plate with column stiffeners. Bolt elimination option. Use connection Column with stiffeners W (182) on toolbar 1. Shear plate with column stiffeners. Use connection Column with stiffeners (186) on toolbar 1.
621
Shear plate with column stiffeners. Sloped secondary. Use connection Column with stiffeners (186) on toolbar 1. Shear plate with column stiffeners. Skewed secondary. Use connection Column with stiffeners (186) on toolbar 1. Shear plate to column flange with column stiffeners. Use connection Column with stiffeners (188) on toolbar 1. Shear plate to column flange with column stiffeners. Weld prep and rat holes for moment connection option. Use connection Column with stiffeners (188) on toolbar 1. Bolted moment connection to column flange with column stiffeners. Use connection Bolted moment connection (134) on toolbar 1. Bolted moment connection to column web. Use connection Bolted moment connection (134) on toolbar 1. Bolted moment connection to column web. Sloped secondary member. Use connection Bolted moment connection (134) on toolbar 1.
622
Welded moment connection to column flange. Beam weld prep and rat hole options. Use connection Moment connection (181) on toolbar 1. Welded moment connection to column flange. Sloped. Use connection Moment connection (181) on toolbar 1. Shear plate through tube column. Use connection Shear plate tube column (189) on toolbar 1.
Shear plate through tube column. Two secondaries. Use connection Shear plate tube column (189) on toolbar 1. Shear plate through tube column. Two secondaries. Plate extended to top of column option. Use connection Shear plate tube column (189) on toolbar 1. Shear plate through tube column. Two secondaries, level and/or sloped. Bolt alignment options. Use connection Shear plate tube column (189) on toolbar 1. Shear plate through tube column. Third secondary member after connection applied to original two secondaries. Use connection Shear plate tube column (189) on toolbar 1.
623
Clip angles
Clip angle connection to column flange or web. Single sided /double sided clip. Welded/bolted, bolted/bolted, welded/ welded options. Use connection Clip angle (141) on toolbar 1. Clip angle connection to column flange or web. Single sided /double sided clip. Sloped secondary. Square or bevel cut secondary options. Use connection Clip angle (141) on toolbar 1. Clip angle connection to column flange or web. Single sided /double sided clip. Weld prep and rat holes for moment connection. Use connection Clip angle (141) on toolbar 1. Clip angle connection to column knife connection. Bottom flange blocked or stripped for erection. Use connection Clip angle (141) on toolbar 1. Clip angle connection to column. Seat angle option. Top/Bottom/Both. Use connection Clip angle (141) on toolbar 1. Clip angle connection to column flange or web. Single sided /double sided clip. Haunch extension option. Top/Bottom/ Both. Use connection Clip angle (141) on toolbar 1.
624
Clip angle connection to column flange or web. Single sided /double sided clip. Rotated secondary Use connection Clip angle (141) on toolbar 1. Clip angle connection. Single sided / double sided clip. Two secondary members. Bolted/bolted, welded/bolted, welded/welded options. Use connection Two sided clip angle (143) on toolbar 1. Clip angle connection. Single sided / double sided clip. Two secondary members. Haunch extension option. Top/ Bottom/Both. Use connection Two sided clip angle (143) on toolbar 1. Clip angle connection. Single sided / double sided clip. Two secondary members. Weld prep and rat holes for moment connection. Use connection Two sided clip angle (143) on toolbar 1. Clip angle connection. Automatic notching of secondary member to provide bolt clearance. Use connection Two sided clip angle (143) on toolbar 1. Clip angle connection. Single sided / double sided clip. Two secondary members rotated. Use connection Two sided clip angle (143) on toolbar 1.
625
End plates
End plate connection to column flange or web. Level or sloped, square or skewed secondary member Use connection End plate (144) on toolbar 1. Full depth end plate connection to column flange or web. Level or sloped, square or skewed secondary member. Use connection End plate (144) on toolbar 1. End plate connection to column web. Extended plate with haunches option. Use connection End plate (144) on toolbar 1. End plate connection to column flange. Column stiffener option. Use connection End plate (144) on toolbar 1. End plate connection to column. Secondary member rotated. Use connection End plate (144) on toolbar 1. End plate connection. Two secondaries. Automatic notching for bolt clearance. Haunch option. Use connection Two sided end palte (142) on toolbar 1.
626
Bent plate
Bent plate connection to column flange. Skewed or square secondary. Plate Near side\Far side\Both sides. Use connection Bent plate (190) on toolbar 1. Bent plate connection to column web. Skewed or square secondary. Plate Near side\Far side\Both sides. Use connection Bent plate (190) on toolbar 1.
Welded tee
Welded tee to column. Use connection Welded tee (32) on toolbar 2.
Seated connection
Beam seat with stiffeners. Use connection Rail joint (170) on toolbar 12.
Beam seat top and bottom with stiffeners. Various bolting options. Use connection Rail joint (170) on toolbar 12.
627
Beam seat. Multiple stiffener options. Use connection Rail joint (170) on toolbar 12.
Beam seat. Offset secondary member. Use connection Rail joint (170) on toolbar 12.
Bearing type cap plate

Beam cantilever over column with cap plate. Use connection U.S. Base plate joint (71) on toolbar 5. Beam cantilever over column with cap plate. Sloped secondary. Use connection U.S. Base plate joint (71) on toolbar 5. Beam cantilever over column with cap plate. Beam stiffener option. Use connection U.S. Base plate joint (71) on toolbar 5. Beam cantilever over column with cap plate. Column stiffener option. Use connection U.S. Base plate joint (71) on toolbar 5.
628
Two beams to column cap plate. Beam stiffener options. Use connection Seating (39) on toolbar 7. Beam column cap plate. Tube steel rails to primary member. Cope or hole bolt access options. Use connection Column tube seating (100) on toolbar 7. Wind column to beam connection. Use connection Wind column (5) on toolbar 12.
Wind column to beam connection. Plate offset option Use connection Wind column (5) on toolbar 12.
Girt to column
Single girt to column. Angle connection. Use connection Rail joint (70) on toolbar 12. Two girts to column. Angle connection. Use connection Rail joint (70) on toolbar 12.
629
Beam to column outrigger connection. Primary and secondary member stiffener options. Use connection Stub (28) on toolbar 12. Two girts to column. WT connection. Use connection U.S. seat joint 3 (74) on toolbar 12.
Splice connections
Beam to beam
Clip angle splice connection. Bolted/ bolted, welded/bolted, welded/welded options. Use connection Two sided clip angle (143) on toolbar 1. Clip angle splice connection. One sided. Bolted/bolted, welded/bolted, welded/ welded options. Use connection Two sided clip angle (143) on toolbar 1. Clip angle splice connection. Beams in differing planes. Use connection Two sided clip angle (143) on toolbar 1.
630
To make a clip angle type splice connection it is necessary to create a "dummy" primary part to bolt through. The beams to be spliced will be the secondary members. Make the "dummy" plate 1/8" thick with special properties so that it can be filtered out when making drawings. Use the settings shown below on the Picture tab.
Beam to beam web splice plate welded to primary/ bolted to secondary. Use connection Tab plate (33) on toolbar 8. Beam to beam web splice plate welded to primary/ bolted to secondary. Beams in differing planes. Use connection Tab plate (33) on toolbar 8. Beam to beam web splice plate welded to primary/ bolted to secondary. Members rotated. Use connection Tab plate (33) on toolbar 8. Beam to beam web splice plate bolted to both members. Both members in same plane. Use connection Column splice (42) on toolbar 8. Beam to beam end plate splice. Use connection Joining plates (14) on toolbar 8.
631
Beam to beam end plate splice. Members of different depths. Use connection Joining plates (14) on toolbar 8. Beam to beam welded splice. Stair stringer to landing. Use connection Cranked beam (41) on toolbar 7. Note: Does not work on very shallow slopes, or beams in same plane. Beam to beam bolted end plate splice. Use connection Cranked beam (41) on toolbar 7. Note: Does not work on very shallow slopes, or beams in same plane. Beam to beam bolted end plate splice with haunch. Use connection Cranked beam (41) on toolbar 7. Note: Does not work on very shallow slopes, or beams in same plane. Beam to beam bolted end plate splice with haunch stiffener plate option. Use connection Cranked beam (41) on toolbar 7. Note: Does not work on very shallow slopes, or beams in same plane. Beam to beam welded splice, "Z" cut. Use connection Offshore Z (192) on toolbar 8.
632
Beam to beam welded splice, "Z" square cut. Use connection Offshore Z (192) on toolbar 8.
Column splice
Column splice. Bolted to both members. Both members in same plane. Use connection Column splice (42) on toolbar 8. Column splice. Bolted to both members. Shim plates for differing profiles. Use connection Column splice (42) on toolbar 8. Column splice. Bolted to both members. Lifting hole option. Use connection Column splice (42) on toolbar 8. Column splice with division plate and connection angles. Use connection Column splice (132) on toolbar 8.
633
Joist connections
Joist to beam/ Joist to column
Joist bearing on beam. Use connection Joist to beam, type 1 (160) on toolbar 12.
Joist bearing on beam. Top chord extension option. Use connection Joist to beam, type 1 (160) on toolbar 12. Joist bearing to column. Cap plate, stabilizer bar or angle option. Top chord extension option also available. Use connection Joist to column, type 1 (161) on toolbar 12. Two joists bearing to column. Cap plate, stabilizer bar or angle option. Use connection 2 sided joist to column (162) on toolbar 12. Two joists bearing to column. Cap plate, cap plate level or on slope of joists. Use connection 2 sided joist to column (162) on toolbar 12. Joist framing to side of column. Stabilizer bar or angle option. Use connection Joist to column, type 2 (163) on toolbar 12.
634
Joist framing to side of column. Seat angle across toes of flanges. Use connection Joist to column, type 2 (163) on toolbar 12. Joist framing to joist girders at column. Use connection Joist to beam and column (164) on toolbar 12.
Vertical member to beam

Post and door jamb to top of beam
Post base plate to top of beam. Primary and secondary stiffener options. Use connection U.S. base plate joint (71) on toolbar 5. Simple shear tab to post or channel jamb. Use connection Shear plate simple (146) on toolbar 1. Clip angle to channel jamb. Use connection Clip angle (141) on toolbar 1.
635
Clip angle to railing post. Use connection Stringer stanchion L profile (68) on toolbar 11.
Railing post connection plate to beam stiffener. Use connection Stringer stanchion st (69) on toolbar 11 Railing post elbow to connection plate. Use connection Stanchion curved (84) on toolbar 11.
Shear tab to railing post. Use connection Stanchion side profile (86) on toolbar 11.
Builtup plate railing post connection. Use connection Stanchion double plate (87) on toolbar 11.
Hangers from underside of beam

Clip angle hanger connection. Use connection Clip angle (141) on toolbar 1.
636
Simple shear tab hanger connection. Use connection Shear plate simple (146) on toolbar 1.
Bracing connections
Simple gusset plate connections
Gusset plate to single brace. Horizontal and vertical bracing. Various bracing profiles. Use connection Bolted gusset (11) on toolbar 4. Load connection attribute < Defaults > and select Defaults for Rule Group for best results. Gusset plate to single brace. Horizontal and vertical bracing. Hollow round brace with pin bolt option. Use connection Bolted gusset (11) on toolbar 4. Load connection attribute < Defaults > and select Defaults for Rule Group for best results. Gusset plate to single brace. Brace and primary member at same elevation Use connection Bolted gusset (11) on toolbar 4.
637
Gusset plate to single brace at base plate of column. Use connection Bolted gusset (11) on toolbar 4. Gusset plate hollow section "Birds mouth" connection to secondary members. Use connection Tube gusset (20) on toolbar 4. Gusset plate hollow section tongue plate connection to secondary members. Use connection Tube gusset (20) on toolbar 4. Gusset plate to twin profile brace. Vertical or horizontal brace. Multiple bracing members. Use connection Bolted gusset (11) on toolbar 4. Gusset plate to twin profile brace. Twin profile primary member. Weld or bolt to primary. Use connection Bolted gusset (11) on toolbar 4. Gusset plate with connection plate. Bolted to primary option. Use connection Bolted gusset (11) on toolbar 4. Gusset plate with connection plate. Bolted to primary option. Various gusset plate shaping options. Use connection Bolted gusset (11) on toolbar 4.
638
Gusset plate to hollow section brace. Pin bolt and tension angle option. Use connection Bolted gusset (11) on toolbar 4. Gusset plate to hollow section brace. Pin bolt and tension angle option. Use connection Bolted gusset (11) on toolbar 4. Gusset plate to WT section brace. Notching option. Use connection Bolted gusset (11) on toolbar 4. Load connection attribute < Defaults > and select Defaults for Rule Group for best results. Gusset plate through hollow section column to hollow section bracing at base plate. Use connection Bolted gusset (11) on toolbar 4. Select column, then brace and brace. Gusset plate through hollow section column to WT bracing at base plate. Use connection Bolted gusset (11) on toolbar 4. Select column, then brace and brace. Gusset plate through hollow section column to angle bracing at base plate. Single or twin profile. Use connection Bolted gusset (11) on toolbar 4. Select column, then brace and brace.
639
Wrapped gusset plate W section bracing. Various bracing connection options. Welded/bolted, bolted/bolted. Use connection Gusset wrapped cross (62) on toolbar 4. Wrapped gusset plate W section bracing. Various bracing connection options. Welded/bolted, bolted/bolted. Use connection Gusset wrapped cross (62) on toolbar 4. Wrapped gusset plate W section bracing. Various bracing connection options for each brace. Use connection Gusset wrapped cross (62) on toolbar 4. Wrapped gusset plate W section bracing. Various gusset plate connection options. Use connection Gusset wrapped cross (62) on toolbar 4. Hollow section bracing tongue plate connection to existing gusset plate. Use connection Tube crossing (22) on toolbar 4. Wrapped gusset W section bracing connection to existing gusset plate. Use connection Wrapped cross (61) on toolbar 4. Hollow section bracing WT end connection to existing gusset plate. Use connection Portal bracing (105) on toolbar 4.
640
Bolted brace connection to existing gusset plate. Use connection Bracing cross (19) on toolbar 4.
Gusset plate at "X" bracing cross

Gusset plate WT section bracing. Use connection Bolted gusset (11) on toolbar 4. Load connection < Defaults > properties and select Defaults for Rule group for best results. Gusset plate angle bracing to angle or other type of section. Use connection Bolted gusset (11) on toolbar 4. Load connection < Defaults > properties and select Defaults for Rule group for best results. Gusset plate to top of primary and multiple bracings. Use connection Bolted gusset (11) on toolbar 4. Gusset plate through hollow section primary to multiple bracings. Use connection Bolted gusset (11) on toolbar 4. Gusset plate bolted to top of primary and multiple bracings. Use connection Bolted gusset (11) on toolbar 4.
641
Gusset plate hollow section bracing. Tongue plate connection to secondary members. Use connection Tube gusset (20) on toolbar 4. Gusset plate hollow section bracing. Pin bolt to secondary members. Use connection Bolted gusset (11) on toolbar 4. Load connection < Defaults > properties and select Defaults for Rule group for best results. Gusset plate hollow section "Birds mouth" connection to secondary members. Use connection Tube gusset (20) on toolbar 4. Load connection attribute"birdsmouth". Gusset plates top and bottom to W section bracing. Use connection Diagonal splice (53) on toolbar 4. Gusset plates top and bottom to W section bracing. Gusset welded to primary member. Use connection Diagonal splice (53) on toolbar 4.
642
Corner bracing gusset (boomerang)

Corner gusset plate connection for vertical or horizontal bracing. Use connection Boomerang bracing cross (60) on toolbar 4. Load connection < Defaults > properties and select Defaults for Rule group for best results. Corner gusset plate connection. Pin bolt option for hollow section brace. Use connection Boomerang bracing cross (60) on toolbar 4. Load connection < Defaults > properties and select Defaults for Rule group for best results. Corner gusset plate connection. Multiple braces supported (9-max.). Use connection Boomerang bracing cross (60) on toolbar 4. Corner gusset plate connection. Various plate cutting and connection options. Use connection Boomerang bracing cross (60) on toolbar 4. Corner gusset plate connection. Primary members at differing elevations. Use connection Boomerang bracing cross (60) on toolbar 4. Bracing connection at column base plate. Use connection Boomerang bracing cross (60) on toolbar 4. Select base plate as secondary primary member.
643
Corner gusset plate to hollow section bracing. Members with tongue plate connection. Use connection Boomerang tube diagonal (59) on toolbar 4. Corner gusset plate to hollow section bracing. Members with "Birds mouth" connection. Use connection Boomerang tube diagonal (59) on toolbar 4. Wrapped corner gusset plate to W section bracing members. Use connection Boomerang wrapped diagonal (58) on toolbar 4. Wrapped corner gusset plate to hollow section bracing members. Angles top and bottom. Use connection Boomerang wrapped diagonal (58) on toolbar 4. Corner gusset plate welded to extended end plate. Pin bolt option for hollow section bracing. Use connection Corner bolted gusset (57) on toolbar 4. Select end plate as secondary primary member. Corner gusset plate welded to extended end plate. Various bracing sections supported. Use connection Corner bolted gusset (57) on toolbar 4. Select end plate as secondary primary member.
644
Corner gusset plate welded to extended end plate. Tongue plate to hollow section bracing. Use connection Corner tube gusset (56) on toolbar 4. Select end plate as secondary primary member. Wrapped corner gusset plate welded to extended end plate for W section bracing. Use connection Corner wrapped gusset (63) on toolbar 4. Select end plate as secondary primary member. Wrapped corner gusset plate. Welded to extended end plate for W section bracing. Angles to bracing flange only option. Use connection Corner wrapped gusset (63) on toolbar 4. Select end plate as secondary primary member. Wrapped corner gusset plate. Welded to extended end plate for W section bracing. Web connection plate only option. Use connection Corner wrapped gusset (63) on toolbar 4. Select end plate as secondary primary member.
Rod bracing
Rod bracing through web of primary member. Use connection Windbracing (1) on toolbar 4.
645
Turnbuckle between two rods. Use connection Muffe (26) on toolbar 8.
Rod bracing bent plate connection. Use connection Diagonal brace connection (12) on toolbar 13.
Rod bracing bent plate connection. Bolted to primary member. Use connection Diagonal brace connection (12) on toolbar 13.
Welded connections
Beam to beam
Welded beam to beam. Use connection Fitting (13) on toolbar 3.
Welded beam to beam with horizontal stiffeners. Use connection Fitting (13) on toolbar 3.
646
Welded beam to beam with primary. Vertical stiffeners. Use connection Welded beam to beam (123) on toolbar 3. Welded beam to beam with haunch. Use connection Offshore (194) on toolbar 3.
Welded beam to beam with haunch. Various haunch options. Use connection Offshore (194) on toolbar 3. Welded beam to beam with haunch. Various haunch options. Use connection Offshore (194) on toolbar 3. Welded round profile to round profile. Use connection Round tube (23) on toolbar 3.
Welded round profile to round profile Differing profile size and skewed secondary. Use connection Round tube (23) on toolbar 3.
647
Beam to column
Welded to column with weld prep and stiffener options. Use connection Welded column with stiffeners (128) on toolbar 3. Welded to column. Use connection Welded column (31) on toolbar 3.
Details
Base plates
Column base plate with grout hole option. Use connection U.S. base plate (1047) on toolbar 5.
Column base plate with shear key option. Use connection U.S. base plate (1047) on toolbar 5. Column base plate with stiffener option. Use connection U.S. base plate (1047) on toolbar 5.
648
Offset column base plate (shear key and grout hole optional). Use connection U.S. base plate (1047) on toolbar 5. Column base plate bolt elimination and interior corner chamfer option. Use connection U.S. base plate (1047) on toolbar 5. Column base plate located from face of flange. Use connection Base plate (1042) on toolbar 5. Circular column base plate with stiffener option. Use connection Circular base plates (1052) on toolbar 5. Horizontal base plate to sloped post. Use connection Base plate (1053) on toolbar 5.
Stiffeners
Stiffener plate detail to column. Use connection Stiffeners (1003) on toolbar 5.
649
Stiffener plate detail to beam. Use connection Stiffeners (1003) on toolbar 5.
Partial depth stiffener plate detail to beam. Use connection Stiffeners (1041) on toolbar 5. Partial depth stiffener plate detail to column. Use connection Stiffeners (1041) on toolbar 5. Parallel stiffener plates. Use connection Horizontal stiffener (1017) on toolbar 5.
Flange stiffener plates. Use connection Stiffeners (1030) on toolbar 5.
Stiffened notch. Use connection Stiffened notch (1006) on toolbar 5.
Stiffened notch. Notch cut on bevel to member. Use connection Stiffened notch (1006) on toolbar 5.
650
Manlock holes and lifting lugs

Manlock holes in column. Use connection Manlock column (1032) on toolbar 6.
Manlock holes in beam. Use connection Manlock beam (1033) on toolbar 6.
Lifting lug to beam. Use connection Lifting/alignment pieces (1031) on toolbar 6.
Lifting lug to beam chamfered plate. Use connection Lifting/alignment pieces (1031) on toolbar 6.
Seat details
Plate seat with stiffeners. Use connection Stub plate (1013) on toolbar 12.
Angle seat with stiffener. Use connection Angle profile box (1040) on toolbar 12.
651
Angle seat with stiffener. Bolt to primary and through seat options. Use connection U.S. seat detail (1048) on toolbar 12. Angle seat with stiffener. Bolt to primary placed at a given distance apart. Use connection U.S. seat detail (1048) on toolbar 12. WT seat detail. Use connection U.S. seat detail 2 (1049) on toolbar 12.
Rotated angle seat. Stiffener plate option available. Use connection U.S. seat detail 2 (1049) on toolbar 12.
Cap plate and bearing plate

Bearing plate at end of beam. Use connection U.S. bearing plate (1044) on toolbar 7.
Cap plate. Use connection End plate detail (1002) on toolbar 5.
652
Miscellaneous
Spacer plate between twin profiles. Welded or bolted. Use connection Twin profile connection plate (1046) on toolbar 6.
653
654
Index
A
acos ................................................ 582 anchoring hooks ................................. 119 asin ................................................. 582 assemblies defining ........................................ 30 atan ................................................. 582 atan2 ............................................... 582 attaching reinforcement to parts .................... 124 AutoConnection using ........................................... 39 automatic properties .............................. 11 ave.................................................. 578
B
battering connection (13) ...................... 609 beam end reinforcement (79) ................ 150 beam ends concrete components 76, 78 ............. 83 beam profiles selecting ....................................... 28 beam reinforcement (63) ...................... 144 bearing plate concrete components 75, 76 ............. 80 creating in concrete component 14 ..... 74 bending radius ................................... 117 bind to plane ..................................... 565 binding using magnetic planes ............... 571 bolt assemblies defining in connections .................... 38 bolt hole dimensions in concrete components77 bolted gusset (11) ............................... 225 bolted gusset (196) ............................. 225
bolts bolt group orientation .......................33 bolt group pattern ............................34 bolt position ...................................35 bolt spacing ...................................33 defining ..................................30, 32 deleting ........................................37 edge distance ................................34 increasing bolt length .......................32 number of .....................................33 overview of properties on the bolts tab .31 box girder (S13)..................................186 bracing components corner bracing connections .............245 simple gusset plate connections .......220 bracing connections bolted gusset (11) .........................225 bracing cross (19) .........................229 corner bolted gusset (57) ................250 corner tube gusset (56) ..................247 corner wrapped gusset (63) .............264 double bent gusset (140) ................267 gusseted cross (62) .......................240 heavy brace gusset (165)................269 hollow brace wraparound gusset (59) 256 portal bracing (105) .......................243 simple gusset plate........................220 standard bracing connection (67) ......236 tube crossing (22) .........................235 tube gusset (20) ...........................231 welded gusset (10) ........................222 windbrace connection (110).............273 windbracing (1).............................271 wraparound gusset (58) ..................253 wraparound gusset cross (60) ..........260 wrapped cross (61)........................238 bracing cross (19) ...............................229
TEKLA STRUCTURES - DETAILING MANUAL Index
655
bracing elements crushed tube in points (S48) ............283 gusset stiffeners (171) ...................279 gusset tube in bolts (S49) ...............284 gusset tube in points (S47)..............281 standard gusset (1065) ..................277 bracing panels create ........................................311 built-up beams ........................................185 columns ......................................196 connections and details ..................204 frames........................................201
C
ceil ..................................................578 column reinforcement intermediate links ..........................163 rectangular columns (83) ................160 round columns (82) .......................156 stirrups .......................................159 top and bottom .............................160 component catalog................................15 component design checking .......................................13 components concepts .........................................6 conceptual ....................................25 detailed ........................................25 dialog box .......................................7 publish in catalog ............................21 symbols ........................................17 thumbnails ....................................19 toolbars ........................................22 types..............................................7 using excel ....................................44 conceptual components .........................25 concrete components ............................71 stairs (7) .......................................88 Stairwells and elevator shafts (90) ......90 concrete cover ...................................120 concrete detailing .................................71 concrete slab generation with points (62) ................96 generation with polygon plate (61) ......94 concrete stairs properties ...............................90, 93
connections bolted gusset (11) .........................225 brace to tower leg .........................313 bracing cross (19) .........................229 corner bolted gusset (57) ................250 corner tube gusset (56) ..................247 corner wrapped gusset (63) .............264 defining bolt assemblies ...................38 double bent gusset (140) ................267 gusseted cross (62) .......................240 heavy brace gusset (165) ................269 hollow brace wraparound gusset (59) 256 portal bracing (105) .......................243 seating (concrete) ...........................75 standard bracing connection (67) ......236 tube crossing (22) .........................235 tube gusset (20)............................231 welded gusset (10) ........................222 windbrace connection (110) .............273 windbracing (1) .............................271 wraparound gusset (58) ..................253 wraparound gusset cross (60) ..........260 wrapped cross (61) ........................238 construction planes .............................571 corbel connection (14) ............................71 corbel reinforcement (81) ......................153 additional bars ..............................156 corbels chamfering ....................................73 defining connecting material ..............74 corner bolted gusset (57) ......................250 corner tube gusset (56) ........................247 corner wrapped gusset (63) ...................264 cos ..................................................582 cosh.................................................582 cross arms create .........................................310 cross plate profile (S33) ........................189 cross profile (S32) ...............................188 crushed tube in points (S48) ..................283 custom component wizard.....................551
656
custom components as lifting anchors .......................... 181 browser ...................................... 562 defining .............................. 550, 551 editor ......................................... 559 exporting and importing .................. 605 interface ..................................... 597 properties ................................... 557 types ......................................... 556 using ......................................... 604 custom connections ............................ 550 custom details ................................... 550
floor .................................................578 flooring decks ......................................94 formulae ...........................................573 fP() ..................................................575 functions for equations .........................574
G
general tab ..........................................12 getat ................................................580 grout concrete components 75, 76 ..............78 gusset stiffeners (171) .........................279 gusset tube in bolts (S49) .....................284 gusset tube in points (S47) ....................281 gusseted cross (62) .............................240
D
default properties.................................. 11 Design tab .......................................... 13 Design type tab .................................... 13 detailed components ............................. 25 distance ........................................... 565 reference distance ........................ 568 double ............................................. 579 double bent gusset (140) ...................... 267 double tee reinforcement (64) ................ 147
H
handles of reinforcement ...........................125 heavy brace gusset (165) .....................269 Hole generation (32) ............................111 hole reinforcement creation and reinforcement (85) ........166 for slabs and walls (84) ..................164 holes creating ........................................32 hollow brace wraparound gusset (59) ......256 hypot ...............................................577
E
edge distance bolts ............................................ 34 elevator shaft ....................................... 90 Excel ................................................. 45 excel example ....................................... 46 using for components ...................... 44 using with custom components ........ 606 exp.................................................. 576 exploding reinforcement .............................. 126 exploding components ......................... 550
I
In ....................................................576 indicating component status with Excel design48 int ...................................................579 intermediate links in columns .................163
F
fabs ................................................. 576 fAD() ............................................... 583 find.................................................. 580 fitting options concrete component 75 .................... 78 concrete component 76 .................... 83
L
lacer bars in footings ...........................138 length ...............................................580 lifting anchor (80) ................................177 log ...................................................576
657
M
magnetic planes .................................571 match ..............................................580 materials defining ........................................30 max .................................................578 min ..................................................578 mod .................................................577 modifying reinforcement...............................124
properties automatic ......................................11 default ..........................................11 system default ................................10 publish in catalog ..................................21
R
rebar_config.inp ..................................128 recess nut and washer plate concrete components 75, 76 ..............79 concrete components 77, 78 ..............85 rectangular column reinforcement (83) .....160 reference function ...............................575 reinforcement basic properties ............................117 bending radius..............................117 bending types...............................117 exploding ....................................126 for foundations .............................132 hooks .........................................119 modifying ....................................124 numbering ...................................127 omitting bars ................................122 spacing .......................................121 user-defined attributes....................122 reinforcement settings for drawings .........128 round ...............................................577 round column reinforcement (82) ............156
N
n! ....................................................577 numbering reinforcement...............................127 reinforcement, what affects .............127
O
omitting reinforcing bars .......................122
P
pad footing reinforcement (77) ...............139 panels ................................................94 parameters........................................571 part position number..............................28 parts created by bracing components .......218 defining ........................................26 dialog box tabs ...............................27 dimensioning .................................27 glossary ......................................218 part position number ........................28 setting default prefix and start number .29 pile cap reinforcement (76) ...................134 plates defining ........................................26 dimensioning .................................28 points create in tower (S43, S66) ..............333 portal bracing (105) .............................243 pow .................................................577
S
seam................................................556 seating connections ...............................75 seating with dowel (75) ...........................75 seating with dowel to flange (77)...............84 setat ................................................580 setting up Excel files ..............................45 sin ...................................................582 sinh .................................................582 slab properties ......................................96 type .............................................95 slab bars (18) .....................................170 slab generation with points (62) ................96 slab generation with polygon plate (61) ......94 slabs ..................................................94 about ...........................................94
658
slotted holes defining ........................................ 36 spacing reinforcing bars ....................... 121 sqave .............................................. 578 sqrt ................................................. 577 sqsum .............................................. 578 stairs concrete ................................. 88, 90 stairs, concrete properties ............................... 90, 93 stairwell .............................................. 90 standard bracing connection (67) ........... 236 standard gusset (1065) ........................ 277 starter bars (86, 87) ............................ 141 stiffeners gusset stiffeners (171) ................... 279 string ............................................... 579 strip footing reinforcement (75) .............. 132 sum ................................................. 578 system default properties ....................... 10
tower legs create.........................................308 tube crossing (22) ...............................235 tube gusset (20) .................................231 two-sided seating with dowel (76) .............80 two-sided seating with dowel to flange (78) .86
U
up direction ...........................................9 user-defined reinforcement attributes.......122 using ASCII files with custom component .607 using Excel with custom components ......606
V
variables ...........................................564
T
tan .................................................. 582 tanh ................................................. 582 tapered beam (S98) ............................ 190 tapered beam 2 (S45) .......................... 192 tapered beam to beam (200) ................. 207 tapered beam to column (197) ............... 204 tapered column (S99) .......................... 196 tapered column 2 (S44)........................ 199 tapered column base plate (1068) .......... 209 tapered column to beam (199) ............... 206 tapered component properties ............... 210 tapered frame comonor (S53) ................ 201 thumbnail images ................................. 19 tolerances in concrete stairs ............................ 90 tower create ........................................ 306 tower bracing modify ........................................ 327 tower components brace to brace connections ............. 320 brace to tower leg connections ........ 313 create bracing panels .................... 311 create cross arms ......................... 310 create legs .................................. 308 create tower ................................ 306 modify bracing ............................. 327
W
welded gusset (10) ..............................222 welds defining ..................................30, 39 windbrace connection (110) ..................273 windbracing (1) ..................................271 wraparound gusset (58)........................253 wraparound gusset cross (60) ................260 wrapped cross (61) .............................238
659

Detailing 120 Enu

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Detailing 120 Enu

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Detailing 120 Enu

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Tekla Structures

Product version 12.0 March 2006

Getting Started ............................................................................................ 5

Steel Connection Properties .................................................................. 49

TEKLA STRUCTURES - DETAILING MANUAL Contents

Concrete Detailing .................................................................................... 71

TEKLA STRUCTURES - DETAILING MANUAL Contents

Reinforcement ......................................................................................... 115

TEKLA STRUCTURES - DETAILING MANUAL Contents

Built-up Components ............................................................................. 185

Bracing Components ............................................................................. 217

TEKLA STRUCTURES - DETAILING MANUAL Contents

Tower Components ................................................................................ 305

Automated Reinforcement Layout ...................................................... 353

TEKLA STRUCTURES - DETAILING MANUAL Contents

CS Components ...................................................................................... 459

10 Custom Components ............................................................................. 549

Appendix B : Connection Map ........................................................... 611 Index ......................................................................................................... 655

TEKLA STRUCTURES - DETAILING MANUAL Contents

Additional help resources

TEKLA STRUCTURES - DETAILING MANUAL Preface

Area office Japan Malaysia Middle East Sweden UK US

E-mail address TeklaStructures.Support.JPN@Tekla.com TeklaStructures.Support.MY@Tekla.com TeklaStructures.Support.ME@Tekla.com TeklaStructures.Support.SWE@Tekla.com TeklaStructures.Support.UK@Tekla.com TeklaStructures.Support.US@Tekla.com

Conventions used in this guide

TEKLA STRUCTURES - DETAILING MANUAL Preface

TEKLA STRUCTURES - DETAILING MANUAL Preface

Chapter 1: Getting Started

Chapter 2: Steel Connection Properties

Chapter 3: Concrete Detailing

Chapter 5: Built-up Components

Chapter 6: Bracing Components

Chapter 7: Tower Components

Chapter 8: Automated Reinforcement Layout

Chapter 10: Custom Components

Appendix B: Connection Map

TEKLA STRUCTURES - DETAILING MANUAL Preface

TEKLA STRUCTURES - DETAILING MANUAL Getting Started

TEKLA STRUCTURES - DETAILING MANUAL Getting Started

Stiffeners, base plates, lifting hooks

System and custom components

Custom Components (p. 549) Exploding components (p. 550)

Component dialog box

TEKLA STRUCTURES - DETAILING MANUAL Getting Started

Tekla Structures uses the automatic property value

TEKLA STRUCTURES - DETAILING MANUAL Getting Started

Pick the parts in the order shown in the Picture

Manually defining up direction

Automatic and default properties

TEKLA STRUCTURES - DETAILING MANUAL Getting Started

Default and automatic properties

More information Using AutoDefaults (p. 42)

TEKLA STRUCTURES - DETAILING MANUAL Getting Started

More information Up direction (p. 9)

Position in relation to primary part

Locking objects Colors

AutoDefaults Rule Group

Using AutoDefaults (p. 42)

AutoConnection Rule Group

TEKLA STRUCTURES - DETAILING MANUAL Getting Started

Design and Design type tabs